Location via proxy:   [ UP ]  
[Report a bug]   [Manage cookies]                

Door & Lock: Section

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 349

BODY EXTERIOR, DOORS, ROOF & VEHICLE SECURITY

SECTION DLKDOOR & LOCK


B

E
CONTENTS
WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM : System Descrip- F
tion ...........................................................................21
PRECAUTION ............................................... 9 INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM : Circuit Diagram ......23
G
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 9 DOOR LOCK FUNCTION ..........................................26
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System DOOR LOCK FUNCTION : System Description ....27
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-
SIONER" ................................................................... 9 TRUNK OPEN FUNCTION ........................................28 H
Precautions Necessary for Steering Wheel Rota- TRUNK OPEN FUNCTION : System Description....29
tion After Battery Disconnection ................................ 9 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION ..................30
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover.... 10 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION : Sys- I
Work ........................................................................ 10 tem Description ........................................................30
PREPARATION ........................................... 11 KEY REMINDER FUNCTION ....................................32
J
KEY REMINDER FUNCTION : System Descrip-
PREPARATION ..................................................11 tion ...........................................................................32
Commercial Service Tools ...................................... 11
WARNING FUNCTION ..............................................33 DLK
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ............................. 12 WARNING FUNCTION : System Description ..........33
COMPONENT PARTS .......................................12 SYSTEM (TRUNK LID OPENER SYSTEM) ..... 36
Component Parts Location .................................... 12 System Description ..................................................36 L
Inside Key Antenna (Instrument Center) ................. 14 Circuit Diagram ........................................................37
Inside Key Antenna (Console) ................................ 14
Inside Key Antenna (Trunk Room) .......................... 14 DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) ........................... 39 M
Outside Key Antenna (Rear Bumper) ..................... 14
COMMON ITEM .........................................................39
Outside Key Antenna (Driver Side) ......................... 15
COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM -
Outside Key Antenna (Passenger Side) ................. 15
COMMON ITEM) .....................................................39 N
Front Door Lock Assembly (Driver Side) ................. 15
Front Door Lock Assembly (Passenger Side) ......... 15 DOOR LOCK ..............................................................40
Remote Keyless Entry Receiver ............................. 16 DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM -
Intelligent Key Warning Buzzer ............................... 16 O
DOOR LOCK) ..........................................................40
Trunk Lid Lock Assembly ........................................ 16
INTELLIGENT KEY ....................................................42
SYSTEM (POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM) ....17 INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM - P
System Description ................................................. 17 INTELLIGENT KEY) ................................................42
Circuit Diagram ....................................................... 19
TRUNK .......................................................................45
SYSTEM (INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM) ..........21 TRUNK : CONSULT Function (BCM - TRUNK) ......45
INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM ................................... 21 ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION .............. 46

Revision: 2012 July DLK-1 N17


BCM ................................................................... 46 PASSENGER SIDE :
List of ECU Reference ............................................ 46 Component Function Check .................................. 73
PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ............ 73
WIRING DIAGRAM ..................................... 47
REAR LH ................................................................... 74
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM .................................. 47 REAR LH : Component Function Check ............... 75
REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure ............................ 75
LHD ........................................................................... 47
LHD : Wiring Diagram ............................................. 47 REAR RH ................................................................... 76
REAR RH : Component Function Check ............... 76
RHD ........................................................................... 49 REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure ........................... 76
RHD : Wiring Diagram ............................................ 50
DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH ............. 78
BASIC INSPECTION ................................... 53 Component Function Check .................................. 78
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 78
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ........ 53
Component Inspection ............................................ 80
Work Flow ............................................................... 53
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH ............................... 81
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT ................... 56
Component Function Check .................................. 81
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 81
CONTROL UNIT ........................................................ 56 Component Inspection ............................................ 82
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING
CONTROL UNIT : Description ................................ 56
DOOR SWITCH ................................................. 84
Component Function Check .................................. 84
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING
CONTROL UNIT : Work Procedure ........................ 56 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 84
Component Inspection ............................................ 85
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ......................... 57
HAZARD FUNCTION ........................................ 86
B2621 INSIDE ANTENNA ................................. 57 Component Function Check .................................. 86
DTC Logic ............................................................... 57 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 86
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 57
INTELLIGENT KEY ........................................... 87
B2622 INSIDE ANTENNA ................................. 59 Component Function Check .................................. 87
DTC Logic ............................................................... 59 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 87
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 59
INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING BUZZER ......... 88
B2623 INSIDE ANTENNA ................................. 61 Component Function Check .................................. 88
DTC Logic ............................................................... 61 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 88
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 61 Component Inspection ............................................ 89

B2626 OUTSIDE ANTENNA ............................. 63 KEY WARNING LAMP ...................................... 90


DTC Logic ............................................................... 63 Component Function Check .................................. 90
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 63 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 90

B2627 OUTSIDE ANTENNA ............................. 66 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER ......... 91


DTC Logic ............................................................... 66 Component Function Check .................................. 91
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 66 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 91

B2628 OUTSIDE ANTENNA ............................. 69 SHIFT P WARNING LAMP ................................ 97


DTC Logic ............................................................... 69 Component Function Check .................................. 97
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 69 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 97

COMBINATION METER BUZZER .................... 71 TRUNK LID OPENER ACTUATOR .................. 98


Component Function Check ................................. 71 Component Function Check .................................. 98
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 71 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 98

DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR ................................ 72 TRUNK LID OPENER SWITCH ........................ 99


Component Function Check .................................. 99
DRIVER SIDE ............................................................ 72 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 99
DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check ........ 72 Component Inspection .......................................... 100
DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure .................... 72
TRUNK ROOM LAMP SWITCH ....................... 101
PASSENGER SIDE ................................................... 73

Revision: 2012 July DLK-2 N17


Component Function Check ................................ 101 TRUNK LID DOES NOT OPEN ...................... 113
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 101 A
Component Inspection .......................................... 102 TRUNK LID OPENER SWITCH ............................... 113
TRUNK LID OPENER SWITCH : Description ....... 113
UNLOCK SENSOR .......................................... 103 TRUNK LID OPENER SWITCH : Diagnosis Pro-
Component Function Check ................................ 103 cedure .................................................................... 113 B
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 103
Component Inspection .......................................... 104 INTELLIGENT KEY .................................................. 113
INTELLIGENT KEY : Description .......................... 113 C
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................ 106 INTELLIGENT KEY : Diagnosis Procedure ........... 113

DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH IGNITION POSITION WARNING FUNCTION


DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH ............ 106 DOES NOT OPERATE .................................... 115 D
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 115
ALL DOOR .............................................................. 106
ALL DOOR : Description ....................................... 106 AUTO DOOR LOCK OPERATION DOES NOT E
ALL DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure ........................ 106 OPERATE ....................................................... 116
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 116
DRIVER SIDE .......................................................... 106
DRIVER SIDE : Description .................................. 106 VEHICLE SPEED SENSING AUTO LOCK F
DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ................... 106 OPERATION DOES NOT OPERATE ............. 117
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 117
PASSENGER SIDE ................................................. 106
G
PASSENGER SIDE : Description ......................... 107 IGN OFF INTERLOCK DOOR UNLOCK
PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure .......... 107 FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE ................ 118
REAR LH ................................................................. 107 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 118
H
REAR LH : Description .......................................... 107 HAZARD AND BUZZER REMINDER DOES
REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure .......................... 107
NOT OPERATE ............................................... 119
REAR RH ................................................................. 107 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 119 I
REAR RH : Description ......................................... 107
REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure .......................... 107
KEY REMINDER FUNCTION DOES NOT OP-
ERATE ............................................................. 120 J
DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 120
DRIVER SIDE DOOR LOCK KNOB OR DOOR
OFF POSITION WARNING DOES NOT OP-
KEY CYLINDER ............................................... 109
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 109
ERATE ............................................................. 121 DLK
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 121
DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH
P POSITION WARNING DOES NOT OPER-
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH .............................. 110 L
ATE .................................................................. 122
ALL DOOR REQUEST SWITCHES ........................ 110 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 122
ALL DOOR REQUEST SWITCHES : Description.. 110
ALL DOOR REQUEST SWITCHES : Diagnosis ACC WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE ........ 124 M
Procedure .............................................................. 110 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 124

DRIVER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH ............. 110 TAKE AWAY WARNING DOES NOT OPER-
N
DRIVER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : De- ATE .................................................................. 125
scription ................................................................. 111 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 125
DRIVER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : Diag-
nosis Procedure .................................................... 111
INTELLIGENT KEY LOW BATTERY WARN- O
ING DOES NOT OPERATE ............................ 127
PASSENGER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH .... 111 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 127
PASSENGER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : P
Description ............................................................ 111 DOOR LOCK OPERATION WARNING DOES
PASSENGER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : NOT OPERATE ............................................... 128
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 111 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 128

DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH IN- KEY ID WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE .... 129
TELLIGENT KEY .............................................. 112 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 129
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 112

Revision: 2012 July DLK-3 N17


PANIC ALARM FUNCTION DOES NOT OP- REAR DOOR .................................................... 158
ERATE ............................................................. 130 Exploded View ...................................................... 158
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................130
DOOR ASSEMBLY ................................................. 158
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAG- DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation .... 158
NOSES ............................................................. 131 DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment .......................... 160
Work Flow ..............................................................131
DOOR STRIKER ..................................................... 161
Inspection Procedure .............................................133
DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installation ........ 161
Diagnostic Worksheet ............................................135
DOOR HINGE .......................................................... 161
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION .............. 137 DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation ............ 161
HOOD ............................................................... 137 DOOR CHECK LINK ............................................... 162
Exploded View .......................................................137 DOOR CHECK LINK : Removal and Installation . 162
HOOD ASSEMBLY ..................................................137 TRUNK LID ....................................................... 163
HOOD ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation .....137 Exploded View ...................................................... 163
HOOD ASSEMBLY : Adjustment ..........................138
TRUNK LID ASSEMBLY ......................................... 163
HOOD HINGE ...........................................................139 TRUNK LID ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installa-
HOOD HINGE : Removal and Installation .............140 tion ........................................................................ 163
TRUNK LID ASSEMBLY : Adjustment .................. 164
HOOD SUPPORT ROD ............................................140
HOOD SUPPORT ROD : Removal and Installa- TRUNK LID STRIKER ............................................. 165
tion .........................................................................140 TRUNK LID STRIKER : Removal and Installation. 165
RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT ......................... 141 TRUNK LID HINGE ................................................. 166
TRUNK LID HINGE : Removal and Installation .... 166
HR12DE ....................................................................141
HR12DE : Exploded View ......................................141 TORSION BAR ........................................................ 166
HR12DE : Removal and Installation ......................142 TORSION BAR : Removal and Installation ........... 166
HR15DE ....................................................................144 TRUNK LID WEATHER-STRIP ............................... 167
HR15DE : Exploded View ......................................145 TRUNK LID WEATHER-STRIP : Removal and In-
HR15DE : Removal and Installation ......................145 stallation ................................................................ 167
K9K ...........................................................................147 HOOD LOCK .................................................... 169
K9K : Exploded View .............................................148 Exploded View ...................................................... 169
K9K : Removal and Installation .............................148
HOOD LOCK ........................................................... 170
FRONT FENDER ............................................. 151 HOOD LOCK : Removal and Installation .............. 170
Exploded View .......................................................151
HOOD LOCK CONTROL CABLE ........................... 171
FRONT FENDER ......................................................151 HOOD LOCK CONTROL CABLE : Removal and
FRONT FENDER : Removal and Installation ........151 Installation ............................................................. 171
FENDER COVER .....................................................152 HOOD LOCK BELL CRANK ................................... 173
FENDER COVER : Removal and Installation ........152 HOOD LOCK BELL CRANK : Removal and Instal-
lation ..................................................................... 173
FRONT DOOR ................................................. 153 Inspection .............................................................. 174
Exploded View .......................................................153
FRONT DOOR LOCK ....................................... 175
DOOR ASSEMBLY ..................................................153
Exploded View ...................................................... 175
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation .....153
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment ..........................155 DOOR LOCK ........................................................... 175
DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation .............. 175
DOOR STRIKER ......................................................156
DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installation .........156 INSIDE HANDLE ..................................................... 176
INSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation ........ 176
DOOR HINGE ...........................................................156
DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation .............156 OUTSIDE HANDLE ................................................. 177
OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation .... 177
DOOR CHECK LINK ................................................157
DOOR CHECK LINK : Removal and Installation ..157 REAR DOOR LOCK ......................................... 180

Revision: 2012 July DLK-4 N17


Exploded View ...................................................... 180 REAR BUMPER ....................................................... 199
REAR BUMPER : Removal and Installation .......... 199 A
DOOR LOCK ........................................................... 180
DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation .............. 180 INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING BUZZER ....... 200
Removal and Installation ....................................... 200
INSIDE HANDLE ..................................................... 181 B
INSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation ........ 181 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER ....... 201
Removal and Installation ....................................... 201
OUTSIDE HANDLE ................................................. 182
OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation .... 182 C
INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY ....................... 202
Removal and Installation ....................................... 202
TRUNK LID LOCK ........................................... 185
Exploded View ...................................................... 185 WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM
D
TRUNK LID LOCK ................................................... 186 PRECAUTION ............................................ 203
TRUNK LID LOCK : Removal and Installation ...... 186
PRECAUTIONS ............................................... 203 E
TRUNK LID OPENER HANDLE .............................. 187 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
TRUNK LID OPENER HANDLE : Removal and In- (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-
stallation ................................................................ 187 SIONER" ............................................................... 203
Precautions Necessary for Steering Wheel Rota- F
TRUNK LID OPENER CABLE ................................ 188 tion After Battery Disconnection ............................ 203
TRUNK LID OPENER CABLE : Removal and In- Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover.. 204
stallation ................................................................ 188 Work ...................................................................... 204 G
EMERGENCY LEVER ............................................. 189 PREPARATION ......................................... 205
EMERGENCY LEVER : Unlock procedures ......... 189
PREPARATION ............................................... 205 H
FUEL FILLER LID OPENER ............................ 190 Commercial Service Tools ..................................... 205
Exploded View ...................................................... 190

FUEL FILLER LID ................................................... 191


SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ........................... 206 I
FUEL FILLER LID : Removal and Installation ....... 191 COMPONENT PARTS .................................... 206
FUEL FILLER OPENER CABLE ............................. 192 Component Parts Location .................................. 206
Front Door Lock Assembly (Driver Side) ............... 207 J
FUEL FILLER OPENER CABLE : Removal and
Installation ............................................................. 192 Front Door Lock Assembly (Passenger Side) ....... 207
Remote Keyless Entry Receiver ............................ 207
FUEL FILLER LID LOCK ........................................ 193 Trunk Lid Lock Assembly ...................................... 208 DLK
FUEL FILLER LID LOCK : Removal and Installa-
tion ........................................................................ 193 POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM .................... 209
System Description ................................................ 209
L
DOOR SWITCH ................................................ 195 Circuit Diagram ...................................................... 212
Exploded View ...................................................... 195
Removal and Installation ....................................... 195 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM ........... 215
System Description ................................................ 215 M
TRUNK LID OPENER SWITCH ....................... 196 Circuit Diagram ...................................................... 218
Removal and Installation ....................................... 196
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) ......................... 221
INSIDE KEY ANTENNA ................................... 197 N
COMMON ITEM ....................................................... 221
INSTRUMENT CENTER .......................................... 197 COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM -
INSTRUMENT CENTER : Removal and Installa- COMMON ITEM) ................................................... 221 O
tion ........................................................................ 197
DOOR LOCK ............................................................ 221
CONSOLE ............................................................... 197 DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM -
CONSOLE : Removal and Installation .................. 197 DOOR LOCK) ........................................................ 222 P

TRUNK ROOM ........................................................ 197 MULTI REMOTE ENT .............................................. 223


TRUNK ROOM : Removal and Installation ........... 197 MULTI REMOTE ENT : CONSULT Function
(BCM - MULTI REMOTE ENT) .............................. 223
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA ............................... 199
TRUNK ..................................................................... 224
OUTSIDE HANDLE ................................................. 199 TRUNK : CONSULT Function (BCM - TRUNK) .... 224
OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation .... 199

Revision: 2012 July DLK-5 N17


PANIC ALARM .........................................................225 HAZARD FUNCTION ....................................... 251
PANIC ALARM : CONSULT Function (BCM - Component Function Check ................................ 251
PANIC ALARM) .....................................................225 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 251

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ............. 226 KEY SWITCH .................................................... 252


Component Function Check ................................. 252
BCM ................................................................. 226 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 252
List of ECU Reference ...........................................226 Component Inspection .......................................... 253
WIRING DIAGRAM .................................... 227 KEYFOB BATTERY ......................................... 254
Component Function Check ................................ 254
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM ................................ 227 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 254
LHD ..........................................................................227
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER ........ 255
LHD : Wiring Diagram ............................................227
Component Function Check ................................ 255
RHD ..........................................................................228 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 255
RHD : Wiring Diagram ...........................................229
TRUNK ROOM LAMP SWITCH ....................... 259
BASIC INSPECTION .................................. 231 Component Function Check ................................ 259
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 259
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ...... 231 Component Inspection .......................................... 260
Work Flow ..............................................................231
TRUNK LID OPENER ACTUATOR ................. 261
KEYFOB ID REGISTRATION .......................... 234 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 261
Description .............................................................234
Work Procedure .....................................................234 UNLOCK SENSOR ........................................... 262
Component Function Check ................................ 262
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ........................ 237 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 262
Component Inspection .......................................... 263
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR .............................. 237
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ........................... 265
DRIVER SIDE ...........................................................237
DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check .......237 DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH
DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ...................237 DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH ............ 265
PASSENGER SIDE ..................................................238 ALL DOOR .............................................................. 265
PASSENGER SIDE : ALL DOOR : Description ....................................... 265
Component Function Check ................................238 ALL DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure ....................... 265
PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ..........239
DRIVER SIDE .......................................................... 266
REAR LH ..................................................................240 DRIVER SIDE : Description .................................. 266
REAR LH : Component Function Check ..............240 DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ................... 266
REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure ...........................240
PASSENGER SIDE ................................................. 266
REAR RH .................................................................241 PASSENGER SIDE : Description ......................... 266
REAR RH : Component Function Check .............241 PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure .......... 266
REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure ..........................241
REAR LH ................................................................. 267
DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH ........... 243 REAR LH : Description ......................................... 267
Component Function Check ................................243 REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure .......................... 267
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................243
Component Inspection ...........................................245 REAR RH ................................................................. 267
REAR RH : Description ......................................... 267
DOOR SWITCH ............................................... 247 REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure ......................... 267
Component Function Check ................................247
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................247 DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH
Component Inspection ...........................................248 DRIVER SIDE DOOR LOCK KNOB OR DOOR
KEY CYLINDER ............................................... 268
DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH .................... 249 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 268
Component Function Check ..................................249
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................249 DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH
Component Inspection ...........................................250 KEYFOB ........................................................... 269

Revision: 2012 July DLK-6 N17


Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 269 HOOD ASSEMBLY : Adjustment .......................... 288
A
TRUNK LID DOES NOT OPEN ........................ 270 HOOD HINGE .......................................................... 289
HOOD HINGE : Removal and Installation ............. 290
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY ................................... 270
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY : Description ........... 270 HOOD SUPPORT ROD ........................................... 290 B
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY : Diagnosis Proce- HOOD SUPPORT ROD : Removal and Installa-
dure ....................................................................... 270 tion ......................................................................... 290

RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT ........................ 291 C


AUTO DOOR LOCK OPERATION DOES NOT
OPERATE ......................................................... 271
HR12DE ................................................................... 291
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 271
HR12DE : Exploded View ...................................... 291 D
ANTI-HIJACK FUNCTION DOES NOT OPER- HR12DE : Removal and Installation ...................... 292
ATE ................................................................... 272 HR15DE ................................................................... 294
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 272 HR15DE : Exploded View ...................................... 295 E
UNLOCK LINK FUNCTION DOES NOT OP- HR15DE : Removal and Installation ...................... 295
ERATE .............................................................. 273 K9K .......................................................................... 297
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 273 F
K9K : Exploded View ............................................. 298
K9K : Removal and Installation ............................. 298
VEHICLE SPEED SENSING AUTO LOCK
OPERATION DOES NOT OPERATE .............. 274 FRONT FENDER ............................................. 301 G
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 274 Exploded View ....................................................... 301
IGN OFF INTERLOCK DOOR UNLOCK FRONT FENDER ..................................................... 301
FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE ................. 275 FRONT FENDER : Removal and Installation ........ 301 H
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 275
FENDER COVER ..................................................... 302
P RANGE INTERLOCK DOOR LOCK/UN- FENDER COVER : Removal and Installation ........ 302 I
LOCK FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE ...... 276
FRONT DOOR ................................................. 303
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 276
Exploded View ....................................................... 303
KEY OUT INTERLOCK DOOR UNLOCK J
DOOR ASSEMBLY .................................................. 303
FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE ................. 277 DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation ..... 303
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 277 DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment .......................... 305
DLK
KEY REMINDER FUNCTION DOES NOT OP- DOOR STRIKER ...................................................... 306
ERATE .............................................................. 278 DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installation ......... 306
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 278 L
DOOR HINGE .......................................................... 306
HAZARD REMINDER OPERATION DOES DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation ............. 306
NOT OPERATE ................................................ 279
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 279 DOOR CHECK LINK ................................................ 307 M
DOOR CHECK LINK : Removal and Installation .. 307
PANIC ALARM FUNCTION DOES NOT OP-
ERATE .............................................................. 280 REAR DOOR ................................................... 308
Exploded View ....................................................... 308 N
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 280
DOOR ASSEMBLY .................................................. 308
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAG-
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation ..... 308 O
NOSES ............................................................. 281 DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment .......................... 310
Work Flow ............................................................. 281
Inspection Procedure ............................................ 283 DOOR STRIKER ...................................................... 311
Diagnostic Worksheet ........................................... 285 DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installation ......... 311 P
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............. 287 DOOR HINGE .......................................................... 311
DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation ............. 311
HOOD ............................................................... 287
Exploded View ...................................................... 287 DOOR CHECK LINK ................................................ 312
DOOR CHECK LINK : Removal and Installation .. 312
HOOD ASSEMBLY ................................................. 287
HOOD ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation ..... 287 TRUNK LID ..................................................... 163

Revision: 2012 July DLK-7 N17


Exploded View .......................................................313 INSIDE HANDLE ..................................................... 331
INSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation ........ 331
TRUNK LID ASSEMBLY .........................................313
TRUNK LID ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installa- OUTSIDE HANDLE ................................................. 332
tion .........................................................................313 OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation .... 332
TRUNK LID ASSEMBLY : Adjustment ..................314
TRUNK LID LOCK ............................................ 335
TRUNK LID STRIKER ..............................................315 Exploded View ...................................................... 335
TRUNK LID STRIKER : Removal and Installation..315
TRUNK LID LOCK .................................................. 337
TRUNK LID HINGE ..................................................316 TRUNK LID LOCK : Removal and Installation ...... 337
TRUNK LID HINGE : Removal and Installation .....316
TRUNK LID OPENER HANDLE ............................. 338
TORSION BAR .........................................................316 TRUNK LID OPENER HANDLE : Removal and In-
TORSION BAR : Removal and Installation ...........316 stallation ................................................................ 338
TRUNK LID WEATHER-STRIP ...............................317 TRUNK LID OPENER CABLE ................................ 339
TRUNK LID WEATHER-STRIP : Removal and In- TRUNK LID OPENER CABLE : Removal and In-
stallation ................................................................317 stallation ................................................................ 339
HOOD LOCK ................................................... 319 EMERGENCY LEVER ............................................. 340
Exploded View .......................................................319 EMERGENCY LEVER : Unlock procedures ......... 340

HOOD LOCK ............................................................320 FUEL FILLER LID OPENER ............................ 341


HOOD LOCK : Removal and Installation ...............320 Exploded View ...................................................... 341
HOOD LOCK CONTROL CABLE ............................321 FUEL FILLER LID ................................................... 342
HOOD LOCK CONTROL CABLE : Removal and FUEL FILLER LID : Removal and Installation ....... 342
Installation .............................................................321
FUEL FILLER OPENER CABLE ............................ 343
HOOD LOCK BELL CRANK ...................................323 FUEL FILLER OPENER CABLE : Removal and
HOOD LOCK BELL CRANK : Removal and Instal- Installation ............................................................. 343
lation ......................................................................323
Inspection ..............................................................324 FUEL FILLER LID LOCK ........................................ 344
FUEL FILLER LID LOCK : Removal and Installa-
FRONT DOOR LOCK ...................................... 325 tion ........................................................................ 344
Exploded View .......................................................325
DOOR SWITCH ................................................ 346
DOOR LOCK ............................................................325 Exploded View ...................................................... 346
DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation ...............325 Removal and Installation ....................................... 346
INSIDE HANDLE ......................................................326 DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH .................... 347
INSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation .........326 Removal and Installation ....................................... 347
OUTSIDE HANDLE ..................................................327 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER ........ 348
OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation .....327 Removal and Installation ....................................... 348
REAR DOOR LOCK ........................................ 330 KEYFOB BATTERY ......................................... 349
Exploded View .......................................................330 Removal and Installation ....................................... 349
DOOR LOCK ............................................................330
DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation ...............330

Revision: 2012 July DLK-8 N17


PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT B
PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000006655020

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along C
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and
“SEAT BELT” of this Service Manual.
WARNING: D
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by E
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
F
Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”.
• Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Ser-
vice Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness
connectors. G
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING: H
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the
ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with
a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing I
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service. J
Precautions Necessary for Steering Wheel Rotation After Battery Disconnection
INFOID:0000000006655021

DLK
CAUTION:
Comply with the following cautions to prevent any error and malfunction.
• Before removing and installing any control units, first turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position,
then disconnect both battery cables. L
• After finishing work, confirm that all control unit connectors are connected properly, then re-connect
both battery cables.
• Always use CONSULT to perform self-diagnosis as a part of each function inspection after finishing M
work. If a DTC is detected, perform trouble diagnosis according to self-diagnosis results.
For vehicle with steering lock unit, if the battery is disconnected or discharged, the steering wheel will lock and
cannot be turned.
If turning the steering wheel is required with the battery disconnected or discharged, follow the operation pro- N
cedure below before starting the repair operation.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
O
1. Connect both battery cables.
NOTE:
Supply power using jumper cables if battery is discharged.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ACC position. P
(At this time, the steering lock will be released.)
3. Disconnect both battery cables. The steering lock will remain released with both battery cables discon-
nected and the steering wheel can be turned.
4. Perform the necessary repair operation.

Revision: 2012 July DLK-9 N17


PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
5. When the repair work is completed, re-connect both battery cables. With the brake pedal released, turn
the ignition switch from ACC position to ON position, then to LOCK position. (The steering wheel will lock
when the ignition switch is turned to LOCK position.)
6. Perform self-diagnosis check of all control units using CONSULT.
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover INFOID:0000000007153886

When performing the procedure after removing cowl top cover, cover
the lower end of windshield with urethane, etc to prevent damage to
windshield.

PIIB3706J

Work INFOID:0000000006655022

• After removing and installing the opening/closing parts, be sure to carry out fitting adjustments to check their
operational.
• Check the lubrication level, damage, and wear of each part. If necessary, grease or replace it.

Revision: 2012 July DLK-10 N17


PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

PREPARATION A
PREPARATION
Commercial Service Tools INFOID:0000000006655023
B

Tool name Description


C

D
Engine ear Locates the noise

E
SIIA0995E

Remover tool Removes the clips, pawls, and metal clips

JMKIA3050ZZ

Power tool I

PIIB1407E J

DLK

Revision: 2012 July DLK-11 N17


COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
COMPONENT PARTS
Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000006655024

JMKIA7938GB

Revision: 2012 July DLK-12 N17


COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

A. View with instrument lower panel re- B. View with glove box cover removed C. View with headlamp housing assem- A
moved bly LH removed
D. View with center console assembly E. View with trunk room F. View with rear bumper removed
removed
B

No. Component Function


1. Combination meter • Performs operation method guide and warning with buzzer C
• Transmits vehicle speed signal to CAN communication line
2. Inside key antenna (instrument center) Refer to DLK-14, "Inside Key Antenna (Instrument Center)".
3. Remote keyless entry receiver Refer to DLK-16, "Remote Keyless Entry Receiver". D
4. TCM Transmits shift position signal to BCM via CAN communication line
Refer to TM-352, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location (LHD)", or
TM-354, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location (RHD)" for detailed E
installation location
5. Intelligent Key warning buzzer Refer to DLK-16, "Intelligent Key Warning Buzzer".
6. IPDM E/R Sounds horn via CAN communication between BCM F
Refer to PCS-6, "Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location
7. BCM BCM detects the vehicle status according to signals from each door switch and each
outside/inside key antenna. BCM transmits drive signal to door lock actuator when
BCM receives operation signal from remote keyless entry receiver and each switch G
Refer to BCS-6, "BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for de-
tailed installation location
8. Door lock and unlock switch • Transmits door lock/unlock operation to BCM H
• Integrated in the power window main switch
9. Front door switch (driver side) Detects front door (driver side) open/close condition
10. Front door lock assembly (driver side) Refer to DLK-15, "Front Door Lock Assembly (Driver Side)". I
11. Driver side outside handle (outside key
Refer to DLK-15, "Outside Key Antenna (Driver Side)".
antenna)
J
12. Front door request switch (driver side) • Transmits door lock/unlock operation to BCM
• Integrated in the driver side outside handle
13. Rear door switch LH Detects rear door LH open/close condition
DLK
14. Rear door lock assembly LH Inputs lock/unlock signal from BCM and locks/unlocks Rear door LH
15. Inside key antenna (console) Refer to DLK-14, "Inside Key Antenna (Console)".
16. Inside key antenna (trunk room) Refer to DLK-14, "Inside Key Antenna (Trunk Room)". L
17. Trunk lid opener switch Transmits trunk lid opener switch signal to BCM
18. Trunk lid lock assembly Refer to DLK-16, "Trunk Lid Lock Assembly".
19. Outside key antenna (rear bumper) Refer to DLK-14, "Outside Key Antenna (Rear Bumper)".
M

20. Rear door lock assembly RH Inputs lock/unlock signal from BCM and locks/unlocks Rear door RH
21. Rear door switch RH Detects rear door RH open/close condition
N
22. Front door switch (passenger side) Detects front door (passenger side) open/close condition
23. Front door lock assembly (passenger
Refer to DLK-15, "Front Door Lock Assembly (Passenger Side)".
side) O
24. Front door request switch (passenger • Transmits door lock/unlock operation to BCM
side)* • Integrated in the passenger side outside handle
25. Passenger side outside handle (outside P
Refer to DLK-15, "Outside Key Antenna (Passenger Side)".
key antenna)*
26. Air bag diagnosis sensor unit Transmits the collision detection signal when air bag diagnosis sensor unit detects col-
lision
Refer to SRC-6, "Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location
27. Push-button ignition switch Inputs push-button ignition switch ON/OFF condition to BCM
*: Models with front door request switch (passenger side)

Revision: 2012 July DLK-13 N17


COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
Inside Key Antenna (Instrument Center) INFOID:0000000007794725

• Inside key antenna (instrument center) detects that Intelligent Key


is within the inside detection area, and then transmits detection
status to BCM.
• Inside key antenna (instrument center) is installed in the rear of
cluster lid C of instrument center.

JMKIA8646ZZ

Inside Key Antenna (Console) INFOID:0000000007794726

• Inside key antenna (console) detects that Intelligent Key is within


the inside detection area, and then transmits detection status to
BCM.
• Inside key antenna (console) is installed behind center console
assembly.

JMKIA8646ZZ

Inside Key Antenna (Trunk Room) INFOID:0000000007794727

• Inside key antenna (trunk room) detects that Intelligent Key is


within the inside detection area, and then transmits detection sta-
tus to BCM.
• Inside key antenna (trunk room) is installed on rear parcel in trunk
room.

JMKIA8646ZZ

Outside Key Antenna (Rear Bumper) INFOID:0000000007794728

• Outside key antenna (rear bumper) detects that Intelligent Key is


within the outside detection area, and then transmits detection sta-
tus to BCM. Request signal is transmitted simultaneously to Intelli-
gent Key.
• Outside key antenna (rear bumper) is installed in the rear of rear
bumper.

JMKIA8646ZZ

Revision: 2012 July DLK-14 N17


COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
Outside Key Antenna (Driver Side) INFOID:0000000007794729

A
• Outside key antenna (driver side) detects that Intelligent Key is
within the outside detection area, and then transmits detection sta-
tus to BCM. Request signal is transmitted simultaneously to Intelli- B
gent Key.
• Outside key antenna (driver side) is installed in driver side outside
handle.
C

D
JMKIA8648ZZ

Outside Key Antenna (Passenger Side) INFOID:0000000007794730


E
• Outside key antenna (passenger side) detects that Intelligent Key
is within the outside detection area, and then transmits detection
status to BCM. Request signal is transmitted simultaneously to F
Intelligent Key.
• Outside key antenna (passenger side) is installed in passenger
side outside handle.
G

H
JMKIA8648ZZ

Front Door Lock Assembly (Driver Side) INFOID:0000000007794731


I
• Door lock actuator and unlock sensor are Integrated in driver door
lock assembly.
• Door lock actuator receives lock/unlock signal from BCM, and then J
locks/unlocks driver door.
• Only front door lock assembly (driver side) integrates unlock sen-
sor. Unlock sensor transmits lock/unlock status of driver door to DLK
BCM.

JMKIA9347ZZ

Front Door Lock Assembly (Passenger Side) INFOID:0000000007794767 M

• Door lock actuator is Integrated in passenger door lock assembly.


• Door lock actuator receives lock/unlock signal from BCM, and then
locks/unlocks passenger door. N

JMKIA9347ZZ

Revision: 2012 July DLK-15 N17


COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
Remote Keyless Entry Receiver INFOID:0000000007794732

• Remote keyless entry receiver receives button operation signal


and key ID signal of Intelligent Key, and then transmits them to
BCM.
• Remote keyless entry receiver is installed in the behind of glove
box lid. (Except for Hong Kong)
• Remote keyless entry receiver is integrated into the inside mirror.
(For Hong Kong)

JMKIA8647ZZ

Intelligent Key Warning Buzzer INFOID:0000000007794733

• Intelligent Key warning buzzer warns the user, who is outside vehi-
cle, of operation confirmation according to Intelligent Key operation
and door request switch operation, or of an inappropriate opera-
tion.
• Intelligent Key warning buzzer is installed in the rear of front
bumper and underneath headlamp LH.

JMKIA8650ZZ

Trunk Lid Lock Assembly INFOID:0000000007794734

• Trunk lid lock assembly integrates trunk lid opener actuator and
trunk room lamp switch.
• Trunk lid opener actuator opens the trunk lid according to the trunk
lid open signal from BCM.
• Trunk room lamp switch detects open/close status of trunk lid.

JMKIA9348ZZ

Revision: 2012 July DLK-16 N17


SYSTEM (POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
SYSTEM (POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM)
A
System Description INFOID:0000000006655027

System Diagram B

JMKIA9337GB

*1: With CVT or A/T models G


*2: Models for China, India, Indonesia and Singapore
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
H
Door Lock And Unlock Switch
• The door lock and unlock switch is build into power window main switch.
• BCM locks all doors or unlocks all doors, when door lock/unlock switch is operated.
I
Unlock Sensor (Models for Indonesia and Singapore)
• BCM locks all doors or unlocks all doors, when driver door lock knob is operated.
• With the mechanical key inserted in the door key cylinder on driver side, turning it to lock position, locks door
lock actuator of all doors. J
• With the mechanical key inserted in the door key cylinder on driver side, turning it to unlock position, unlocks
door lock actuator of all doors.
AIR BAG INTERLOCK UNLOCK FUNCTION (MODELS FOR CHINA, INDIA, INDONESIA AND SIN- DLK
GAPORE)
When ignition switch is ON and BCM receives air bag signal, it operates automatically to unlock all doors. Air
bag diagnosis sensor unit sends the air bag signal to BCM. L

IGNITION POSITION WARNING FUNCTION


When ignition switch position is ON or ACC and driver door is open, all doors cannot locked when door lock
and unlock switch or driver door lock knob is operated. M

INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL FUNCTION


Interior room lamp is controlled according to door lock /unlock state, refer to INL-8, "INTERIOR ROOM LAMP N
CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description".
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK FUNCTION (LOCK OPERATION) (MODELS FOR CHINA, IN-
DIA, INDONESIA AND SINGAPORE) O
The interlock door lock function is the function that locks all doors linked with the vehicle speed or shift posi-
tion. It has 2 types as per the following items.
Vehicle Speed Sensing Auto Door Lock P
All doors are locked when the vehicle speed reaches 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more (Except for Indonesia and Sin-
gapore), 24km/h (15 MPH) or more (For Indonesia and Singapore).
BCM outputs the lock signal to all door lock actuators when it detects that the ignition switch is turned ON, all
doors are closed and the vehicle speed received from the combination meter via CAN communication
becomes 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more (Except for Indonesia and Singapore), 24km/h (15 MPH) or more (For
Indonesia and Singapore).
P Range Interlock Door Lock*

Revision: 2012 July DLK-17 N17


SYSTEM (POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
All doors are locked when shifting the selector lever from the P position to any position other than P.
BCM outputs the lock signal to all door lock actuators when it detects that the ignition switch is in the ON posi-
tion and the shift signal received from the TCM via CAN communication is shifted from the P position to any
position other than P.
*: This function does not operate on M/T models.
Setting change of Automatic Door Lock/Unlock Function
The lock operation setting of the automatic door lock/unlock function can be changed.
With CONSULT
The ON/OFF switching of the automatic door lock function and the type selection of the automatic door lock/
unlock function can be performed at the WORK SUPPORT setting of CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
The automatic door lock function ON/OFF can be switched by performing the following operation.
1. Close all doors (door switch OFF)
2. Ignition switch: OFF→ON
3. Press and hold the door lock and unlock switch for 5 seconds or more in the lock direction within 20 sec-
onds after turning the ignition switch ON.
4. The switching complete when the hazard lamp blinks.

OFF → ON : 2 blinks
ON → OFF : 1 blink

AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK FUNCTION (UNLOCK OPERATION) (MODELS FOR CHINA,


INDIA, INDONESIA AND SINGAPORE)
The automatic door lock/unlock function is the function that unlocks all doors linked with the key position or
shift position. It has 2 types as per the following items.
IGN OFF Interlock Door Unlock
All doors are unlocked when the ignition position is changed from ON to OFF.
BCM outputs the unlock signal to all door lock actuators when it detects that the ignition position is changed
from ignition switch ON to OFF.
P Range Interlock Door Unlock*
All doors are unlocked when shifting the selector lever from any position other than the P to P position.
BCM outputs the unlock signal to all door lock actuators when it detects that the ignition switch is in the ON
position and the shift signal received from TCM via CAN communication is shifted from any position other than
the P to P position.
*: This function does not operate on M/T models.
Setting change of Automatic Door Lock/Unlock Function
The unlock operation setting of the automatic door lock/unlock function can be changed.
With CONSULT
The ON/OFF switching of the automatic door lock/unlock function and the type selection of the automatic door
lock/unlock function can be performed at the WORK SUPPORT setting of CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
The automatic door lock/unlock function ON/OFF can be switched by performing the following operation.
1. Close all doors (door switch OFF)
2. Ignition switch: OFF→ON
3. Press and hold the door lock and unlock switch for 5 seconds or more in the unlock direction within 20
seconds after turning the power supply position ON.
4. The switching is complete when the hazard lamp blinks.

OFF → ON : 2 blinks
ON → OFF : 1 blink

Revision: 2012 July DLK-18 N17


SYSTEM (POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
Circuit Diagram INFOID:0000000007079618

A
LHD MODELS

DLK

P
JMKIA9454GB

Revision: 2012 July DLK-19 N17


SYSTEM (POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
RHD MODELS

JMKIA9455GB

Revision: 2012 July DLK-20 N17


SYSTEM (INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
SYSTEM (INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM)
A
INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM
INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000006655029
B
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
C

DLK

JMKIA7941GB
M
*: With CVT or A/T models
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
• The Intelligent Key system is a system that makes it possible to lock and unlock the door locks (door lock/ N
unlock function) by carrying the Intelligent Key, which operates based on the results of electronic ID verifica-
tion using two-way communication between the Intelligent Key and the vehicle (BCM).
NOTE:
The driver should always carry the Intelligent Key O
• The settings for each function can be changed with CONSULT.
• If an Intelligent Key is lost, a new Intelligent Key can be registered. A maximum of 4 Intelligent Keys can be
registered. P
• It is possible to perform a diagnosis on the system and register an Intelligent Key with CONSULT.

Function Description Refer


Door lock Lock/unlock can be performed by pressing the request switch DLK-27
The trunk lid can be opened by carrying the Intelligent Key and pressing the
Trunk open DLK-29
trunk lid opener switch

Revision: 2012 July DLK-21 N17


SYSTEM (INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
Function Description Refer
Lock/unlock can be performed by pressing the remote controller button of the
Remote keyless entry DLK-30
Intelligent Key
The key reminder buzzer sounds a warning if the door is locked with the key left
Key reminder DLK-32
inside the vehicle
If an action that does not meet the operating condition of the Intelligent Key sys-
Warning DLK-33
tem is taken, the buzzer sounds to inform the driver
Engine start The engine can be turned on while carrying the Intelligent Key SEC-17
Interior room lamp control Interior room lamp is controlled according to door lock/unlock state INL-8

Revision: 2012 July DLK-22 N17


SYSTEM (INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM : Circuit Diagram INFOID:0000000007079619

A
LHD MODELS

DLK

P
JMKIA9456GB

Revision: 2012 July DLK-23 N17


SYSTEM (INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

JMKIA9457GB

Revision: 2012 July DLK-24 N17


SYSTEM (INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
RHD MODELS
A

DLK

JMKIA9409GB
P

Revision: 2012 July DLK-25 N17


SYSTEM (INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

JMKIA9410GB

DOOR LOCK FUNCTION

Revision: 2012 July DLK-26 N17


SYSTEM (INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION : System Description INFOID:0000000006655031

A
SYUSTEM DIAGRAM

JMKIA6137GB
I
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH OPERATION
When pressing the request switch, it is possible to lock and unlock the door by carrying the Intelligent Key.
J
OPERATION DESCRIPTION
• When the BCM detects that each door request switch is pressed, it starts the outside key antenna and inside
key antenna corresponding to the pressed door request switch and transmits the request signal to the Intelli-
gent Key. And then, check that the Intelligent Key is near the door. DLK
• If the Intelligent Key is within the outside key antenna detection area, it receives the request signal and
transmits the key ID signal to the BCM via remote keyless entry receiver.
• BCM receives the key ID signal and compares it with the registered key ID. L
• BCM transmits door lock/unlock signal and operates each door lock actuator. At the same time, BCM blinks
hazard warning lamp (lock: 1 time, unlock: 2 times) and sounds Intelligent Key buzzer (lock: 1 time, unlock:
2 times) as a reminder.
M
OPERATION CONDITION
If the following conditions are satisfied, door lock/unlock operation is performed if the door request switch is
operated.
N
Each request switch operation Operation condition
• All doors are closed
• Ignition switch is in the LOCK or OFF position O
• Panic alarm is not activated
Lock
• Intelligent Key is outside the vehicle
• Intelligent Key is within outside key antenna detection area
P
• P position warning is not activated
• All doors are closed
• Ignition switch is in the LOCK or OFF position
Unlock • Panic alarm is not activated
• Intelligent Key is outside the vehicle
• Intelligent Key is within outside key antenna detection area *
*: Even with a registered Intelligent Key remaining inside the vehicle, door locks can be unlocked from outside of the vehicle with a spare
Intelligent Key as long as key IDs are different.

Revision: 2012 July DLK-27 N17


SYSTEM (INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
Door lock function can be changed using “LOCK/UNLOCK BY I-KEY” mode in “WORK SUPPORT”. Refer to
DLK-42, "INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM - INTELLIGENT KEY)".
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA DETECTION AREA
The outside key antenna detection area of door lock/unlock function
is in the range of approximately 80 cm (31.50 in) surrounding the
driver, passenger door handles (1). However, this operating range
depends on the ambient conditions.

JMKIA4881ZZ

HAZARD AND BUZZER REMINDER FUNCTION


For the operation check, BCM blinks hazard warning lamps (lock: 1 time, unlock: 2 times) and sounds Intelli-
gent Key warning buzzer (lock: 1 time, unlock: 2 times) when door lock or unlock operates by operation of
each door request switch.
How to Change Hazard and Buzzer Reminder Mode
Refer to DLK-42, "INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM - INTELLIGENT KEY)".
AUTO DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
After door is unlocked by door request switch operation and if 30 seconds or more passes without performing
the following operation, all doors are automatically locked. However, operation check function does not acti-
vate.

• Door switch is ON (door is open)


Operating condition • BCM receives lock signal
• Push switch is pressed
Auto door lock mode can be changed by the “AUTO LOCK SET” mode in “WORK SUPPORT”. Refer to DLK-
42, "INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM - INTELLIGENT KEY)".
LIST OF OPERATION RELATED PARTS
Parts marked with × are the parts related to operation.
Remote keyless entry receiver

Intelligent Key warning buzzer

CAN communication system

Push-button ignition switch


Hazard warning lamp
Outside key antenna
Door request switch

Combination meter
Inside key antenna
Door lock actuator

Door lock function


Intelligent Key

Door switch

BCM

Door lock/unlock function × × × × × × × ×


Hazard and buzzer reminder function × × × × ×
Auto door lock function × × × × × × × ×

TRUNK OPEN FUNCTION

Revision: 2012 July DLK-28 N17


SYSTEM (INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
TRUNK OPEN FUNCTION : System Description INFOID:0000000006934511

A
System Diagram

JMKIA7942GB

G
TRUNK LID OPENER OPERATION
• When the BCM detects that trunk lid opener switch is pressed, it starts the outside key antenna (rear
bumper) and inside key antenna and transmits the request signal to the Intelligent Key. Then, checks that
the Intelligent Key is near the trunk lid. H
• If the Intelligent Key is within the outside key antenna detection area, it receives the request signal and
transmits the key ID signal to the BCM via remote keyless entry receiver.
• BCM receives the key ID signal and compares it with the registered key ID. I
OPERATION CONDITION
If the following conditions are satisfied, the trunk lid can be opened.
J
Trunk lid open function Operation condition
• Vehicle speed is less than 5 km/h (3 MPH)
Trunk open operation • Intelligent Key is within outside key antenna (rear bumper) detection area DLK
• Trunk lid is closed

OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA DETECTION AREA


The outside key antenna detection area of trunk lid open function is L
in the range of approximately 80 cm (31.50 in) surrounding trunk lid
opener switch (1). However, this operating range depends on the
ambient conditions. M

O
JMKIA2512ZZ

LIST OF OPERATION RELATED PARTS


Parts marked with × are the parts related to operation. P

Revision: 2012 July DLK-29 N17


SYSTEM (INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

Outside key antenna (rear bumper)


Remote keyless entry receiver

CAN communication system


Trunk lid opener actuator

Trunk room lamp switch

Trunk lid opener switch

Combination meter
Inside key antenna
Trunk open function

Intelligent Key

BCM
Trunk lid open function × × × × × × × × × ×

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION


REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION : System Description INFOID:0000000006655033

SYSTEM DIAGRAM

JMKIA7943GB

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY OPERATION


The Intelligent Key has the same functions as the remote control entry system. Therefore, it can be used in the
same manner as the remote controller by operating the door lock/unlock button.
Remote keyless entry system controls operation of the following items.
• Auto door lock
• Door lock/unlock
• Hazard and buzzer reminder
• Panic alarm
• Trunk lid open
OPERATION AREA
To check that the Intelligent Key works normally, use within 1 m (3 ft) range of each door, however the opera-
ble range may differ according to surroundings.
DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK FUNCTION
• When door lock/unlock button of the Intelligent Key is pressed, lock signal or unlock signal is transmitted
from Intelligent Key to BCM via remote keyless entry receiver.
• BCM receives the signal and compares it with the registered key ID to the vehicle.
• BCM transmits door lock/unlock signal to each door lock actuator and operates each door lock actuator,
when key ID matches. At the same time, BCM blinks hazard warning lamps (lock: 1 time, unlock: 2 times)
and sounds Intelligent Key buzzer (lock: 1 time, unlock: 2 times) as a reminder.
OPERATION CONDITION

Revision: 2012 July DLK-30 N17


SYSTEM (INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

Remote controller operation Operation condition A


• All door are closed
• Ignition switch is in the LOCK or OFF position
Lock
• Panic alarm is not activated*
B
• P position warning is not activated
• Ignition switch is in the LOCK or OFF position
• Intelligent Key is outside the vehicle
Unlock C
• Panic alarm is not activated*
• P position warning is not activated
*: Except for India and Hong Kong
D
TRUNK OPEN FUNCTION
• When trunk button of the Intelligent Key is pressed, the trunk open signal is transmitted from the Intelligent
Key to the BCM via remote keyless entry receiver.
• When BCM receives the trunk open request signal, it operates the trunk lid opener actuator and opens the E
trunk.
OPERATION CONDITION
F
Remote controller operation Operation condition
• Press and hold the trunk open button for 0.4 second or more*
Trunk open • Ignition switch is except the ON position
G
• Vehicle speed is less than 5 km/h (3 MPH)
*: Pattern of trunk open button can be selected using CONSULT. Refer to DLK-42, "INTELLIGENT KEY :
CONSULT Function (BCM - INTELLIGENT KEY)". H

PANIC ALARM FUNCTION (EXCEPT FOR INDIA AND HONG KONG)


When ignition switch is OFF, BCM transmits theft warning horn request signal to IPDM E/R. Then, IPDM E/R I
turns on and off horn intermittently.
The horn sounds intermittently.
The alarm automatically turns off.
• After 25 seconds J
• When BCM receives any signal from Intelligent Key
How to Change Panic Alarm Operation Mode
Refer to DLK-42, "INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM - INTELLIGENT KEY)". DLK

HAZARD AND BUZZER REMINDER FUNCTION


For the operation check, BCM blinks hazard warning lamps (lock: 1 time, unlock: 2 times) and sounds Intelli- L
gent Key warning buzzer (lock: 1 time, unlock: 2 times) when door lock or unlock operates by each remote
controller button operation of Intelligent Key.
How to Change Hazard and Buzzer Reminder Mode
M
Refer to DLK-42, "INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM - INTELLIGENT KEY)".
AUTO DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
After door is unlocked by Intelligent Key button operation and if 30 seconds or more passes without performing N
the following operation, all doors are automatically locked. However, operation check function does not acti-
vate.
O
• Door switch is ON (door is open)
Operating condition • BCM receives lock signal
• Push switch is pressed
Auto door lock mode can be changed by the “AUTO LOCK SET” mode in “WORK SUPPORT”. Refer to DLK- P
42, "INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM - INTELLIGENT KEY)".
LIST OF OPERATION RELATED PARTS
Parts marked with × are the parts related to operation.

Revision: 2012 July DLK-31 N17


SYSTEM (INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

Remote keyless entry receiver

Intelligent Key warning buzzer

CAN communication system


Push-button ignition switch

Trunk lid opener actuator

Trunk room lamp switch


Hazard warning lamp
Combination meter
Door lock actuator
Remote keyless entry functions

Intelligent Key

Door switch

IPDM E/R
BCM

Horn
Door lock/unlock function by remote control button × × × × × ×
Trunk open function × × × × × × × ×
Hazard and buzzer reminder function × × × × × × ×
Auto door lock function × × × × × ×
Panic alarm function × × × × ×

KEY REMINDER FUNCTION


KEY REMINDER FUNCTION : System Description INFOID:0000000006655035

System Diagram

JMKIA7944GB

BASIC OPERATION
Key reminder is the function that prevents the key from being left in the vehicle.
Key reminder has the following 3 functions.

Key remainder function Operation condition Operation


Right after driver side door is closed under the following conditions
• Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle
Driver side door closed* All doors unlock
• Driver side door is opened
• Driver side door is in unlock state
Right after all doors are closed under the following conditions
• Door lock/unlock switch or driver side door lock knob are operated • All doors unlock
Door is open or closed • Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle • Honk Intelligent Key warn-
• Any door is opened ing buzzer
• All doors are locked.
Right after trunk is closed under the following conditions
• Trunk open
• Intelligent Key is inside trunk room
Trunk is closed • Honk Intelligent Key warn-
• All doors are closed
ing buzzer
• All doors are locked
*:If the door closing impact shocks the door lock knob, or contacts against baggage with the door lock knob might activate the door locks
accidentally but unlock operation is perform in these cases.

Revision: 2012 July DLK-32 N17


SYSTEM (INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
NOTE:
The above function operates when the Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. However, there may be times when A
the Intelligent Key cannot be detected, and this function does not operate when the Intelligent Key is on the
instrument panel, rear parcel shelf, or in the glove box. Also, this system sometimes does not operate if the
Intelligent Key is in the door pocket for the open door.
B
WARNING FUNCTION
WARNING FUNCTION : System Description INFOID:0000000006655036
C
OPERATION DESCRIPTION
The warning function are as per the following items and are given to the user as warning information and
warnings using combinations of Intelligent Key warning buzzer, combination meter buzzer, KEY warning lamp, D
shift P warning lamp and engine start operation indicator lamp.
• Intelligent Key system malfunction
• OFF position warning E
• P position warning
• ACC warning
• Take away warning
• Door lock operation warning F
• Engine start information
• Intelligent Key low battery warning
• Key ID warning G
OPERATION CONDITION
Operation condition of warning and information is as per the following table.
H
Warning/Information functions Operation procedure
Intelligent Key system malfunction A malfunction is detected on BCM and key warning lamp turns ON
When condition A, B or condition C is satisfied I
• Condition A
- Ignition switch: ACC position
- Door switch (driver side): ON (Door is open) J
• Condition B
OFF position warning - Turn ignition switch from ON to OFF while door is open
• Condition C
- Intelligent Key backside is contacted to push-button ignition switch while DLK
brake pedal is depressed and ignition switch is LOCK or OFF (When the
Intelligent Key battery is discharged)
- Door switch (driver side): ON (Door is open)
L
• Shift position: Other than P
For internal
• Engine is stopped (Ignition switch is turned from ON to OFF)
P position warning* • P position warning (For internal) operates
For external • Door switch: ON to OFF (Door is open to close) M
• Intelligent Key cannot be detected inside the vehicle
• After P position warning operates, or when ignition switch is turned ON
ACC warning* immediately after P position warning operates N
• Ignition switch: ACC
• Ignition switch: Other than LOCK and OFF
Door status changes
• Door switch: ON to OFF (Door status changes from open to close)
from open to close O
• Registered Intelligent Key is not detected inside the vehicle
• Ignition switch: Other than LOCK and OFF
• Door switch: ON (Door is open)
Take away warning Door status is open P
• Registered Intelligent Key is not detected inside the vehicle during Key
ID verification for 5 seconds
• Ignition switch: Other than LOCK position
Push button-ignition
• Push-button ignition switch is pressed
switch operation
• Registered Intelligent Key is not detected inside the vehicle
Door lock operation is requested while door lock operation condition of
Door lock operation warning
door request switch is not satisfied

Revision: 2012 July DLK-33 N17


SYSTEM (INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
Warning/Information functions Operation procedure
• Ignition switch: ON position
Ignition switch is ON po-
• Shift position: P
sition
• Engine is stopped
• Ignition switch: Other than ON
Ignition switch is other • Shift position: P
than ON position • Intelligent Key is in the passenger room after driver door is opened and
closed
Engine start information
• Ignition switch: ON position to OFF position
• Shift position: P position
NOTE:
Ignition switch is ON po-
Engine start information turns ON for several seconds and then turns OFF,
sition to OFF position
when ignition switch is turned to the ON position from the OFF position. En-
gine start information does not turn ON until opening and closing of driver
door is detected again.
BCM detects that Intelligent Key is low battery, after ignition switch is turned
Intelligent Key low battery warning
ON
• Push-button ignition switch is pressed
Key ID warning
• Registered Intelligent Key is not detected inside the vehicle
*
: M/T models do not apply.
WARNING METHOD
The following table shows the alarm or warning methods with chime.

Warning chime
Shift P Engine start
“KEY” warning Intelligent
Warning/Information functions warning Combination operation in-
lamp Key warn-
lamp meter buzzer dicator lamp
ing buzzer
Intelligent Key system malfunction Indicate — — — —
For internal — — Activate — —
OFF position warning
For external* — — — Activate —
For internal Indicate Activate — —
P position warning* Blink (yellow)
For external — — Active —

ACC warning* — — Activate — —


Door is open to close — Activate Activate —
Door is open — — — —
Take away warning Blink (yellow)
Push-ignition switch oper-
— Activate — —
ation
Door lock operation warning — — — Activate —
Engine start information — — — — Indicate
Intelligent Key low battery warning Blink (green) — — — —
Key ID warning Blink (yellow) — — — —
*
: M/T models do not apply.
LIST OF OPERATION RELATED PARTS
Parts marked with × are the parts related to operation.

Revision: 2012 July DLK-34 N17


SYSTEM (INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

Engine start operation indicator lamp


A

Intelligent Key warning buzzer

CAN communication system


Push-button ignition switch

Combination meter buzzer


B

Outside key antenna

Shift P warning lamp


Function

“KEY” warning lamp


Door request switch

Inside key antenna


C

Intelligent Key

Door switch

BCM
D

Intelligent Key system malfunction × × ×


For internal × × × × E
OFF position warning
For external × × ×
P position warning × × × × × ×
F
ACC warning × × × ×
Door is open or close × × × × × × × ×
Door is open × × × × × × G
Take away warning
Push-button ignition
× × × × × × ×
switch operation
Door lock operation warning × × × × × × × H
Key ID warning × × × × ×
Engine start information × × × × × ×
I
Intelligent Key low battery warning × × × × ×

DLK

Revision: 2012 July DLK-35 N17


SYSTEM (TRUNK LID OPENER SYSTEM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
SYSTEM (TRUNK LID OPENER SYSTEM)
System Description INFOID:0000000006978794

System Diagram

JMKIA7945GB

TRUNK LID OPENER OPERATION


When trunk lid opener switch is ON, BCM operates trunk lid opener actuator.
OPERATION CONDITION
If the following conditions are satisfied, trunk open operation is performed.

Trunk lid opener switch operation Operation condition


• Trunk lid opener switch is ON
Trunk lid open
• Vehicle speed is less than 5 km/h (3 MPH)

Revision: 2012 July DLK-36 N17


SYSTEM (TRUNK LID OPENER SYSTEM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
Circuit Diagram INFOID:0000000007079620

A
LHD MODELS

DLK

JMKIA9458GB
L

Revision: 2012 July DLK-37 N17


SYSTEM (TRUNK LID OPENER SYSTEM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
RHD MODELS

JMKIA9342GB

Revision: 2012 July DLK-38 N17


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
A
COMMON ITEM
COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM - COMMON ITEM) INFOID:0000000007086736
B
APPLICATION ITEM
CONSULT performs the following functions via CAN communication with BCM.
C
Diagnosis mode Function Description
Work Support Changes the setting for each system function.
D
Self Diagnostic Result Displays the diagnosis results judged by BCM.
CAN Diag Support Monitor Monitors the reception status of CAN communication viewed from BCM.
Data Monitor The BCM input/output signals are displayed. E
Active Test The signals used to activate each device are forcibly supplied from BCM.
Ecu Identification The BCM part number is displayed.
• Read and save the vehicle specification. F
Configuration
• Write the vehicle specification when replacing BCM.

SYSTEM APPLICATION
G
BCM can perform the following functions for each system.
NOTE:
It can perform the diagnosis modes except the following for all sub system selection items.
×: Applicable item H
Diagnosis mode
System Sub system selection item
Work Support Data Monitor Active Test
I
Door lock DOOR LOCK × × ×
Rear window defogger REAR DEFOGGER × ×
Warning chime BUZZER × × J
Interior room lamp timer INT LAMP × × ×
Exterior lamp HEAD LAMP × × ×
Wiper and washer WIPER × × ×
DLK

Turn signal and hazard warning lamps FLASHER × × ×


• Automatic air conditioner L
AIR CONDITONER ×
• Manual air conditioner
• Intelligent Key system
INTELLIGENT KEY × × ×
• Engine start system
M
Combination switch COMB SW ×
Body control system BCM ×
NATS IMMU × × × N
Interior room lamp battery saver BATTERY SAVER × × ×
Trunk lid open TRUNK ×
O
Theft warning alarm THEFT ALM × × ×
— RETAINED PWR* ×
Signal buffer system SIGNAL BUFFER × × P
*: This item is displayed, but is not used.

FREEZE FRAME DATA (FFD)


The BCM records the following vehicle condition at the time a particular DTC is detected, and displays on
CONSULT.

Revision: 2012 July DLK-39 N17


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

CONSULT screen item Indication/Unit Description


Vehicle Speed km/h Vehicle speed of the moment a particular DTC is detected
Odo/Trip Meter km Total mileage (Odometer value) of the moment a particular DTC is detected
While turning BCM status from low power consumption mode to
SLEEP>LOCK
normal mode (Power supply position is “LOCK”)
While turning BCM status from low power consumption mode to
SLEEP>OFF
normal mode (Power supply position is “OFF”.)
LOCK>ACC While turning power supply position from “LOCK” to “ACC”
ACC>ON While turning power supply position from “ACC” to “IGN”
While turning power supply position from “RUN” to “ACC” (Vehicle
RUN>ACC
is stopping and selector lever is except P position.)
While turning power supply position from “CRANKING” to “RUN”
CRANK>RUN
(From cranking up the engine to run it)
While turning power supply position from “RUN“ to “ACC” (Emer-
RUN>URGENT
gency stop operation)
ACC>OFF Power supply position While turning power supply position from “ACC” to “OFF”
status of the moment a
Vehicle Condition OFF>LOCK While turning power supply position from “OFF” to “LOCK”
particular DTC is de-
OFF>ACC tected* While turning power supply position from “OFF” to “ACC”
ON>CRANK While turning power supply position from “IGN” to “CRANKING”
While turning BCM status from normal mode (Power supply posi-
OFF>SLEEP
tion is “OFF”.) to low power consumption mode
While turning BCM status from normal mode (Power supply posi-
LOCK>SLEEP
tion is “LOCK”.) to low power consumption mode
LOCK Power supply position is “LOCK”.
OFF Power supply position is “OFF”.
ACC Power supply position is “ACC”.
ON Power supply position is “IGN”
ENGINE RUN Power supply position is “RUN”.
CRANKING Power supply position is “CRANKING”.
The number of times that ignition switch is turned ON after DTC is detected
• The number is 0 when a malfunction is detected now.
IGN Counter 0 - 39 • The number increases like 1 → 2 → 3...38 → 39 after returning to the normal condition
whenever ignition switch OFF → ON.
• The number is fixed to 39 until the self-diagnosis results are erased if it is over 39.
NOTE:
*: Refer to the following fir details at the power supply position.
• LOCK: Ignition switch OFF with steering is locked.
• OFF: Ignition switch OFF with steering is unlocked.
• ACC: Ignition switch ACC
• IGN: Ignition switch ON with engine stopped
• RUN: Ignition switch ON with engine running
• CRANKING: At engine cranking
DOOR LOCK
DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM - DOOR LOCK) INFOID:0000000006655038

WORK SUPPORT

Revision: 2012 July DLK-40 N17


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

Monitor item Description A


Automatic door lock function mode can be selected from the following in this mode
• VH SPD: All doors are locked when vehicle speed more than 10 km/h (6 MPH) (Except for
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK SE-
Indonesia and Singapore), 24 km/h (15 MPH) (For Indonesia and Singapore)
LECT B
• P RANGE*: All doors are locked when shifting the selector lever from P position to other
than the P position
Automatic door unlock function mode can be selected from the following in the mode
• MODE 1: All doors are unlocked when the power supply position is changed from ON to C
OFF
• MODE 2*: All doors are unlocked when shifting the selector lever from any position other
AUTOMATIC DOOR UNLOCK
than the P to P position
SELECT
• MODE 3: This item is displayed, but cannot be used
D
• MODE 4: This item is displayed, but cannot be used
• MODE 5: This item is displayed, but cannot be used
• MODE 6: This item is displayed, but cannot be used E
Automatic door lock/unlock function mode can be selected from the following in this mode
• Off: Non-operational
AUTOMATIC LOCK/UNLOCK
• Unlock Only: Door unlock operation only
SET F
• Lock Only: Door lock operation only
• Lock/Unlock: Lock and unlock operation
• *: P range interlock door lock can be selected for M/T models, but automatic door lock/unlock function does
not operate G
• These items are not displayed for Thailand.
DATA MONITOR
H
NOTE:
The following table includes information (items) inapplicable to this vehicle. For information (items) applicable
to this vehicle, refer to CONSULT display items.
I
Monitor Item Contents
REQ SW-DR Indicated [On/Off] condition of door request switch (driver side)
REQ SW-AS Indicated [On/Off] condition of door request switch (passenger side) J
NOTE:
REQ SW-BD/TR
The item is indicated, but not monitored
DLK
DOOR SW-DR Indicated [On/Off] condition of front door switch (driver side)
DOOR SW-AS Indicated [On/Off] condition of front door switch (passenger side)
DOOR SW-RR Indicated [On/Off] condition of rear door switch RH L
DOOR SW-RL Indicated [On/Off] condition of rear door switch LH
NOTE:
DOOR SW-BK
The item is indicated, but not monitored M
CDL LOCK SW Indicated [On/Off] condition of lock signal from door lock unlock switch
CDL UNLOCK SW Indicated [On/Off] condition of unlock signal from door lock unlock switch
N
NOTE:
KEY CYL LK-SW
The item is indicated, but not monitored
NOTE:
KEY CYL UN-SW O
The item is indicated, but not monitored
Indicates [Normal/On/Off] condition of circuit between BCM and air bag diagnosis sensor unit
• Normal: Ignition switch ON. (BCM is receiving normal condition signal from air bag diagnosis sensor
SHOCK SENSOR* unit.) P
• ON: During the receiving of air bag signal from air bag diagnosis sensor unit
• OFF: After the receiving of air bag signal from air bag diagnosis sensor unit
*: Models for Thailand, this item is not indicated.

ACTIVE TEST

Revision: 2012 July DLK-41 N17


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

Test item Description


This test is able to check door lock/unlock operation
DOOR LOCK • The all door lock actuators are locked when “ALL LOCK” on CONSULT screen is touched
• The all door lock actuators are unlocked when “ALL UNLK” on CONSULT screen is touched

INTELLIGENT KEY
INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM - INTELLIGENT KEY) INFOID:0000000006655039

WORK SUPPORT

Monitor item Description


INSIDE ANT DIAGNOSIS This function allows inside key antenna self-diagnosis
Door lock/unlock function by door request switch mode can be changed to operation in
this mode
LOCK/UNLOCK BY I-KEY
• On: Operate
• Off: Non-operation
Engine start function mode can be changed to operation with this mode
ENGINE START BY I-KEY • On: Operate
• Off: Non-operation
Buzzer reminder function mode by trunk lid opener request switch and Intelligent Key can
be changed to operation with this mode
TRUNK/GLASS HATCH OPEN
• On: Operate
• Off: Non-operation
Panic alarm button pressing time on Intelligent Key remote control button can be selected
from the following with this mode
PANIC ALARM SET • MODE 1: 0.5 sec
• MODE 2: Non-operation
• MODE 3: 1.5 sec
Trunk button pressing on Intelligent Key can be selected as per the following in this mode.
• MODE 1: Press and hold
TRUNK OPEN DELAY
• MODE 2: Press twice
• MODE 3: Press and hold and press twice
Intelligent Key low battery warning mode can be changed to operation with this mode
LO- BATT OF KEY FOB WARN • On: Operate
• Off: Non-operation
Key reminder function mode can be changed to operation with this mode
ANTI KEY LOCK IN FUNCTI • On: Operate
• Off: Non-operation
Hazard reminder function mode by door request switch and Intelligent Key button can be
selected from the following with this mode
• Lock Only: Door lock operation only
HAZARD ANSWER BACK
• Unlock Only: Door unlock operation only
• Lock/Unlock: Lock and unlock operation
• Off: Non-operation
Buzzer reminder function (lock operation) mode by door request switch can be selected
from the following with this mode
ANS BACK I-KEY LOCK • Horn Chirp: Sound horn
• Buzzer: Sound Intelligent Key warning buzzer
• Off: Non-operation
Buzzer reminder function (unlock operation) mode by door request switch can be changed
to operation with this mode
ANS BACK I-KEY UNLOCK
• On: Operate
• Off: Non-operation
Starter motor can operate during the times below
• 70 msec
SHORT CRANKING OUTPUT
• 100 msec
• 200 msec

Revision: 2012 July DLK-42 N17


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
Monitor item Description
A
CONFIRM KEY FOB ID It can be checked whether Intelligent Key ID code is registered or not in this mode
Auto door lock operation time can be changed in this mode
• MODE 1: OFF
• MODE 2: 30 sec. B
• MODE 3: 1 minute
AUTO LOCK SET
• MODE 4: 2 minutes
• MODE 5: 3 minutes
• MODE 6: 4 minutes
C
• MODE 7: 5 minutes
Buzzer reminder function mode by Intelligent Key button can be selected from the follow-
ing with this mode D
ANSWER BACK FUNCTION
• On: Operate
• Off: Non-operation
NOTE: E
RETRACTABLE MIRROR SET
This item is indicated, but not used

DATA MONITOR
NOTE: F
The following table includes information (items) inapplicable to this vehicle. For information (items) applicable
to this vehicle, refer to CONSULT display items.
G
Monitor Item Condition
REQ SW -DR Indicates [On/Off] condition of door request switch (driver side)
REQ SW -AS Indicates [On/Off] condition of door request switch (passenger side) H
NOTE:
REQ SW -BD/TR
This item is indicated, but not monitored
PUSH SW Indicates [On/Off] condition of push-button ignition switch I
NOTE:
CLUTCH SW
This item is indicated, but not monitored
J
BRAKE SW 1 Indicates [On/Off] condition of stop lamp switch
BRAKE SW 2 Indicates [On/Off]* condition of stop lamp switch power supply
DETE/CANCL SW Indicates [On/Off] condition of P position DLK
SFT PN/N SW Indicates [On/Off] condition of P or N position
S/L -LOCK Indicates [On/Off] condition of steering lock unit (LOCK)
S/L -UNLOCK Indicates [On/Off] condition of steering lock unit (UNLOCK) L
S/L RELAY -F/B Indicates [On/Off] condition of steering lock relay
UNLK SEN -DR Indicates [On/Off] condition of driver door UNLOCK status
M
PUSH SW -IPDM Indicates [On/Off] condition of push-button ignition switch
IGN RLY1 -F/B Indicates [On/Off] condition of ignition relay 1
DETE SW -IPDM Indicates [On/Off] condition of P position N
SFT PN -IPDM Indicates [On/Off] condition of P or N position
SFT P -MET Indicates [On/Off] condition of P position
O
SFT N -MET Indicates [On/Off] condition of N position
ENGINE STATE Indicates [Stop/Stall/Crank/Run] condition of engine states
S/L LOCK-IPDM Indicates [On/Off] condition of steering lock unit (LOCK) P
S/L UNLK-IPDM Indicates [On/Off] condition of steering lock unit (UNLOCK)
S/L RELAY-REQ Indicates [On/Off] condition of steering lock relay
VEH SPEED 1 Display the vehicle speed signal received from combination meter by numerical value [Km/h]
VEH SPEED 2 Display the vehicle speed signal received from ABS or VDC or TCM by numerical value [Km/h]
DOOR STAT-DR Indicates [LOCK/READY/UNLK] condition of driver side door status

Revision: 2012 July DLK-43 N17


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
Monitor Item Condition
DOOR STAT-AS Indicates [LOCK/READY/UNLK] condition of passenger side door status
ID OK FLAG Indicates [Set/Reset] condition of key ID
PRMT ENG STRT Indicates [Set/Reset] condition of engine start possibility
NOTE:
PRMT RKE STRT
This item is indicated, but not monitored
TRNK/HAT MNTR Indicates [On/Off] condition of trunk room lamp switch
When remote keyless entry receiver receives the signal transmitted while operating on Intelli-
RKE OPE COUN1
gent Key, the numerical value start changing
NOTE:
RKE OPE COUN2
This item is indicated, but not monitored
RKE-LOCK Indicates [On/Off] condition of LOCK signal from Intelligent Key
RKE-UNLOCK Indicates [On/Off] condition of UNLOCK signal from Intelligent Key
RKE-TR/BD Indicates [On/Off] condition of trunk open signal from Intelligent Key
Indicates [On/Off] condition of PANIC button of Intelligent Key (Except for models for India)
RKE-PANIC NOTE:
For models for India, this item is indicated, but not monitored
NOTE:
RKE-MODE CHG
This item is indicated, but not monitored
*: OFF is displayed when brake pedal is depressed while brake switch power supply is OFF.

ACTIVE TEST

Test item Description


This test is able to check Intelligent Key warning buzzer operation
OUTSIDE BUZZER • On: Operate
• Off: Non-operation
This test is able to check warning chime in combination meter operation
• Take Out: Take away warning chime sounds when CONSULT screen is touched
INSIDE BUZZER • Key: Key warning chime sounds when CONSULT screen is touched
• Knob: OFF position warning chime sounds when CONSULT screen is touched
• Off: Non-operation
This test is able to check warning lamp operation
• KEY ON: “KEY” Warning lamp illuminates when CONSULT screen is touched
INDICATOR
• KEY IND: “KEY” Warning lamp blinks when CONSULT screen is touched
• Off: Non-operation
This test is able to check interior room lamp operation
INT LAMP • On: Operate
• Off: Non-operation
This test is able to check combination meter indicator lamp information
• BP N: Engine start operation indicator lamp indicates when CONSULT screen is touched
• BP I: Engine start operation indicator lamp indicates when CONSULT screen is touched
• ID NG: This item is displayed, but cannot be used
• ROTAT: This item is displayed, but cannot be used
LCD • SFT P: Shift P warning lamp indicates when CONSULT screen is touched
• INSRT: This item is displayed, but cannot be used
• BATT: Key warning lamp indicates when CONSULT screen is touched
• NO KY: Key warning lamp indicates when CONSULT screen is touched
• OUTKEY: Engine start operation indicator lamp indicates when CONSULT screen is touched
• LK WN: Engine start operation indicator lamp indicates when CONSULT screen is touched
This test is able to check security hazard lamp operation
FLASHER
The hazard lamps are activated after “LH/RH/Off” on CONSULT screen is touched
This test is able to check CVT shift selector or A/T shift selector power supply
P RANGE • On: Operate
• Off: Non-operation

Revision: 2012 July DLK-44 N17


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
Test item Description
A
This test is able to check push-button ignition switch illumination operation
ENGINE SW ILLUMI
Push-button ignition switch illumination illuminates when “ON” on CONSULT screen is touched
This test is able to check ACC/ON indicator in push-button ignition switch operation
PUSH SWITCH INDICATOR ACC/ON indicator in push-button ignition switch illuminates when “ON” on CONSULT screen is B
touched
This test is able to check trunk lid open operation
TRUNK/BACK DOOR
• Open: Operate C
NOTE:
RETRACTABLE MIRROR
This item is indicated, but not used

TRUNK D

TRUNK : CONSULT Function (BCM - TRUNK) INFOID:0000000006655040

E
DATA MONITOR
NOTE:
The following table includes information (items) inapplicable to this vehicle. For information (items) applicable F
to this vehicle, refer to CONSULT display items.

Monitor Item Contents


G
PUSH SW Indicates [On/Off] condition of push switch
UNLK SEN -DR Indicates [On/Off] condition of unlock sensor
VEH SPEED 1 Indicates [Km/h] condition of vehicle speed signal from combination meter H
NOTE:
TR/BD OPEN SW
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
TRNK/HAT MNTR Indicates [On/Off] condition of trunk room lamp switch I
RKE-TR/BD Indicates [On/Off] condition of trunk open signal from Intelligent Key
NOTE:
KEY CYL SW-TR
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
J

NOTE:
TR CANCEL SW
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
DLK

Revision: 2012 July DLK-45 N17


BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION


BCM
List of ECU Reference INFOID:0000000006655041

ECU Reference
BCS-36, "Reference Value"
BCS-58, "Fail-safe"
BCM
BCS-60, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart"
BCS-61, "DTC Index"

Revision: 2012 July DLK-46 N17


DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

WIRING DIAGRAM A
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
LHD
B
LHD : Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000007799772

For connector terminal arrangements, harness layouts, and alphabets in a (option abbreviation; if not C
described in wiring diagram), refer to GI-12, "Connector Information".

DLK

JRKWC1600GB

Revision: 2012 July DLK-47 N17


DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

JRKWC1601GB

Revision: 2012 July DLK-48 N17


DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

DLK

JRKWC1602GB

P
RHD

Revision: 2012 July DLK-49 N17


DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
RHD : Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000006655042

For connector terminal arrangements, harness layouts, and alphabets in a (option abbreviation; if not
described in wiring diagram), refer to GI-12, "Connector Information".

JRKWC1605GB

Revision: 2012 July DLK-50 N17


DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

DLK

JRKWC1606GB

Revision: 2012 July DLK-51 N17


DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

JRKWC1607GB

Revision: 2012 July DLK-52 N17


DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

BASIC INSPECTION A
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
Work Flow INFOID:0000000006655044
B

OVERALL SEQUENCE
C

DLK

JMKIA8652GB

DETAILED FLOW

Revision: 2012 July DLK-53 N17


DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

1.GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM


1. Get detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the condition and the environment when
the incident/malfunction occurs).
2. Check operation condition of the function that is malfunctioning.

>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC
1. Check DTC.
2. Perform the following procedure if DTC is detected.
- Record DTC and freeze frame data (Print them out using CONSULT.)
- Erase DTC.
- Study the relationship between the cause detected by DTC and the symptom described by the customer.
3. Check related service bulletins for information.
Are any symptoms described and any DTC detected?
Symptom is described, DTC is detected>>GO TO 3.
Symptom is described, DTC is not detected>>GO TO 4.
Symptom is not described, DTC is detected>>GO TO 5.
3.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer.
Also study the normal operation and fail-safe related to the symptom.
Verify relation between the symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected.

>> GO TO 5.
4.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer.
Verify relation between the symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected.

>> GO TO 6.
5.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE for the detected DTC, and then check that DTC is detected
again. At this time, always connect CONSULT to the vehicle, and check self diagnostic results in real time.
If two or more DTCs are detected, refer to BCS-60, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart" and determine trouble
diagnosis order.
NOTE:
• Freeze frame data is useful if the DTC is not detected.
• Perform Component Function Check if DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE is not included on Service
Manual. This simplified check procedure is an effective alternative though DTC cannot be detected during
this check.
If the result of Component Function Check is NG, it is the same as the detection of DTC by DTC CONFIR-
MATION PROCEDURE.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Check according to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
6.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM BY SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
Detect malfunctioning system according to SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS based on the confirmed symptom in step
4, and determine the trouble diagnosis order based on possible causes and symptom.
Is the symptom described?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Monitor input data from related sensors or check voltage of related module terminals using CON-
SULT.
7.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE
Revision: 2012 July DLK-54 N17
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
Inspect according to Diagnosis Procedure of the system.
Is malfunctioning part detected? A
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> Check according to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
8.REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PART B

1. Repair or replace the malfunctioning part.


2. Reconnect parts or connectors disconnected during Diagnosis Procedure again after repair and replace-
C
ment.
3. Check DTC. If DTC is detected, erase it.

D
>> GO TO 9.
9.FINAL CHECK
When DTC is detected in step 2, perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE again, and then check that the E
malfunction is repaired securely.
When symptom is described by the customer, refer to confirmed symptom in step 3 or 4, and check that the
symptom is not detected. F
Is DTC detected and does symptom remain?
YES-1 >> DTC is detected: GO TO 7.
YES-2 >> Symptom remains: GO TO 4. G
NO >> Before returning the vehicle to the customer, always erase DTC.

DLK

Revision: 2012 July DLK-55 N17


INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
< BASIC INSPECTION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Description
INFOID:0000000007799786

BEFORE REPLACEMENT
When replacing BCM, save or print current vehicle specification with CONSULT configuration before replace-
ment.
NOTE:
If “READ CONFIGURATION” can not be used, use the “WRITE CONFIGURATION - Manual selection” after
replacing BCM.
AFTER REPLACEMENT
CAUTION:
When replacing BCM, always perform “WRITE CONFIGURATION” with CONSULT. Or not doing so,
BCM control function does not operate normally.
• Complete the procedure of “WRITE CONFIGURATION” in order.
• Configuration is different for each vehicle model. Confirm configuration of each vehicle model.
• If you set incorrect “WRITE CONFIGURATION”, incidents might occur.
NOTE:
When replacing BCM, perform the system initialization (NATS) (if equipped).
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Work Procedure
INFOID:0000000007799787

1.SAVING VEHICLE SPECIFICATION


CONSULT Configuration
Perform “READ CONFIGURATION” to save or print current vehicle specification. Refer to BCS-135, "Descrip-
tion".
NOTE:
If “READ CONFIGURATION” can not be used, use the “WRITE CONFIGURATION - Manual selection” after
replacing BCM.

>> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE BCM
Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".

>> GO TO 3.
3.WRITING VEHICLE SPECIFICATION
CONSULT Configuration
Perform “WRITE CONFIGURATION - Config file” or “WRITE CONFIGURATION - Manual selection” to write
vehicle specification. Refer to BCS-135, "Work Procedure".

>> GO TO 4.
4.INITIALIZE BCM (NATS) (IF EQUIPPED)
Perform BCM initialization. (NATS)

>> WORK END

Revision: 2012 July DLK-56 N17


B2621 INSIDE ANTENNA
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS A
B2621 INSIDE ANTENNA
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000006655047
B

DTC DETECTION LOGIC


C
CONSULT display
DTC DTC detecting condition Possible cause
description
• Inside key antenna (instrument
D
An excessive high or low voltage from inside anten- center)
B2621 INSIDE ANTENNA
na (instrument center) is sent to BCM • Between BCM ∼ Inside key anten-
na (instrument center)
E
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Select “INTELLIGENT KEY” of “BCM” using CONSULT. F
2. Select “INSIDE ANT DIAGNOSIS” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
3. Perform inside key antenna (“INSIDE ANT DIAGNOSIS”) on “WORK SUPPORT” of “INTELLIGENT
KEY”. G
4. Check BCM for DTC.
Is inside key antenna DTC detected?
YES >> Refer to DLK-57, "Diagnosis Procedure". H
NO >> Inside key antenna (instrument center) is OK.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000006655048
I
1.CHECK INSIDE KEY ANTENNA INPUT SIGNAL 1
1. Turn ignition switch ON. J
2. Check signal between BCM harness connector and ground using oscilloscope.

(+)
Signal DLK
BCM (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal

When Intelligent Key is in the an-


tenna detection area M

84 JMKIA3839GB N
M61 Ground
85

O
When Intelligent Key is not in the
antenna detection area

P
JMKIA5951GB

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK INSIDE KEY ANTENNA CIRCUIT

Revision: 2012 July DLK-57 N17


B2621 INSIDE ANTENNA
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect BCM connector and inside key antenna (instrument center) connector.
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and inside key antenna (instrument center) harness
connector.

BCM Inside key antenna (instrument center)


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
84 1
M61 M91 Existed
85 2
4. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.

BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
84
M61 Not existed
85

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
3.CHECK INSIDE KEY ANTENNA INPUT SIGNAL 2
1. Replace inside key antenna (instrument center). (New antenna or other antenna)
2. Connect BCM connector and inside key antenna (instrument center) connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check signal between BCM harness connector and ground using oscilloscope.

(+)
Signal
BCM (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal

When Intelligent Key is in the an-


tenna detection area

84 JMKIA3839GB
M61 Ground
85

When Intelligent Key is not in the


antenna detection area

JMKIA5951GB

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> Replace inside key antenna (instrument center).
NO >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: 2012 July DLK-58 N17


B2622 INSIDE ANTENNA
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
B2622 INSIDE ANTENNA
A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000006655049

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

CONSULT display
DTC DTC detecting condition Possible cause
description C
• Inside key antenna (console)
An excessive high or low voltage from inside anten-
B2622 INSIDE ANTENNA • Between BCM ∼ Inside key anten-
na (console) is sent to BCM
na (console)
D
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE E
1. Select “INTELLIGENT KEY” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “INSIDE ANT DIAGNOSIS” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
3. Perform inside key antenna (“INSIDE ANT DIAGNOSIS”) on “WORK SUPPORT” of “INTELLIGENT
F
KEY”.
4. Check BCM for DTC.
Is inside key antenna DTC detected?
G
YES >> Refer to DLK-59, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> Inside key antenna (console) is OK.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000006655050 H

1.CHECK INSIDE KEY ANTENNA INPUT SIGNAL 1


1. Turn ignition switch ON. I
2. Check signal between BCM harness connector and ground using oscilloscope.

(+) J
Signal
BCM (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal
DLK

When Intelligent Key is in the anten- L


na detection area

M
86 JMKIA3839GB
M61 Ground
87

N
When Intelligent Key is not in the an-
tenna detection area
O
JMKIA5951GB

Is the inspection result normal? P


YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK INSIDE KEY ANTENNA CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect BCM connector and inside key antenna (console) connector.
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and inside key antenna (console) harness connector.

Revision: 2012 July DLK-59 N17


B2622 INSIDE ANTENNA
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

BCM Inside key antenna (console)


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
86 1
M61 M90 Existed
87 2
4. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.

BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
86
M61 Not existed
87

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
3.CHECK INSIDE KEY ANTENNA INPUT SIGNAL 2
1. Replace inside key antenna (console). (New antenna or other antenna)
2. Connect BCM connector and inside key antenna (console) connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check signal between BCM harness connector and ground using oscilloscope.

(+)
Signal
BCM (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal

When Intelligent Key is in the anten-


na detection area

86 JMKIA3839GB
M61 Ground
87

When Intelligent Key is not in the an-


tenna detection area

JMKIA5951GB

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> Replace inside key antenna (console).
NO >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: 2012 July DLK-60 N17


B2623 INSIDE ANTENNA
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
B2623 INSIDE ANTENNA
A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000006655051

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

CONSULT display
DTC DTC detecting condition Possible cause
description C
• Inside key antenna (trunk room)
An excessive high or low voltage from inside anten-
B2623 INSIDE ANTENNA • Between BCM ∼ Inside key anten-
na (trunk room) is sent to BCM
na (trunk room)
D
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE E
1. Select “INTELLIGENT KEY” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “INSIDE ANT DIAGNOSIS” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
3. Perform inside key antenna (“INSIDE ANT DIAGNOSIS”) on “WORK SUPPORT” of “INTELLIGENT
F
KEY”.
4. Check BCM for DTC.
Is inside key antenna DTC detected?
G
YES >> Refer to DLK-61, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> Inside key antenna (trunk room) is OK.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000006655052 H

1.CHECK INSIDE KEY ANTENNA INPUT SIGNAL 1


1. Turn ignition switch ON. I
2. Check signal between BCM harness connector and ground using oscilloscope.

(+) J
Signal
BCM (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal
DLK

When Intelligent Key is in the anten- L


na detection area

M
88 JMKIA3839GB
M61 Ground
89

N
When Intelligent Key is not in the an-
tenna detection area
O
JMKIA5951GB

Is the inspection result normal? P


YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK INSIDE KEY ANTENNA CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect BCM connector and inside key antenna (trunk room) connector.

Revision: 2012 July DLK-61 N17


B2623 INSIDE ANTENNA
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and inside key antenna (trunk room) harness connec-
tor.

BCM Inside key antenna (trunk room)


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
88 1
M61 B23 Existed
89 2
4. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.

BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
88
M61 Not existed
89

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
3.CHECK INSIDE KEY ANTENNA INPUT SIGNAL 2
1. Replace inside key antenna (trunk room). (New antenna or other antenna)
2. Connect BCM connector and inside key antenna (trunk room) connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check signal between BCM harness connector and ground using oscilloscope.

(+)
Signal
BCM (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal

When Intelligent Key is in the anten-


na detection area

88 JMKIA3839GB
M61 Ground
89

When Intelligent Key is not in the an-


tenna detection area

JMKIA5951GB

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> Replace inside key antenna (trunk room).
NO >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: 2012 July DLK-62 N17


B2626 OUTSIDE ANTENNA
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
B2626 OUTSIDE ANTENNA
A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000006655053

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

CONSULT display
DTC DTC detecting condition Possible cause
description C
• Outside key antenna (front door
An excessive high or low voltage from outside key right side)
B2626 OUTSIDE ANTENNA
antenna (front door right side) is sent to BCM • Between BCM ∼ Outside key an-
tenna (front door right side)
D

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE


1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE E

1. Turn ignition switch ON.


2. Check “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “BCM” using CONSULT.
F
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Refer to DLK-63, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> Outside key antenna (driver side) is OK.
G
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000006655054

1.CHECK OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA INPUT SIGNAL 1 H


1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check signal between BCM harness connector and ground using oscilloscope.
LHD models
I
(+)
Signal
BCM (–) Condition
(Reference value) J
Connector Terminal

When Intelligent
Key is in the an- DLK
tenna detection
area (The dis-
tance between
Intelligent Key L
and antenna: 80
When the passenger cm or less) JMKIA5955GB
80 door request switch is
M61 Ground
81 operated with ignition When Intelligent M
switch OFF Key is not in the
antenna detec-
tion area (The
distance be- N
tween Intelli-
gent Key and
antenna: Ap-
prox. 2 m) JMKIA5954GB O

Revision: 2012 July DLK-63 N17


B2626 OUTSIDE ANTENNA
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
RHD models
(+)
Signal
BCM (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal

When Intelligent
Key is in the an-
tenna detection
area (The dis-
tance between
Intelligent Key
and antenna: 80
When the driver door cm or less) JMKIA5955GB
78 request switch is op-
M61 Ground
79 erated with ignition When Intelligent
switch OFF Key is not in the
antenna detec-
tion area (The
distance be-
tween Intelli-
gent Key and
antenna: Ap-
prox. 2 m) JMKIA5954GB

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect BCM connector and outside key antenna (passenger side) connector (LHD models), or out-
side key antenna (driver side) connector (RHD models).
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and outside key antenna (passenger side) harness
connector (LHD models), or outside key antenna (driver side) harness connector (RHD models).
LHD models
BCM Outside key antenna (passenger side)
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
80 1
M61 D22 Existed
81 2

RHD models
BCM Outside key antenna (driver side)
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
78 1
M61 D50 Existed
79 2
4. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.
LHD models
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
80
M61 Not existed
81

RHD models
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
78
M61 Not existed
79
Is the inspection result normal?

Revision: 2012 July DLK-64 N17


B2626 OUTSIDE ANTENNA
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness. A
3.CHECK OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA INPUT SIGNAL 2
1. Replace outside key antenna (passenger side) (LHD models), or outside key antenna (driver side) (RHD
B
models). (New antenna or other antenna)
2. Connect BCM connector and outside key antenna (passenger side) connector (LHD models), or outside
key antenna (driver side) connector (RHD models).
3. Turn ignition switch ON. C
4. Check signal between BCM harness connector and ground using oscilloscope.
LHD models
(+) D
Signal
BCM (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal
E
When Intelligent
Key is in the an-
tenna detection
area (The dis- F
tance between
Intelligent Key
and antenna: 80
When the passenger cm or less) G
JMKIA5955GB
80 door request switch
M61 Ground
81 is operated with igni- When Intelligent
tion switch OFF Key is not in the
antenna detec- H
tion area (The
distance be-
tween Intelli-
I
gent Key and
antenna: Ap-
prox. 2 m) JMKIA5954GB

RHD models
J
(+)
Signal
BCM (–) Condition
(Reference value) DLK
Connector Terminal

When Intelligent
Key is in the an- L
tenna detection
area (The dis-
tance between
Intelligent Key M
and antenna: 80
When the driver cm or less) JMKIA5955GB
78 door request switch
M61 Ground
79 is operated with igni- When Intelligent N
tion switch OFF Key is not in the
antenna detec-
tion area (The
distance be- O
tween Intelli-
gent Key and
antenna: Ap-
prox. 2 m) JMKIA5954GB P
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace outside key antenna (passenger side) (LHD models), or outside key antenna (driver side)
(RHD models).
NO >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: 2012 July DLK-65 N17


B2627 OUTSIDE ANTENNA
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
B2627 OUTSIDE ANTENNA
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000006655055

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

CONSULT display
DTC DTC detecting condition Possible cause
description
• Outside key antenna (front door
An excessive high or low voltage from outside key left side)
B2627 OUTSIDE ANTENNA
antenna (front door left side) is sent to BCM • Between BCM ∼ Outside key an-
tenna (front door left side)

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE


1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “BCM” using CONSULT.
Is outside key antenna DTC detected?
YES >> Refer to DLK-66, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> Outside key antenna (passenger side) is OK.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000006655056

1.CHECK OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA INPUT SIGNAL 1


1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check signal between BCM harness connector and ground using oscilloscope.
LHD models
(+)
Signal
BCM (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal
When Intelli-
gent Key is in
the antenna de-
tection area
(The distance
between Intelli-
gent Key and
When the driver side antenna: 80 cm
78 door request switch is or less) JMKIA5955GB

M61 Ground
79 operated with ignition When Intelli-
switch OFF gent Key is not
in the antenna
detection area
(The distance
between Intelli-
gent Key and
antenna: Ap-
prox. 2 m) JMKIA5954GB

Revision: 2012 July DLK-66 N17


B2627 OUTSIDE ANTENNA
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
RHD models
(+) A
Signal
BCM (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal
When Intelli-
B
gent Key is in
the antenna de-
tection area C
(The distance
between Intelli-
gent Key and
When the passenger antenna: 80 cm D
side door request or less) JMKIA5955GB
80
M61 Ground switch is operated
81 When Intelli-
with ignition switch
OFF gent Key is not E
in the antenna
detection area
(The distance
between Intelli- F
gent Key and
antenna: Ap-
prox. 2 m) JMKIA5954GB

G
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> GO TO 2.
H
2.CHECK OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect BCM connector and outside key antenna (driver side) connector (LHD models), or outside key I
antenna (passenger side) connector (RHD models).
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and outside key antenna (driver side) harness connec-
tor (LHD models), or outside key antenna (passenger side) harness connector (RHD models)
J
LHD models
BCM Outside key antenna (driver side)
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal DLK
78 1
M61 D7 Existed
79 2
L
RHD models
BCM Outside key antenna (passenger side)
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M
80 1
M61 D45 Existed
81 2
4. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground. N
LHD models
BCM
Continuity O
Connector Terminal
Ground
78
M61 Not existed
79 P
RHD models
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
80
M61 Not existed
81
Is the inspection result normal?

Revision: 2012 July DLK-67 N17


B2627 OUTSIDE ANTENNA
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
3.CHECK OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA INPUT SIGNAL 2
1. Replace outside key antenna (driver side) (LHD models), or outside key antenna (passenger side) (RHD
models). (New antenna or other antenna)
2. Connect BCM connector and outside key antenna (driver side) connector (LHD models), or outside key
antenna (passenger side) connector (RHD models).
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check signal between BCM harness connector and ground using oscilloscope.
LHD models
(+)
Signal
BCM (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal
When Intelli-
gent Key is in
the antenna de-
tection area
(The distance
between Intelli-
gent Key and
When the driver side antenna: 80 cm
78 door request switch is or less) JMKIA5955GB

M61 Ground
79 operated with ignition When Intelli-
switch OFF gent Key is not
in the antenna
detection area
(The distance
between Intelli-
gent Key and
antenna: Ap-
prox. 2 m) JMKIA5954GB

RHD models
(+)
Signal
BCM (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal
When Intelli-
gent Key is in
the antenna de-
tection area
(The distance
between Intelli-
gent Key and
When the passenger antenna: 80 cm
80 side door request or less) JMKIA5955GB
M61 Ground
81 switch is operated with When Intelli-
ignition switch OFF gent Key is not
in the antenna
detection area
(The distance
between Intelli-
gent Key and
antenna: Ap-
prox. 2 m) JMKIA5954GB

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> Replace outside key antenna (driver side) (LHD models), or outside key antenna (passenger side)
(RHD models).
NO >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: 2012 July DLK-68 N17


B2628 OUTSIDE ANTENNA
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
B2628 OUTSIDE ANTENNA
A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000006655057

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

CONSULT display
DTC DTC detecting condition Possible cause
description C
• Outside key antenna (rear
An excessive high or low voltage from outside key bumper)
B2623 OUTSIDE ANTENNA
antenna (rear bumper) is sent to BCM • Between BCM – Outside key an-
tenna (rear bumper) D

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE


1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE E

1. Turn ignition switch ON.


2. Check “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “BCM” using CONSULT.
F
Is outside key antenna DTC detected?
YES >> Refer to DLK-69, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> Outside key antenna (rear bumper) is OK.
G
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000006655058

1.CHECK OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA INPUT SIGNAL 1 H


1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check signal between BCM harness connector and ground using oscilloscope.
I
(+)
Signal
BCM (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal J

When Intelligent
Key is in the an-
tenna detection DLK
area (The dis-
tance between
Intelligent Key
L
When the trunk and antenna: 80
lid opener switch cm or less) JMKIA5955GB

M61 82,83 Ground is operated with


When Intelligent
ignition switch
Key is not in the
M
OFF
antenna detec-
tion area (The
distance be- N
tween Intelli-
gent Key and
antenna: Ap-
prox. 2 m) JMKIA5954GB
O
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> GO TO 2. P
2.CHECK OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect BCM connector and outside key antenna (rear bumper) connector.
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and outside key antenna (rear bumper) harness con-
nector.

Revision: 2012 July DLK-69 N17


B2628 OUTSIDE ANTENNA
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

BCM Outside key antenna (rear bumper)


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
82 1
M61 B22 Existed
83 2
4. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.

BCM
Connector Terminal Continuity
Ground
82
M61 Not existed
83
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
3.CHECK OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA INPUT SIGNAL 2
1. Replace outside key antenna (rear bumper). (New antenna or other antenna)
2. Connect BCM and outside key antenna (rear bumper) connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check signal between BCM harness connector and ground using oscilloscope.

(+)
Signal
BCM (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal

When Intelligent
Key is in the an-
tenna detection
area (The dis-
tance between
Intelligent Key
When the trunk and antenna: 80
lid opener switch cm or less) JMKIA5955GB

M61 82,83 Ground is operated with


When Intelligent
ignition switch
Key is not in the
OFF
antenna detec-
tion area (The
distance be-
tween Intelli-
gent Key and
antenna: Ap-
prox. 2 m) JMKIA5954GB

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> Replace outside key antenna (rear bumper).
NO >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: 2012 July DLK-70 N17


COMBINATION METER BUZZER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
COMBINATION METER BUZZER
A
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000006655091

1.CHECK FUNCTION B
1. Select “INTELLIGENT KEY” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “INSIDE BUZZER” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
3. Touch “Key”, “Knob” or “Take Out” to check that it works normally. C
Is the inspection result normal?
Yes >> Combination meter buzzer is OK.
No >> Refer to DLK-71, "Diagnosis Procedure". D
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000006655092

1.CHECK METER BUZZER CIRCUIT E

Refer to WCS-54, "Component Function Check".


Is the inspection result normal? F
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> Repair or replace harness.
2.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT G
Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".

H
>> INSPECTION END

DLK

Revision: 2012 July DLK-71 N17


DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
DRIVER SIDE
DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check INFOID:0000000006655071

1.CHECK FUNCTION
1. Select “DOOR LOCK” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “DOOR LOCK” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
3. Touch “ALL LOCK” or “ALL UNLK” to check that it works normally.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Door lock actuator is OK.
NO >> Refer to DLK-72, "DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".
DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000006655072

1.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR INPUT SIGNAL


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect front door lock assembly (driver side) connector.
3. Check voltage between front door lock assembly (driver side) harness connector and ground.
LHD models
(+)
Front door lock assembly Voltage
(–) Condition
(driver side) (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
1 Lock
D5 Ground Door lock and unlock switch 12 V
2 Unlock

RHD models
(+)
Front door lock assembly Voltage
(–) Condition
(driver side) (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
5 Lock
D48 Ground Door lock and unlock switch 12 V
6 Unlock
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace front door lock assembly (driver side).
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect BCM connector and all door lock actuator connector.
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and front door lock assembly (driver side) harness
connector.
LHD models
BCM Front door lock assembly (driver side)
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
65 1
M59 D5 Existed
66 2

RHD models
BCM Front door lock assembly (driver side)
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
65 5
M59 D48 Existed
66 6

Revision: 2012 July DLK-72 N17


DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.
A
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
65 B
M59 Not existed
66
Is the inspection result normal? C
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
3.CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL D
1. Connect BCM connector.
2. Check voltage between front door lock assembly (driver side) harness connector and ground.
E
(+)
Voltage
BCM (–) Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal F
65 Lock
M59 Ground Door lock and unlock switch 12 V
66 Unlock
G
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check for internal short of each door lock actuator.
NO >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation". H
PASSENGER SIDE
PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check INFOID:0000000006655073
I
1.CHECK FUNCTION
1. Select “DOOR LOCK” of “BCM” using CONSULT. J
2. Select “DOOR LOCK” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
3. Touch “ALL LOCK” or “ALL UNLK” to check that it works normally.
Is the inspection result normal? DLK
YES >> Door lock actuator is OK.
NO >> Refer to DLK-73, "PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".
PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000006655074 L

1.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR INPUT SIGNAL


1. Turn ignition switch OFF. M
2. Disconnect front door lock assembly (passenger side) connector.
3. Check voltage between front door lock assembly (passenger side) harness connector and ground.
LHD models N
(+)
Front door lock assembly Voltage
(–) Condition O
(passenger side) (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
5 Lock
D20 Ground Door lock and unlock switch 12 V P
6 Unlock

Revision: 2012 July DLK-73 N17


DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
RHD models
(+)
Front door lock assembly Voltage
(–) Condition
(passenger side) (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
1 Lock
D43 Ground Door lock and unlock switch 12 V
2 Unlock
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace front door lock assembly (passenger side).
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect BCM connector and all door lock actuator.
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and front door lock assembly (passenger side) har-
ness connector.
LHD models
BCM Front door lock assembly (passenger side)
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
65 5
M59 D20 Existed
66 6

RHD models
BCM Front door lock assembly (passenger side)
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
65 1
M59 D43 Existed
66 2
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.

BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
65
M59 Not existed
66
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
3.CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL
1. Connect BCM connector.
2. Check voltage between front door lock assembly (driver side) harness connector and ground.

(+)
Voltage
BCM (–) Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
65 Lock
M59 Ground Door lock and unlock switch 12 V
66 Unlock
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check for internal short of each door lock actuator.
NO >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
REAR LH

Revision: 2012 July DLK-74 N17


DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
REAR LH : Component Function Check INFOID:0000000006655075

A
1.CHECK FUNCTION
1. Select “DOOR LOCK” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “DOOR LOCK” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. B
3. Touch “ALL LOCK” or “ALL UNLK” to check that it works normally.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Door lock actuator is OK. C
NO >> Refer to DLK-76, "REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure".
REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000006655076
D

1.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR INPUT SIGNAL


1. Turn ignition switch OFF. E
2. Disconnect rear door lock assembly LH connector.
3. Check voltage between rear door lock assembly LH harness connector and ground.
F
(+)
Voltage
Rear door lock assembly LH (–) Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal G
1 Lock
D38 Ground Door lock and unlock switch 12 V
2 Unlock
H
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace rear door lock assembly LH.
NO >> GO TO 2.
I
2.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect BCM connector and all door lock actuator connector.
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and rear door lock assembly LH harness connector. J

BCM Rear door lock assembly LH


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal DLK
65 1
M59 D38 Existed
66 2
L
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.

BCM
Continuity M
Connector Terminal
Ground
65
M59 Not existed
66 N
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness. O
3.CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL
1. Connect BCM connector.
P
2. Check voltage between front door lock assembly (driver side) harness connector and ground.

Revision: 2012 July DLK-75 N17


DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

(+)
Voltage
BCM (–) Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
65 Lock
M59 Ground Door lock and unlock switch 12 V
66 Unlock
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check for internal short of each door lock actuator.
NO >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
REAR RH
REAR RH : Component Function Check INFOID:0000000006655077

1.CHECK FUNCTION
1. Select “DOOR LOCK” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “DOOR LOCK” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
3. Touch “ALL LOCK” or “ALL UNLK” to check that it works normally.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Door lock actuator is OK.
NO >> Refer to DLK-76, "REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure".
REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000006655078

1.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR INPUT SIGNAL


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect rear door lock assembly RH connector.
3. Check voltage between rear door lock assembly RH harness connector and ground.

(+)
Voltage
Rear door lock assembly RH (–) Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
5 Lock
D33 Ground Door lock and unlock switch 12 V
6 Unlock
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace rear door lock assembly RH.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect BCM connector and all door lock actuator connector.
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and rear door lock assembly RH harness connector.

BCM Rear door lock assembly RH


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
65 5
M59 D33 Existed
66 6
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.

BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
65
M59 Not existed
66
Is the inspection result normal?

Revision: 2012 July DLK-76 N17


DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness. A
3.CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL
1. Connect BCM connector.
B
2. Check voltage between front door lock assembly (driver side) harness connector and ground.

(+)
BCM (–) Condition
Voltage C
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
65 Lock D
M59 Ground Door lock and unlock switch 12 V
66 Unlock
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check for internal short of each door lock actuator. E
NO >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".

DLK

Revision: 2012 July DLK-77 N17


DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000006655062

1.CHECK FUNCTION
1. Select “DOOR LOCK” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “CDL LOCK SW”, “CDL UNLOCK SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
3. Check that the function operates normally according to the following conditions.

Monitor item Condition Status


LOCK ON
CDL LOCK SW
UNLOCK OFF
Door lock and unlock switch
LOCK OFF
CDL UNLOCK SW
UNLOCK ON
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Door lock and unlock switch is OK.
NO >> Refer to DLK-78, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000006655063

1.CHECK DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect power window main switch connector.
3. Check signal between power window main switch harness connector and ground using oscilloscope.
LHD models
(+)
Signal
Power window main switch (–)
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal
D3 6

Ground
D4 18

JPMIA0012GB

1.0 - 1.5 V

RHD models
(+)
Signal
Power window main switch (–)
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal
D17 6

Ground
D18 18

JPMIA0012GB

1.0 - 1.5 V
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.

Revision: 2012 July DLK-78 N17


DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

2.CHECK DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT A


1. Disconnect BCM connector.
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and power window main switch harness connector.
LHD models B
BCM Power window main switch
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
45 D4 18 C
M63 Existed
46 D3 6

RHD models
D
BCM Power window main switch
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
45 D18 18 E
M63 Existed
46 D17 6
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.
F
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground G
45
M63 Not existed
46
Is the inspection result normal? H
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
3.CHECK DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH GROUND I
Check continuity between power window main switch harness connector and ground.
LHD models
J
Power window main switch
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
D4 17 Existed DLK
RHD models
Power window main switch
Continuity L
Connector Terminal Ground
D18 17 Existed
Is the inspection result normal? M
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
4.CHECK DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH N
Refer to DLK-80, "Component Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
O
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace power window main switch. Refer to PWC-57, "Removal and Installation".
5.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT P
Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".

>> INSPECTION END

Revision: 2012 July DLK-79 N17


DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
Component Inspection INFOID:0000000006655064

1.CHECK DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect power window main switch (door lock and unlock switch) connector.
3. Check continuity between power window main switch (door lock and unlock switch) terminals.

Power window main switch


Condition Continuity
Terminal
LOCK Not existed
6
Door lock and unlock UNLOCK Existed
17
switch LOCK Existed
18
UNLOCK Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace power window main switch. Refer to PWC-57, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: 2012 July DLK-80 N17


DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
A
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000006655065

1.CHECK FUNCTION B
1. Select “INTELLIGENT KEY” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “REQ SW-DR”, “REQ SW-AS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
3. Check that the function operates normally according to the following conditions. C

Monitor item Condition Status


Pressed ON D
REQ SW -DR Driver side door request switch
Released OFF
Pressed ON
REQ SW -AS Passenger side door request switch E
Released OFF
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Front door request switch is OK. F
NO >> Refer to DLK-81, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000006655066

G
1.CHECK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect malfunctioning front door request switch connector. H
3. Check voltage between malfunctioning front door request switch harness connector and ground.
LHD models
(+) I
Voltage
Front door request switch (–)
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
J
Driver side D6
2 Ground 12 V
Passenger side D21

RHD models DLK


(+)
Voltage
Front door request switch (–)
(Approx.) L
Connector Terminal
Driver side D49
1 Ground 12 V
Passenger side D44 M
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2. N
2.CHECK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect BCM connector. O
2. Check continuity between malfunctioning front door request switch harness connector and BCM harness
connector.
LHD models
P
Front door request switch BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
Driver side D6 75
2 M61 Existed
Passenger side D21 76

Revision: 2012 July DLK-81 N17


DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
RHD models
Front door request switch BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
Driver side D49 75
1 M61 Existed
Passenger side D44 76
3. Check continuity between malfunctioning front door request switch harness connector and ground.
LHD models
Front door request switch
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
Driver side D6
2 Not existed
Passenger side D21

RHD models
Front door request switch
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
Driver side D49
1 Not existed
Passenger side D44
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
3.CHECK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between malfunctioning front door request switch harness connector and ground.
LHD models
Front door request switch
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
Driver side D6
1 Existed
Passenger side D21

RHD models
Front door request switch
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
Driver side D49
2 Existed
Passenger side D44
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
4.CHECK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
Refer to DLK-82, "Component Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace malfunctioning front door request switch.
5.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".

>> INSPECTION END


Component Inspection INFOID:0000000006655067

1.CHECK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

Revision: 2012 July DLK-82 N17


DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
2. Disconnect malfunctioning front door request switch connector.
3. Check continuity between malfunctioning front door request switch terminals. A

Front door request switch


Condition Continuity
Terminal B
Pressed Existed
1 2 Door request switch
Released Not existed
C
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace malfunctioning front door request switch.
D

DLK

Revision: 2012 July DLK-83 N17


DOOR SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
DOOR SWITCH
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000006655059

1.CHECK FUNCTION
1. Select “DOOR LOCK” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “DOOR SW-DR”, “DOOR SW-AS”, “DOOR SW-RL” and “DOOR SW-RR” in “DATA MONITOR”
mode.
3. Check that the function operates normally according to the following conditions.

Monitor item Condition Status


Open ON
DOOR SW-DR Driver side door
Closed OFF
Open ON
DOOR SW-AS Passenger side door
Closed OFF
Open ON
DOOR SW-RL Rear door LH
Closed OFF
Open ON
DOOR SW-RR Rear door RH
Closed OFF
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Door switch is OK.
NO >> Refer to DLK-84, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000006655060

1.CHECK DOOR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect malfunctioning door switch connector.
3. Check signal between malfunctioning door switch harness connector and ground using oscilloscope.

(+)
Signal
Door switch (–)
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal
Driver side B27 3
Passenger side B28 3
Rear LH B30 3
Ground

Rear RH B29 3
PKIB4960J

7.0 - 8.0 V
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DOOR SWITCH CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect BCM connector.
2. Check continuity between door switch harness connector and BCM harness connector.

Revision: 2012 July DLK-84 N17


DOOR SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

Door switch BCM A


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
Driver side B27 M63 47
Passenger side B28 M65 12
B
3 Existed
Rear LH B30 M63 48
Rear RH B29 M65 13 C
3. Check continuity between door switch harness connector and ground.

Door switch D
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Driver side B27
Ground E
Passenger side B28
3 Not existed
Rear LH B30
Rear RH B29
F
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair or replace harness. G
3.CHECK DOOR SWITCH
Refer to DLK-85, "Component Inspection".
H
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace malfunctioning door switch.
I
4.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
J
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection INFOID:0000000006655061 DLK

1.CHECK DOOR SWITCH


1. Turn ignition switch OFF. L
2. Disconnect malfunctioning door switch connector.
3. Check continuity between door switch terminals.
M
Door switch
Condition Continuity
Terminal
Pressed Not existed N
Driver side
Released Existed
Pressed Not existed
Passenger side O
Ground part of door Released Existed
3 Door switch
switch Pressed Not existed
Rear LH
Released Existed P
Pressed Not existed
Rear RH
Released Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace malfunction door switch.

Revision: 2012 July DLK-85 N17


HAZARD FUNCTION
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
HAZARD FUNCTION
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000006655099

1.CHECK FUNCTION
1. Select “INTELLIGENT KEY” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “FLASHER” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
3. Touch “LH” or “RH” to check that it works normally.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Hazard warning lamp circuit is OK.
NO >> Refer to DLK-86, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000006655100

1.CHECK HAZARD SWITCH CIRCUIT


Refer to EXL-70, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
2.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".

>> INSPECTION END

Revision: 2012 July DLK-86 N17


INTELLIGENT KEY
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
INTELLIGENT KEY
A
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000006655089

1.CHECK FUNCTION B
1. Select “INTELLIGENT KEY” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “RKE OPE COUN1” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
3. Check that the function operates normally according to the following conditions. C

Monitor item Condition


RKE OPE COUN1 Checks whether value changes when operating Intelligent Key D
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Intelligent Key is OK.
NO >> Refer to DLK-87, "Diagnosis Procedure". E

Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000006655090

F
1.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY
Check by connecting a resistance (approximately 300 Ω) so that the G
current value becomes about 10 mA. Refer to DLK-202, "Removal
and Installation".

Standard : Approx. 2.5 - 3.0 V H

Is the measurement value within the specification?


YES >> Replace Intelligent Key. I
NO >> Replace Intelligent Key battery.

OCC0607D J

DLK

Revision: 2012 July DLK-87 N17


INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING BUZZER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING BUZZER
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000006655086

1.CHECK FUNCTION
1. Select “INTELLIGENT KEY” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “OUTSIDE BUZZER” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
3. Touch “On” or “Off” to check that it works normally.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Intelligent Key warning buzzer is OK.
NO >> Refer to DLK-88, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000006655087

1.CHECK FUSE
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check 10 A fuse, [No. 13, located in fuse block (J/B)].
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Replace the blown fuse after repairing the affected circuit if a fuse is blown.
2.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING BUZZER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect Intelligent Key warning buzzer connector.
2. Check voltage between Intelligent Key warning buzzer harness connector and ground.

(+)
Voltage
Intelligent Key warning buzzer (–)
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
E66 1 Ground Battery voltage
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
3.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING BUZZER CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect BCM connector.
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and Intelligent Key warning buzzer harness connector.

BCM Intelligent Key warning buzzer


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M61 93 E66 3 Existed
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.

BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M61 93 Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
4.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING BUZZER
Refer to DLK-89, "Component Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Replace Intelligent Key warning buzzer.

Revision: 2012 July DLK-88 N17


INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING BUZZER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
Component Inspection INFOID:0000000006655088

A
1.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING BUZZER
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect Intelligent Key warning buzzer connector. B
3. Connect battery power supply directly to Intelligent Key warning buzzer terminals and check the opera-
tion.
C
Intelligent Key warning buzzer
Terminal Operation
(+) (−) D
1 3 Buzzer sounds
Is the inspection result normal? E
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace Intelligent Key warning buzzer.
F

DLK

Revision: 2012 July DLK-89 N17


KEY WARNING LAMP
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
KEY WARNING LAMP
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000006655095

1.CHECK FUNCTION
1. Select “INTELLIGENT KEY” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “INDICATOR” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
3. Touch “KEY IND” or “KEY ON” to check that it works normally.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Key warning lamp is OK.
NO >> Refer to DLK-90, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000006655096

1.CHECK KEY WARNING LAMP


Refer to MWI-23, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
2.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".

>> INSPECTION END

Revision: 2012 July DLK-90 N17


REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER
A
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007072462

1.CHECK FUNCTION B
1. Select “INTELLIGENT KEY” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “RKE OPE COUN1” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
3. Check that the function operates normally according to the following conditions. C

Monitor item Condition


RKE OPE COUN1 Checks whether value changes when operating Intelligent Key D
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Remote keyless entry receiver is OK.
NO >> Refer to DLK-91, "Diagnosis Procedure". E

Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007072463

F
1.CHECK BCM SIGNAL 1
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect remote keyless entry receiver connector. G
3. Check voltage between remote keyless entry receiver harness connector and ground.
Except for Hong Kong
(+) H
Voltage (V)
Remote keyless entry receiver (–)
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
M67 4 Ground 5 I

For Hong Kong


(+)
Voltage (V) J
Remote keyless entry receiver (–)
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
R16 4 Ground 5 DLK
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2. L

2.CHECK REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT


1. Disconnect BCM connector. M
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and remote keyless entry receiver harness connector.
Except for Hong Kong
BCM Remote keyless entry receiver N
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M59 19 M67 4 Existed
O
For Hong Kong
BCM Remote keyless entry receiver
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
P
M59 19 R16 4 Existed
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.

BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M59 19 Not existed

Revision: 2012 July DLK-91 N17


REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
3.CHECK REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER POWER SUPPLY
1. Reconnect remote keyless entry receiver connector.
2. Check signal between remote keyless entry receiver harness connector and ground using oscilloscope.
Except for Hong Kong
(+)
Signal
Remote keyless entry receiver (–)
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal

M67 4 Ground

JMKIA3838GB

For Hong Kong


(+)
Signal
Remote keyless entry receiver (–)
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal

R16 4 Ground

JMKIA3838GB

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> GO TO 4.
NO-1 (Except for Hong Kong)>>Replace remote keyless entry receiver. Refer to DLK-201, "Removal and
Installation".
NO-2 (For Hong Kong)>> Replace inside mirror. Refer to MIR-15, "Removal and Installation".
4.CHECK REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect BCM connector.
2. Disconnect remote keyless entry receiver connector.
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and remote keyless entry receiver harness connector.
Except for Hong Kong
BCM Remote keyless entry receiver
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M59 18 M67 1 Existed

For Hong Kong


BCM Remote keyless entry receiver
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M59 18 R16 1 Existed
4. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.

BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M59 18 Not existed

Revision: 2012 July DLK-92 N17


REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5. A
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
5.CHECK BCM SIGNAL 2
B
1. Reconnect BCM connector.
2. Check voltage between remote keyless entry receiver harness connector and ground.
Except for Hong Kong
C
(+)
Voltage (V)
Remote keyless entry receiver (–)
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal D
M67 2 Ground 5

For Hong Kong


(+)
E
Voltage (V)
Remote keyless entry receiver (–)
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
F
R16 2 Ground 5
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 7. G
NO >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER SIGNAL CIRCUIT H
1. Disconnect BCM connector.
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and remote keyless entry receiver harness connector.
Except for Hong Kong I
BCM Remote keyless entry receiver
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M59 20 M67 2 Existed J
For Hong Kong
BCM Remote keyless entry receiver
Continuity DLK
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M59 20 R16 2 Existed
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground. L

BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground M
M59 20 Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
N
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
7.CHECK REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER SIGNAL O
1. Reconnect remote keyless entry receiver connector.
2. Check signal between remote keyless entry receiver harness connector and ground using oscilloscope.
P

Revision: 2012 July DLK-93 N17


REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
Except for Hong Kong
(+)
Signal
Remote keyless entry receiver (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal

During waiting

JMKIA0064GB
M67 2 Ground

When operating
either button on
the Intelligent Key

JMKIA0065GB

For Hong Kong


(+)
Signal
Remote keyless entry receiver (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal

During waiting

JMKIA0064GB
R16 2 Ground

When operating
either button on
the Intelligent Key

JMKIA0065GB

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> GO TO 8.
NO-1 (Except for Hong Kong)>>Replace remote keyless entry receiver. Refer to DLK-201, "Removal and
Installation".
NO-2 (For Hong Kong)>> Replace inside mirror. Refer to MIR-15, "Removal and Installation".
8.CHECK BCM SIGNAL 3
1. Disconnect remote keyless entry receiver connector.
2. Check voltage between remote keyless entry receiver harness connector and ground.
Except for Hong Kong
(+)
Voltage (V)
Remote keyless entry receiver (–)
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
M67 3 Ground 5

Revision: 2012 July DLK-94 N17


REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
For Hong Kong
(+) A
Voltage (V)
Remote keyless entry receiver (–)
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
R16 3 Ground 5
B

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> GO TO 10. C
NO >> GO TO 9.
9.CHECK REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER RSSI SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect BCM connector. D
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and remote keyless entry receiver harness connector.
Except for Hong Kong
BCM Remote keyless entry receiver E
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M59 22 M67 3 Existed
F
For Hong Kong
BCM Remote keyless entry receiver
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal G
M59 22 R16 3 Existed
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.
H
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
I
M59 22 Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation". J
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
10.CHECK REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER RSSI SIGNAL
DLK
1. Reconnect remote keyless entry receiver connector.
2. Check signal between remote keyless entry receiver harness connector and ground using oscilloscope.
Except for Hong Kong
L
(+)
Signal
Remote keyless entry receiver (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal M

N
During waiting

O
JMKIA5952GB
M67 3 Ground

P
When pressing
and holding either
button on Intelli-
gent Key

JMKIA5953GB

Revision: 2012 July DLK-95 N17


REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
For Hong Kong
(+)
Signal
Remote keyless entry receiver (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal

During waiting

JMKIA5952GB
R16 3 Ground

When pressing
and holding either
button on Intelli-
gent Key

JMKIA5953GB

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> GO TO 11.
NO-1 (Except for Hong Kong)>>Replace remote keyless entry receiver. Refer to DLK-201, "Removal and
Installation".
NO-2 (For Hong Kong)>> Replace inside mirror. Refer to MIR-15, "Removal and Installation".
11.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".

>> INSPECTION END

Revision: 2012 July DLK-96 N17


SHIFT P WARNING LAMP
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
SHIFT P WARNING LAMP
A
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000006655097

1.CHECK FUNCTION B
1. Select “INTELLIGENT KEY” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “LCD” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
3. Touch “SET P” to check that it works normally. C
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Shift P warning lamp is OK.
NO >> Refer to DLK-97, "Diagnosis Procedure". D
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000006655098

1.CHECK SHIFT P WARNING LAMP E

Refer to MWI-23, "On Board Diagnosis Function".


Is the inspection result normal? F
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
2.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT G
Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".

H
>> INSPECTION END

DLK

Revision: 2012 July DLK-97 N17


TRUNK LID OPENER ACTUATOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
TRUNK LID OPENER ACTUATOR
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007071820

1.CHECK FUNCTION
1. Select “INTELLIGENT KEY” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “TRUNK/GLASS HATCH” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
3. Touch “OPEN” to check that it works normally.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Trunk lid opener actuator is OK.
NO >> Refer to DLK-98, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007071821

1.CHECK TRUNK LID OPENER INPUT SIGNAL


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect trunk lid lock assembly connector.
3. Check voltage between trunk lid lock assembly harness connector and ground.

(+)
Voltage
Trunk lid lock assembly (–) Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
B24 3 Ground Trunk lid opener switch is ON 12 V
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK TRUNK LID OPENER ACTUATOR CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect BCM connector.
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and trunk lid lock assembly harness connector.

BCM Trunk lid lock assembly


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M63 53 B24 3 Existed
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.

BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M63 53 Not existed

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
3.CHECK TRUNK LID OPENER ACTUATOR GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between trunk lid lock assembly harness connector and ground.

Trunk lid lock assembly


Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
B24 2 Existed
Is the inspection normal?
YES >> Replace trunk lid lock assembly.
NO >> Repair or replace harness.

Revision: 2012 July DLK-98 N17


TRUNK LID OPENER SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
TRUNK LID OPENER SWITCH
A
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007071813

1.CHECK FUNCTION B
1. Select “TRUNK” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “TR/BD OPEN SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
3. Check that the function operates normally according to the following conditions. C

Monitor item Condition Status


Pressed On D
TR/BD OPEN SW Trunk lid opener switch
Released Off
Is the inspection result normal?
E
YES >> Trunk lid opener switch is OK.
NO >> Refer to DLK-99, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007071814
F

1.CHECK TRUNK LID OPENER INPUT SIGNAL


1. Turn ignition switch OFF. G
2. Disconnect trunk lid opener switch connector.
3. Check signal between trunk lid opener switch harness connector and ground using oscilloscope.
H
(+)
Signal
Trunk lid opener switch (–)
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal I

J
B26 1 Ground

DLK
JPMIA0012GB

Is the inspection result normal?


L
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK TRUNK LID OPENER SWITCH CIRCUIT M
1. Disconnect BCM connector.
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and trunk lid opener switch harness connector.
N
BCM Trunk lid opener switch
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M61 77 B26 1 Existed O
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.

BCM P
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M61 77 Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair or replace harness.

Revision: 2012 July DLK-99 N17


TRUNK LID OPENER SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

3.CHECK TRUNK LID OPENER SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT


Check continuity between trunk lid opener switch harness connector and ground.

Trunk lid opener switch


Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
B26 2 Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
4.CHECK TRUNK LID OPENER SWITCH
Refer to DLK-100, "Component Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace trunk lid opener switch.
5.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".

>> INSPECTION END


Component Inspection INFOID:0000000007071815

1.CHECK TRUNK LID OPENER SWITCH


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect trunk lid opener switch connector.
3. Check continuity between trunk lid opener switch terminals.

Trunk lid opener switch


Condition Continuity
Terminal
Pressed Existed
1 2 Trunk lid opener switch
Release Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace trunk lid opener switch.

Revision: 2012 July DLK-100 N17


TRUNK ROOM LAMP SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
TRUNK ROOM LAMP SWITCH
A
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007071816

1.CHECK FUNCTION B
1. Select “TRUNK” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “TRNK/HAT MNTR” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
3. Check that the function operates normally according to the following conditions. C

Monitor item Condition Status


Open On D
TRNK/HAT MNTR Trunk lid
Closed Off
Is the inspection result normal?
E
YES >> Trunk room lamp switch is OK.
NO >> Refer to DLK-102, "Component Inspection".
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007071817
F

1.CHECK TRUNK ROOM LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL


1. Turn ignition switch OFF. G
2. Disconnect trunk lid lock assembly connector.
3. Check signal between trunk lid lock assembly harness connector and ground using oscilloscope.
H
(+)
Signal
Trunk lid lock assembly (–)
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal I

J
B24 1 Ground

DLK
PKIB4960J

Is the inspection result normal?


L
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK TRUNK ROOM LAMP SWITCH CIRCUIT M
1. Disconnect BCM connector.
2. Check continuity between BCM connector and trunk lid lock assembly connector.
N
BCM Trunk lid lock assembly
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M63 42 B24 1 Existed O
3. Check continuity between BCM connector and ground.

BCM P
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M63 42 Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair or replace harness.

Revision: 2012 July DLK-101 N17


TRUNK ROOM LAMP SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

3.CHECK TRUNK ROOM LAMP SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT


Check continuity between trunk lid lock assembly connector and ground.

Trunk lid lock assembly


Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
B24 2 Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
4.CHECK TRUNK ROOM LAMP SWITCH
Refer to DLK-102, "Component Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace trunk lid lock assembly.
5.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".

>> INSPECTION END


Component Inspection INFOID:0000000007071818

1.CHECK TRUNK ROOM LAMP SWITCH


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect trunk lid lock assembly connector.
3. Check continuing between trunk room lamp switch terminal.

Trunk lid lock assembly


Condition Continuity
Terminal
Lock Existed
1 2 Trunk lid lock assembly
Unlock Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace trunk lid lock assembly.

Revision: 2012 July DLK-102 N17


UNLOCK SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
UNLOCK SENSOR
A
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000006655083

1.CHECK FUNCTION B
1. Select “INTELLIGENT KEY” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “UNLK SEN-DR” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
3. Check that the function operates normally according to the following conditions. C

Monitor item Condition Status


Lock OFF D
UNLK SEN -DR Driver side door
Unlock ON
Is the inspection result normal?
E
YES >> Unlock sensor is OK.
NO >> Refer to DLK-103, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000006655084
F

1.CHECK UNLOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL


1. Turn ignition switch OFF. G
2. Disconnect front door lock assembly (driver side) connector.
3. Check signal between front door lock assembly (driver side) harness connector and ground with oscillo-
scope. H
LHD models
(+)
Signal
Front door lock assembly (driver side) (–)
(Reference value)
I
Connector Terminal

D5 3 Ground
DLK

PKIB4960J
L
RHD models
(+)
Signal
Front door lock assembly (driver side) (–) M
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal

D48 4 Ground
O

PKIB4960J

Is the inspection result normal? P


YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK UNLOCK SENSOR CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect BCM connector.
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and front door lock assembly (driver side) harness
connector.

Revision: 2012 July DLK-103 N17


UNLOCK SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
LHD models
BCM Front door lock assembly (driver side)
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M65 31 D5 3 Existed

RHD models
BCM Front door lock assembly (driver side)
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M65 31 D48 4 Existed
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.

BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M65 31 Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
3.CHECK UNLOCK SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between front door lock assembly (driver side) harness connector and ground.
LHD models
Front door lock assembly (driver side)
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
D5 4 Existed

RHD models
Front door lock assembly (driver side)
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
D48 3 Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
4.CHECK UNLOCK SENSOR
Refer to DLK-104, "Component Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace front door lock assembly (driver side).
5.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".

>> INSPECTION END


Component Inspection INFOID:0000000006655085

1.CHECK UNLOCK SENSOR


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect front door lock assembly (driver side) connector.
3. Check continuity between front door lock assembly (driver side) terminals.

Revision: 2012 July DLK-104 N17


UNLOCK SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

Front door lock assembly (driver side) A


Condition Continuity
Terminal
Unlock Existed
3 4 Driver side door B
Lock Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END C
NO >> Replace front door lock assembly (driver side).

DLK

Revision: 2012 July DLK-105 N17


DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK
SWITCH
ALL DOOR
ALL DOOR : Description INFOID:0000000006655101

All doors do not lock/unlock using door lock and unlock switch.
ALL DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000006655102

1.CHECK DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH


Check door lock and unlock switch.
Refer to DLK-78, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
2.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
Check front door lock assembly (driver side).
Refer to DLK-175, "DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
3.REPLACE BCM
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
DRIVER SIDE
DRIVER SIDE : Description INFOID:0000000006655103

Driver side door does not lock/unlock using door lock and unlock switch.
DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000006655104

1.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR


Check front door lock assembly (driver side).
Refer to DLK-72, "DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
2.REPLACE BCM
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
PASSENGER SIDE

Revision: 2012 July DLK-106 N17


DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
PASSENGER SIDE : Description INFOID:0000000006655105

A
Passenger side door does not lock/unlock using door lock and unlock switch.
PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000006655106
B
1.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
Check front door lock assembly (passenger side).
C
Refer to DLK-73, "PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2. D
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
2.REPLACE BCM
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation". E
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END F
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
REAR LH
G
REAR LH : Description INFOID:0000000006655107

Rear LH side door does not lock/unlock using door lock and unlock switch.
H
REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000006655108

1.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR I


Check rear door lock assembly LH.
Refer to DLK-75, "REAR LH : Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal? J
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
2.REPLACE BCM DLK

1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".


2. Confirm the operation after replacement. L
Is the result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". M
REAR RH
REAR RH : Description INFOID:0000000006655109
N
Rear RH side door does not lock/unlock using door lock and unlock switch.
REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000006655110
O
1.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
Check rear door lock assembly RH. P
Refer to DLK-76, "REAR RH : Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
2.REPLACE BCM
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: 2012 July DLK-107 N17


DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".

Revision: 2012 July DLK-108 N17


DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH DRIVER SIDE DOOR LOCK KNOB OR
DOOR KEY CYLINDER
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH DRIVER SIDE DOOR LOCK
A
KNOB OR DOOR KEY CYLINDER
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000006655113
B
1.CHECK POWER DOOR LOCK OPERATION
Check power door lock operation.
C
Does door lock/unlock with door lock and unlock switch?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Refer to DLK-106, "ALL DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure". D
2.CHECK UNLOCK SENSOR
Check unlock sensor.
Refer to DLK-103, "Component Function Check". E
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. F
3.REPLACE BCM
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation". G
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END H
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".

DLK

Revision: 2012 July DLK-109 N17


DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
ALL DOOR REQUEST SWITCHES
ALL DOOR REQUEST SWITCHES : Description INFOID:0000000006655114

All doors do not lock/unlock using all door request switches.


ALL DOOR REQUEST SWITCHES : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000006655115

1.CHECK REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION


Check remote keyless entry function.
Does door lock/unlock with Intelligent Key button?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Refer to DLK-30, "REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION : System Description".
2.CHECK “LOCK/UNLOCK BY I-KEY” SETTING IN “WORK SUPPORT”
1. Select “INTELLIGENT KEY” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “LOCK/UNLOCK BY I-KEY” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
3. Check “LOCK/UNLOCK BY I-KEY” setting in “WORK SUPPORT”.
Refer to DLK-42, "INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM - INTELLIGENT KEY)".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Set “ON” in “LOCK/UNLOCK BY I-KEY”.
3.CHECK DOOR SWITCH
Check door switch.
Refer to DLK-84, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
4.CHECK INSIDE KEY ANTENNA
Check inside key antenna.
• Instrument center: Refer to DLK-57, "DTC Logic".
• Console: Refer to DLK-59, "DTC Logic".
• Trunk room: Refer to DLK-61, "DTC Logic".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
5.CHECK OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
Check outside key antenna.
• Driver side: Refer to DLK-63, "DTC Logic".
• Passenger side: Refer to DLK-66, "DTC Logic".
• Rear bumper: Refer to DLK-69, "DTC Logic".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
6.REPLACE BCM
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
DRIVER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH

Revision: 2012 July DLK-110 N17


DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
DRIVER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : Description INFOID:0000000006655116

A
All doors do not lock/unlock using driver side door request switch.
DRIVER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000006655117
B
1.CHECK DRIVER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
Check driver side door request switch.
C
Refer to DLK-81, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2. D
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
2.CHECK OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
Check outside key antenna (driver side). E
Refer to DLK-63, "DTC Logic".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3. F
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
3.REPLACE BCM
G
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal? H
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
PASSENGER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH I
PASSENGER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : Description INFOID:0000000006655118

All doors do not lock/unlock using passenger side door request switch. J

PASSENGER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000006655119

1.CHECK PASSENGER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH DLK

Check passenger side door request switch.


Refer to DLK-81, "Component Function Check". L
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. M
2.CHECK OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
Check outside key antenna (passenger side).
Refer to DLK-66, "DTC Logic". N
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. O
3.REPLACE BCM
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation". P
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".

Revision: 2012 July DLK-111 N17


DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH INTELLIGENT KEY
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH INTELLIGENT KEY
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000006655122

1.CHECK POWER DOOR LOCK OPERATION


Check power door lock operation.
Does door lock/unlock with door lock and unlock switch?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Refer to DLK-106, "ALL DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure".
2.CHECK REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER
Check remote keyless entry receiver.
Refer to DLK-91, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
3.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY
Check Intelligent Key.
Refer to DLK-87, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
4.CHECK DOOR SWITCH
Check door switch.
Refer to DLK-84, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
5.REPLACE BCM
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".

Revision: 2012 July DLK-112 N17


TRUNK LID DOES NOT OPEN
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
TRUNK LID DOES NOT OPEN
A
TRUNK LID OPENER SWITCH
TRUNK LID OPENER SWITCH : Description INFOID:0000000007080714
B
Trunk lid does not open by trunk lid opener switch operation.
TRUNK LID OPENER SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007080715
C
1.CHECK TRUNK LID OPENER SWITCH
Check trunk lid opener switch. D
Refer to DLK-99, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2. E
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
2.CHECK TRUNK LID OPENER ACTUATOR
Check trunk lid opener actuator. F
Refer to DLK-98, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3. G
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
3.REPLACE BCM H
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal? I
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
INTELLIGENT KEY J
INTELLIGENT KEY : Description INFOID:0000000007080716

Trunk lid does not open by Intelligent Key remote operation. DLK

INTELLIGENT KEY : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007080717

L
1.CHECK TRUNK LID OPEN FUNCTION
Check trunk lid open function with trunk lid opener switch.
Does trunk lid open with trunk lid opener switch? M
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Refer to DLK-113, "TRUNK LID OPENER SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure".
2.CHECK REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION N
Check remote keyless entry function.
Does door lock/unlock with Intelligent Key button?
O
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Refer to DLK-91, "Diagnosis Procedure".
3.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY P
Check Intelligent Key.
Refer to DLK-87, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
4.REPLACE BCM
Revision: 2012 July DLK-113 N17
TRUNK LID DOES NOT OPEN
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".

Revision: 2012 July DLK-114 N17


IGNITION POSITION WARNING FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
IGNITION POSITION WARNING FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
A
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000006655123

1.CHECK POWER DOOR LOCK OPERATION B


Check power door lock operation.
Does door lock/unlock with driver side door lock knob and door key cylinder?
C
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Refer to DLK-109, "Diagnosis Procedure".
2.CHECK DOOR SWITCH D
Check door switch.
Refer to DLK-84, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal? E
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
3.CHECK UNLOCK SENSOR F
Check unlock sensor.
Refer to DLK-103, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal? G
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
H
4.REPLACE BCM
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
2. Confirm the operation after replacement. I
Is the result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". J

DLK

Revision: 2012 July DLK-115 N17


AUTO DOOR LOCK OPERATION DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
AUTO DOOR LOCK OPERATION DOES NOT OPERATE
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000006655124

1.CHECK “AUTO LOCK SET” SETTING IN “WORK SUPPORT”


1. Select “INTELLIGENT KEY” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “AUTO LOCK SET” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
3. Check “AUTO LOCK SET” setting in “WORK SUPPORT”.
Refer to DLK-42, "INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM - INTELLIGENT KEY)".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Set “MODE 2”, “MODE 3”, “MODE 4”, “MODE 5”, “MODE 6” or “MODE 7” in “AUTO LOCK SET”.
2.REPLACE BCM
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".

Revision: 2012 July DLK-116 N17


VEHICLE SPEED SENSING AUTO LOCK OPERATION DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
VEHICLE SPEED SENSING AUTO LOCK OPERATION DOES NOT OPER-
A
ATE
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000006655125
B
1.CHECK “AUTOMATIC LOCK/UNLOCK SELECT” SETTING IN “WORK SUPPORT”
1. Select “DOOR LOCK” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
C
2. Select “AUTOMATIC LOCK/UNLOCK SELECT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
3. Check “AUTOMATIC LOCK/UNLOCK SELECT” setting in “WORK SUPPORT”.
Refer to DLK-40, "DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM - DOOR LOCK)".
Is the inspection result normal? D
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Set “Lock Only” or “Lock/Unlock” in “WORK SUPPORT”.
E
2.CHECK “AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK SELECT” SETTING IN “WORK SUPPORT”
1. Select “DOOR LOCK” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK SELECT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode. F
3. Check “AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK SELECT” setting in “WORK SUPPORT”.
Refer to DLK-40, "DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM - DOOR LOCK)".
Is the inspection result normal?
G
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Set “VH SPD” in “AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK SELECT”.
3.REPLACE BCM H
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal? I
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
J

DLK

Revision: 2012 July DLK-117 N17


IGN OFF INTERLOCK DOOR UNLOCK FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
IGN OFF INTERLOCK DOOR UNLOCK FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000006655126

1.CHECK “AUTOMATIC LOCK/UNLOCK SELECT” SETTING IN “WORK SUPPORT”


1. Select “DOOR LOCK” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “AUTOMATIC LOCK/UNLOCK SELECT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
3. Check “AUTOMATIC LOCK/UNLOCK SELECT” setting in “WORK SUPPORT”.
Refer to DLK-40, "DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM - DOOR LOCK)".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Set “Unlock Only” or “Lock/Unlock” in “AUTOMATIC LOCK/UNLOCK SELECT”.
2.CHECK “AUTOMATIC DOOR UNLOCK SELECT” SETTING IN “WORK SUPPORT”
1. Select “DOOR LOCK” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “AUTOMATIC DOOR UNLOCK SELECT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
3. Check “AUTOMATIC DOOR UNLOCK SELECT” setting in “WORK SUPPORT”.
Refer to DLK-40, "DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM - DOOR LOCK)".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Set “MODE 1” or “MODE 3” in “AUTOMATIC DOOR UNLOCK SELECT”.
3.REPLACE BCM
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".

Revision: 2012 July DLK-118 N17


HAZARD AND BUZZER REMINDER DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
HAZARD AND BUZZER REMINDER DOES NOT OPERATE
A
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000006655127

1.CHECK “HAZARD ANSWER BACK” SETTING IN “WORK SUPPORT” B


1. Select “INTELLIGENT KEY” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “HAZARD ANSWER BACK” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
3. Check the “HAZARD ANSWER BACK” setting in “WORK SUPPORT”. C
Refer to DLK-42, "INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM - INTELLIGENT KEY)".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2. D
NO >> Set the “Lock Only”, “Unlock Only” or “Lock/Unlock” in “HAZARD ANSWER BACK”.
2.CHECK “ANS BACK I-KEY LOCK” SETTING IN “WORK SUPPORT”
E
1. Select “INTELLIGENT KEY” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “ANS BACK I-KEY LOCK” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
3. Check the “ANS BACK I-KEY LOCK”setting in “WORK SUPPORT”.
Refer to DLK-42, "INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM - INTELLIGENT KEY)". F
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Set the “Horn Chirp” or “Buzzer” in “ANS BACK I-KEY LOCK”. G
3.CHECK “ANS BACK I-KEY UNLOCK” SETTING IN “WORK SUPPORT”
1. Select “INTELLIGENT KEY” of “BCM” using CONSULT. H
2. Select “ANS BACK I-KEY UNLOCK” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
3. Check the “ANS BACK I-KEY UNLOCK” setting in “WORK SUPPORT”.
Refer to DLK-42, "INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM - INTELLIGENT KEY)".
I
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Set the “On” in “ANS BACK I-KEY UNLOCK”.
J
4.CHECK HAZARD FUNCTION
Check hazard function.
Refer to DLK-86, "Component Function Check". DLK
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. L
5.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING BUZZER
Check Intelligent Key warning buzzer.
M
Refer to DLK-88, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
N
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
6.REPLACE BCM
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation". O
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END P
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".

Revision: 2012 July DLK-119 N17


KEY REMINDER FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
KEY REMINDER FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000006655128

1.CHECK “ANTI KEY LOCK IN FUNCTI” SETTING IN “WORK SUPPORT”


1. Select “INTELLIGENT KEY” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “ANTI KEY LOCK IN FUNCTI” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
3. Check “ANTI KEY LOCK IN FUNCTI” setting in “WORK SUPPORT”.
Refer to DLK-42, "INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM - INTELLIGENT KEY)".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Set “On” in “ANTI KEY LOCK IN FUNCTI”.
2.CHECK DOOR SWITCH
Check door switch.
Refer to DLK-84, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
3.CHECK INSIDE KEY ANTENNA
Check inside key antenna.
• Instrument center: Refer to DLK-57, "DTC Logic".
• Console: Refer to DLK-59, "DTC Logic".
• Trunk room: Refer to DLK-61, "DTC Logic".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
4.CHECK UNLOCK SENSOR
Check unlock sensor.
Refer to DLK-103, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
5.REPLACE BCM
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".

Revision: 2012 July DLK-120 N17


OFF POSITION WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
OFF POSITION WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE
A
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000006655129

1.CHECK DTC WITH BCM B


Check that DTC is not detected with BCM
Is the inspection result normal?
C
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Perform trouble diagnosis relevant to DTC indicated.
2.CHECK DTC WITH COMBINATION METER D
Check that DTC is not detected with combination meter
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3. E
NO >> Perform trouble diagnosis relevant to DTC indicated.
3.CHECK DOOR SWITCH
F
Check front door switch (driver side).
Refer to DLK-84, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
G
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
4.CHECK COMBINATION METER BUZZER H
Check combination meter buzzer.
Refer to DLK-71, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal? I
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
5.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING BUZZER J

Check Intelligent Key warning buzzer.


Refer to DLK-88, "Component Function Check".
DLK
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
L
6.REPLACE BCM
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
2. Confirm the operation after replacement. M
Is the result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". N

Revision: 2012 July DLK-121 N17


P POSITION WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
P POSITION WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000006655133

1.CHECK DTC WITH BCM


Check that DTC is not detected with BCM
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Perform trouble diagnosis relevant to DTC indicated.
2.CHECK DTC WITH COMBINATION METER
Check that DTC is not detected with combination meter
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Perform trouble diagnosis relevant to DTC indicated.
3.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING BUZZER
Check Intelligent Key warning buzzer.
Refer to DLK-88, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
4.CHECK COMBINATION METER BUZZER
Check combination meter buzzer.
Refer to WCS-54, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
5.CHECK DOOR SWITCH
Check front door switch (driver side).
Refer to DLK-84, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
6.CHECK KEY WARNING LAMP
Check key warning lamp.
Refer to DLK-90, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
7.CHECK SHIFT P WARNING LAMP
Check shift P warning lamp.
Refer to DLK-97, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
8.REPLACE BCM
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END

Revision: 2012 July DLK-122 N17


P POSITION WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
A

DLK

Revision: 2012 July DLK-123 N17


ACC WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
ACC WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000006655137

1.CHECK DTC WITH BCM


Check that DTC is not detected with BCM
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Perform trouble diagnosis relevant to DTC indicated.
2.CHECK DTC WITH COMBINATION METER
Check that DTC is not detected with combination meter
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Perform trouble diagnosis relevant to DTC indicated.
3.CHECK COMBINATION METER BUZZER
Check combination meter buzzer.
Refer to WCS-54, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
4.REPLACE BCM
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".

Revision: 2012 July DLK-124 N17


TAKE AWAY WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
TAKE AWAY WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE
A
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000006655141

1.CHECK DTC WITH BCM B


Check that DTC is not detected with BCM
Is the inspection result normal?
C
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Perform trouble diagnosis relevant to DTC indicated.
2.CHECK DTC WITH COMBINATION METER D
Check that DTC is not detected with combination meter
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3. E
NO >> Perform trouble diagnosis relevant to DTC indicated.
3.CHECK INSIDE KEY ANTENNA
F
Check inside key antenna.
• Instrument center: Refer to DLK-57, "DTC Logic".
• Console: Refer to DLK-59, "DTC Logic".
• Trunk room: Refer to DLK-61, "DTC Logic". G
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. H
4.CHECK DOOR SWITCH
Check door switch. I
Refer to DLK-84, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5. J
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
5.CHECK COMBINATION METER BUZZER
Check combination meter buzzer. DLK
Refer to DLK-71, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
L
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
6.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING BUZZER M
Check Intelligent Key warning buzzer.
Refer to DLK-88, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal? N
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
7.CHECK KEY WARNING LAMP O
Check key warning lamp.
Refer to DLK-90, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal? P
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
8.REPLACE BCM
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.

Revision: 2012 July DLK-125 N17


TAKE AWAY WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
Is the result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".

Revision: 2012 July DLK-126 N17


INTELLIGENT KEY LOW BATTERY WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
INTELLIGENT KEY LOW BATTERY WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE
A
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000006655145

1.CHECK DTC WITH BCM B


Check that DTC is not detected with BCM
Is the inspection result normal?
C
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Perform trouble diagnosis relevant to DTC indicated.
2.CHECK DTC WITH COMBINATION METER D
Check that DTC is not detected with combination meter
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3. E
NO >> Perform trouble diagnosis relevant to DTC indicated.
3.CHECK “LO- BATT OF KEY FOB WARN” SETTING IN “WORK SUPPORT”
F
1. Select “INTELLIGENT KEY” of “BCM”.
2. Select “LO- BATT OF KEY FOB WARN” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
3. Check “LO- BATT OF KEY FOB WARN” setting in “WORK SUPPORT”.
Refer to DLK-42, "INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM - INTELLIGENT KEY)". G
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Set “ON” in “LO- BATT OF KEY FOB WARN”. H
4.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY
Check Intelligent key. I
Refer to DLK-87, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5. J
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
5.CHECK INSIDE KEY ANTENNA
Check inside key antenna. DLK
• Instrument center: Refer to DLK-57, "DTC Logic".
• Console: Refer to DLK-59, "DTC Logic".
• Trunk room: Refer to DLK-61, "DTC Logic". L
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. M
6.CHECK KEY WARNING LAMP
Check key warning lamp.
N
Refer to DLK-90, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 7. O
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
7.REPLACE BCM
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation". P
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".

Revision: 2012 July DLK-127 N17


DOOR LOCK OPERATION WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
DOOR LOCK OPERATION WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000006655146

1.CHECK DOOR LOCK FUNCTION


Check door lock function.
Does door lock/unlock using door request switch?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Refer to DLK-109, "Diagnosis Procedure".
2.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING BUZZER
Check Intelligent Key warning buzzer.
Refer to DLK-88, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
3.REPLACE BCM
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".

Revision: 2012 July DLK-128 N17


KEY ID WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
KEY ID WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE
A
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000006655150

1.CHECK DTC WITH BCM B


Check that DTC is not detected with BCM
Is the inspection result normal?
C
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Perform trouble diagnosis relevant to DTC indicated.
2.CHECK DTC WITH COMBINATION METER D
Check that DTC is not detected with combination meter
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3. E
NO >> Perform trouble diagnosis relevant to DTC indicated.
3.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY
F
Check Intelligent Key.
Refer to DLK-87, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
G
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
4.CHECK INSIDE KEY ANTENNA H
Check inside key antenna.
• Instrument center: Refer to DLK-57, "DTC Logic".
• Console: Refer to DLK-59, "DTC Logic". I
• Trunk room: Refer to DLK-61, "DTC Logic".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5. J
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
5.CHECK KEY WARNING LAMP
Check key warning lamp. DLK
Refer to DLK-90, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
L
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
6.REPLACE BCM M
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal? N
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
O

Revision: 2012 July DLK-129 N17


PANIC ALARM FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
PANIC ALARM FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000006655151

1.CHECK REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION


Check remote keyless entry function.
Does door lock/unlock with Intelligent Key button?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Refer to DLK-112, "Diagnosis Procedure".
2.CHECK HORN OPERATION
1. Select “IPDM E/R” using CONSULT.
2. Select “HORN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
3. Touch “On” to check that it works normally.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
3.CHECK “PANIC ALARM SET” SETTING IN “WORK SUPPORT”
1. Select “INTELLIGENT KEY” of “BCM”.
2. Select “PANIC ALARM SET” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
3. Check “PANIC ALARM SET” setting in “WORK SUPPORT”.
Refer to DLK-42, "INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM - INTELLIGENT KEY)".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Set “MODE 1” or “MODE 3” in “PANIC ALARM SET”
4.REPLACE BCM
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".

Revision: 2012 July DLK-130 N17


SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
A
Work Flow INFOID:0000000006655152

SBT842

G
CUSTOMER INTERVIEW
Interview the customer if possible, to determine the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. Use the Diag-
nostic Worksheet during the interview to document the facts and conditions when the noise occurs and any of H
the customer's comments; refer to DLK-135, "Diagnostic Worksheet". This information is necessary to dupli-
cate the conditions that exist when the noise occurs.
• The customer may not be able to provide a detailed description or the location of the noise. Attempt to obtain
all the facts and conditions that exist when the noise occurs (or does not occur). I
• If there is more than one noise in the vehicle, be sure to diagnose and repair the noise that the customer is
concerned about. This can be accomplished by a test drive with the customer.
• After identifying the type of noise, isolate the noise in terms of its characteristics. The noise characteristics J
are provided so the customer, service adviser and technician are all speaking the same language when
defining the noise.
• Squeak – (Like tennis shoes on a clean floor)
DLK
Squeak characteristics include the light contact/fast movement/brought on by road conditions/hard surfaces
= higher pitch noise/softer surfaces = lower pitch noises/edge to surface = chirping
• Creak – (Like walking on an old wooden floor)
Creak characteristics include firm contact/slow movement/twisting with a rotational movement/pitch depen- L
dent on materials/often brought on by activity.
• Rattle – (Like shaking a baby rattle)
Rattle characteristics include the fast repeated contact/vibration or similar movement/loose parts/missing M
clip or fastener/incorrect clearance.
• Knock – (Like a knock on a door)
Knock characteristics include hollow sounding/sometimes repeating/often brought on by driver action.
• Tick – (Like a clock second hand) N
Tick characteristics include gentle contacting of light materials/loose components/can be caused by driver
action or road conditions.
• Thump – (Heavy, muffled knock noise) O
Thump characteristics include softer knock/dead sound often brought on by activity.
• Buzz – (Like a bumble bee)
Buzz characteristics include high frequency rattle/firm contact.
• Often the degree of acceptable noise level will vary depending upon the person. A noise that you may judge P
as acceptable may be very irritating to the customer.
• Weather conditions, especially humidity and temperature, may have a great effect on noise level.
DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE
If possible, drive the vehicle with the customer until the noise is duplicated. Note any additional information on
the Diagnostic Worksheet regarding the conditions or location of the noise. This information can be used to
duplicate the same conditions when you confirm the repair.

Revision: 2012 July DLK-131 N17


SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
If the noise can be duplicated easily during the test drive, to help identify the source of the noise, try to dupli-
cate the noise with the vehicle stopped by doing one or all of the following:
1) Close a door.
2) Tap or push/pull around the area where the noise appears to be coming from.
3) Rev the engine.
4) Use a floor jack to recreate vehicle “twist”.
5) At idle, apply engine load (electrical load, half-clutch on M/T model, drive position on A/T model).
6) Raise the vehicle on a hoist and hit a tire with a rubber hammer.
• Drive the vehicle and attempt to duplicate the conditions the customer states exist when the noise occurs.
• If it is difficult to duplicate the noise, drive the vehicle slowly on an undulating or rough road to stress the
vehicle body.
LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE
1. Narrow down the noise to a general area. To help pinpoint the source of the noise, use a listening tool
(Engine Ear or mechanics stethoscope).
2. Narrow down the noise to a more specific area and identify the cause of the noise by:
• removing the components in the area that you suspect the noise is coming from.
Do not use too much force when removing clips and fasteners, otherwise clips and fastener can be broken
or lost during the repair, resulting in the creation of new noise.
• tapping or pushing/pulling the component that you suspect is causing the noise.
Do not tap or push/pull the component with excessive force, otherwise the noise will be eliminated only tem-
porarily.
• feeling for a vibration with your hand by touching the component(s) that you suspect is (are) causing the
noise.
• placing a piece of paper between components that you suspect are causing the noise.
• looking for loose components and contact marks.
Refer to DLK-133, "Inspection Procedure".
REPAIR THE CAUSE
• If the cause is a loose component, tighten the component securely.
• If the cause is insufficient clearance between components:
- separate components by repositioning or loosening and retightening the component, if possible.
- insulate components with a suitable insulator such as urethane pads, foam blocks, felt cloth tape or urethane
tape are available through your authorized Nissan Parts Department.
CAUTION:
Do not use excessive force as many components are constructed of plastic and may be damaged.
NOTE:
• URETHANE PADS
Insulates connectors, harness, etc.
• INSULATOR (Foam blocks)
Insulates components from contact. Can be used to fill space behind a panel.
• INSULATOR (Light foam block)
• FELT CLOTHTAPE
Used to insulate where movement does not occur. Ideal for instrument panel applications.
The following materials, not available through NISSAN Parts Department, can also be used to repair
squeaks and rattles.
• UHMW(TEFLON) TAPE
Insulates where slight movement is present. Ideal for instrument panel applications.
• SILICONE GREASE
Used in place of UHMW tape that will be visible or not fit.
Note: Will only last a few months.
• SILICONE SPRAY
Use when grease cannot be applied.
• DUCT TAPE
Use to eliminate movement.
CONFIRM THE REPAIR
Confirm that the cause of a noise is repaired by test driving the vehicle. Operate the vehicle under the same
conditions as when the noise originally occurred. Refer to the notes on the Diagnostic Worksheet.

Revision: 2012 July DLK-132 N17


SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
Inspection Procedure INFOID:0000000006655153

A
Refer to Table of Contents for specific component removal and installation information.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Most incidents are caused by contact and movement between: B
1. Cluster lid A and instrument panel
2. Acrylic lens and combination meter housing
C
3. Instrument panel to front pillar garnish
4. Instrument panel to windshield
5. Instrument panel mounting pins D
6. Wiring harnesses behind the combination meter
7. A/C defroster duct and duct joint
These incidents can usually be located by tapping or moving the components to duplicate the noise or by E
pressing on the components while driving to stop the noise. Most of these incidents can be repaired by apply-
ing felt cloth tape or silicon spray (in hard to reach areas). Urethane pads can be used to insulate wiring har-
ness.
F
CAUTION:
Do not use silicone spray to isolate a squeak or rattle. If you saturate the area with silicone, you will
not be able to recheck the repair.
G
CENTER CONSOLE
Components to pay attention to include:
1. Shifter assembly cover to finisher H
2. A/C control unit and cluster lid C
3. Wiring harnesses behind audio and A/C control unit
The instrument panel repair and isolation procedures also apply to the center console. I
DOORS
Pay attention to the:
J
1. Finisher and inner panel making a slapping noise
2. Inside handle escutcheon to door finisher
3. Wiring harnesses tapping
DLK
4. Door striker out of alignment causing a popping noise on starts and stops
Tapping or moving the components or pressing on them while driving to duplicate the conditions can isolate
many of these incidents. You can usually insulate the areas with felt cloth tape or insulator foam blocks to L
repair the noise.
TRUNK
Trunk noises are often caused by a loose jack or loose items put into the trunk by the owner. M
In addition look for:
1. Trunk lid dumpers out of adjustment
2. Trunk lid striker out of adjustment N
3. Trunk lid torsion bars knocking together
4. A loose license plate or bracket
Most of these incidents can be repaired by adjusting, securing or insulating the item(s) or component(s) caus- O
ing the noise.
SUNROOF/HEADLINING
Noises in the sunroof/headlining area can often be traced to one of the following: P
1. Sunroof lid, rail, linkage or seals making a rattle or light knocking noise
2. Sunvisor shaft shaking in the holder
3. Front or rear windshield touching headlining and squeaking
Again, pressing on the components to stop the noise while duplicating the conditions can isolate most of these
incidents. Repairs usually consist of insulating with felt cloth tape.

Revision: 2012 July DLK-133 N17


SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
SEATS
When isolating seat noise it is important to note the position the seat is in and the load placed on the seat
when the noise is present. These conditions should be duplicated when verifying and isolating the cause of
the noise.
Cause of seat noise include:
1. Headrest rods and holder
2. A squeak between the seat pad cushion and frame
3. Rear seatback lock and bracket
These noises can be isolated by moving or pressing on the suspected components while duplicating the con-
ditions under which the noise occurs. Most of these incidents can be repaired by repositioning the component
or applying urethane tape to the contact area.
UNDERHOOD
Some interior noise may be caused by components under the hood or on the engine wall. The noise is then
transmitted into the passenger compartment.
Causes of transmitted underhood noise include:
1. Any component mounted to the engine wall
2. Components that pass through the engine wall
3. Engine wall mounts and connectors
4. Loose radiator mounting pins
5. Hood bumpers out of adjustment
6. Hood striker out of adjustment
These noises can be difficult to isolate since they cannot be reached from the interior of the vehicle. The best
method is to secure, move or insulate one component at a time and test drive the vehicle. Also, engine RPM
or load can be changed to isolate the noise. Repairs can usually be made by moving, adjusting, securing, or
insulating the component causing the noise.

Revision: 2012 July DLK-134 N17


SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
Diagnostic Worksheet INFOID:0000000006655154

DLK

PIIB8740E
P

Revision: 2012 July DLK-135 N17


SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

PIIB8742E

Revision: 2012 July DLK-136 N17


HOOD
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION A


HOOD
Exploded View INFOID:0000000006655155
B

JMKIA8148ZZ J

1. Hood assembly 2. Hood bumper rubber 3. Hood bumper rubber


4. Hood hinge LH 5. Grommet 6. Hood hinge RH
DLK
7. Hood support rod 8. Clamp
: Body grease
L
HOOD ASSEMBLY
HOOD ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000006655156

M
CAUTION:
• Operate with two workers, because of its heavy weight.
• Use protective tape or shop cloth to protect from damage during removal and installation.
N
REMOVAL
1. Support hood assembly with the proper material to prevent it from falling.
WARNING: O
Injury may occur if hood assembly is not supported with appropriate material when removing
hood assembly.
2. Remove hood hinge mounting nuts on the hood to remove the hood assembly. P
INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and then install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• After installation, apply touch-up paint (the body color) onto the heads of hood hinge mounting bolts
and nuts.
• After installing, perform hood fitting adjustment. Refer to DLK-138, "HOOD ASSEMBLY : Adjust-
ment".

Revision: 2012 July DLK-137 N17


HOOD
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
HOOD ASSEMBLY : Adjustment INFOID:0000000006655157

JMKIA8145GB

1. Hood assembly 2. Hood bumper rubber 3. Hood hinge


4. Hood lock assembly 5. Front bumper fascia 6. Front combination lamp
7. Front fender
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

: Body grease

Check the clearance and the surface height between hood and each part by visually and touching.
If the clearance and the surface height are out of specification, adjust them according to the procedures
shown below.
Unit: mm [in]
Difference
Portion Standard (RH/LH,
MAX)
Hood – Front bumper D Clearance 1.9 – 6.9 [0.075 – 0.272] —
A–A
fascia E Surface height (−2.5) – (+1.5) [(−0.098) – (+0.059)] < 3.0 [0.118]
Front combination F Clearance 1.9 – 6.1 [0.075 – 0.240] < 2.5 [0.098]
B–B
lamp – Hood G Surface height (−1.3) – (+2.7) [(−0.051) – (+0.106)] < 2.0 [0.079]

Revision: 2012 July DLK-138 N17


HOOD
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

Difference
Portion Standard (RH/LH, A
MAX)
H Clearance 2.5 – 4.5 [0.098 – 0.177] < 1.5 [0.059]
Hood – Front fender C–C B
I Surface height (−1.0) – (+1.0) [(−0.039) – (+0.039)] < 1.5 [0.059]

FITTING ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE


C
1. Remove hood lock assembly, and then adjust the surface height of hood assembly, front fender assembly,
and front combination lamp according to the specified value, by rotating hood bumper rubber (body side).
2. Position hood lock assembly (1) and engage primary striker (2). D
Check hood lock assembly and primary striker for looseness.

JMKIA7992ZZ
G
3. Move hood lock assembly laterally until the center of primary striker and hood lock assembly are vertical
when viewed from the front.
H
4. After adjustment, tighten lock bolts to the specified torque.
5. Rotate bumper rubber (body side) 2/8 of a rotation counterclockwise in upward direction.
CAUTION:
If any looseness is felt in hood striker or hood lock assembly, rotate bumper rubber (body side) I
more than 1/8 of a rotation.
6. Check that secondary latch (1) is securely engaged with sec-
ondary striker (2) from the dead load of the hood assembly. J

DLK

JMKIA7993ZZ
M
7. Check that primary latch (1) is securely engaged with primary
striker (2) when hood assembly is closed [free-fall from approxi-
mately 200 mm (7.874 in) height]. N
CAUTION:
Never free-fall hood assembly from a height of 300 mm
(11.811 in) or more.
O

P
JMKIA7994ZZ

8. Close hood assembly with a static closing force of 300 – 490 N (30.6 – 50.0 kg, 67.4 – 110 lb).
HOOD HINGE

Revision: 2012 July DLK-139 N17


HOOD
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
HOOD HINGE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000006655158

REMOVAL
1. Remove hood assembly. Refer to DLK-137, "HOOD ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation".
2. Remove hood support rod, and then remove grommet. Refer to DLK-140, "HOOD SUPPORT ROD :
Removal and Installation".
3. Remove front fender. Refer to DLK-151, "FRONT FENDER : Removal and Installation".
4. Remove hood hinge mounting bolts, and then remove hood hinge.
INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and then install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• After installation, apply touch-up paint (the body color) onto the head of the hinge mounting bolts
and nuts.
• After installation, perform hood fitting adjustment. Refer to DLK-138, "HOOD ASSEMBLY : Adjust-
ment".
• Check hood hinge rotating part for poor lubrication. If neces-
sary, apply grease.

: Body grease

JMKIA7995ZZ

HOOD SUPPORT ROD


HOOD SUPPORT ROD : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000006655160

REMOVAL
1. Support hood assembly with a suitable material to prevent it from falling.
WARNING:
Injury may occur if hood assembly is not supported with appropriate material when removing
hood assembly.
2. Pull hood support rod from grommet and remove.
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: 2012 July DLK-140 N17


RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT
A
HR12DE
HR12DE : Exploded View INFOID:0000000007792156
B
Except for Hong Kong Models

JMKIA9320ZZ DLK

1. Radiator upper seal 2. Condenser side seal 3. Radiator side seal RH


4. Radiator side seal LH 5. Radiator core support lower 6. Radiator core support upper
L

Revision: 2012 July DLK-141 N17


RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
For Hong Kong Models

JMKIA9576ZZ

1. Radiator upper seal 2. Condenser side seal 3. Radiator side seal RH


4. Radiator side seal LH 5. Radiator core support lower 6. Radiator core support upper

HR12DE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007792157

RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT UPPER


Removal
1. Remove ground harness mounting bolt (A).

JMKIA9332ZZ

2. Remove washer tank inlet. Refer to WW-51, "Removal and Installation".


3. Remove horn. Refer to HRN-4, "Removal and Installation".
4. Remove radiator upper seal fixing clips.
5. Remove upper fixing clips of radiator side seal LH and RH.
6. Remove hood lock bell crank. Refer to DLK-173, "HOOD LOCK BELL CRANK : Removal and Installa-
tion".

Revision: 2012 July DLK-142 N17


RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
7. Remove hood lock assembly and hood lock control cable assembly fixing clip. Refer to DLK-170, "HOOD
LOCK : Removal and Installation" and DLK-171, "HOOD LOCK CONTROL CABLE : Removal and Instal- A
lation".
8. Remove crash zone sensor. Refer to SR-25, "Removal and Installation".
9. Remove radiator reservoir tank mounting bolt (A). B

JMKIA9333ZZ E

10. Disconnect all harness fixing clips.


11. Remove front bumper fascia upper side fixing clips (A). F

JMKIA9334ZZ I

12. Remove radiator core support upper mounting bolts.


13. Pull back upper part of front bumper fascia (1). J
14. Remove radiator core support upper (2) by pulling it out toward
the vehicle upper side.
DLK

JMKIA9335ZZ M

Installation
Note the following item, and then install in the reverse order of removal.
N
CAUTION:
Tighten the following bolts or nuts to the specified torque.
• Radiator reservoir tank mounting bolt: Refer to CO-16, "Exploded View".
O
RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT LOWER
Removal
1. Remove apron bracket assembly. Refer to EXT-14, "APRON BRACKET ASSEMBLY : Removal and P
Installation".
2. Remove fender protector LH and RH. Refer to EXT-22, "FENDER PROTECTOR : Removal and Installa-
tion".
3. Remove lower fixing clips of condenser side seal.
4. Remove lower fixing clips of radiator side seal LH and RH.

Revision: 2012 July DLK-143 N17


RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
5. Remove front bumper fascia upper side fixing clips (A).

JMKIA9334ZZ

6. Remove radiator upper seal fixing clips.


7. Move the front bumper upper side and radiator upper seal toward vehicle front.
8. Use a belts (A) to suspend it to prevent it from falling.
CAUTION:
Never damage radiator and condenser.

JMKIA8030ZZ

9. Remove mounting bolts, and then remove radiator core support lower.
Installation
Install in the reverse order of removal.
HR15DE

Revision: 2012 July DLK-144 N17


RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
HR15DE : Exploded View INFOID:0000000006655163

DLK

JMKIA9397ZZ

L
1. Radiator upper seal 2. Condenser side seal 3. Radiator side seal RH
(Models with bumper reinforcement
lower)
M
4. Radiator side seal LH 5. Radiator core support lower 6. Radiator core support upper
(Models with bumper reinforcement
lower)
7. Radiator side seal RH 8. Radiator side seal LH N
(Models without bumper reinforce- (Models without bumper reinforce-
ment lower) ment lower)
A. China production models * B. India production models *
O
NOTE:
*: For production models, refer to GI-34, "Information About Identification or Model Code".
P
HR15DE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000006655164

RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT UPPER


Removal

Revision: 2012 July DLK-145 N17


RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
1. Remove ground harness mounting bolt (A).
CAUTION:
Location of ground harness mounting bolt differs depend-
ing on production country.
Write a short note describe location before starting opera-
tion.

JMKIA8026ZZ

2. Remove horn. Refer to HRN-4, "Removal and Installation".


3. Remove radiator upper seal fixing clips.
4. Remove upper fixing clips of radiator side seal LH and RH.
5. Remove hood lock bell crank. Refer to DLK-173, "HOOD LOCK BELL CRANK : Removal and Installa-
tion".
6. Remove hood lock assembly and hood lock control cable assembly fixing clip. Refer to DLK-170, "HOOD
LOCK : Removal and Installation" and DLK-171, "HOOD LOCK CONTROL CABLE : Removal and Instal-
lation".
7. Remove crash zone sensor (if equipped). Refer to SR-25, "Removal and Installation".
8. Remove radiator cap adapter bracket mounting bolt (A) and
radiator reservoir tank mounting bolt (B).

JMKIA8027ZZ

9. Disconnect all harness fixing clips.


10. Remove front bumper fascia upper side fixing clips (A).

JMKIA8028ZZ

11. Remove radiator core support upper mounting bolts.


12. Pull back upper part of front bumper fascia (1).
13. Remove radiator core support upper (2) by pulling it out toward
the vehicle upper side.

JMKIA8029ZZ

Revision: 2012 July DLK-146 N17


RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

Installation
A
Note the following item, and then install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Tighten the following bolts or nuts to the specified torque.
• Radiator cap adapter bracket mounting bolt and radiator reservoir tank mounting bolt: Refer to CO- B
43, "Exploded View".
RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT LOWER
C
Removal
1. Remove apron bracket assembly. Refer to EXT-14, "APRON BRACKET ASSEMBLY : Removal and
Installation". D
2. Remove fender protector LH and RH. Refer to EXT-22, "FENDER PROTECTOR : Removal and Installa-
tion".
3. Remove bumper reinforcement lower (if equipped). Refer to EXT-11, "Exploded View". E
4. Remove lower fixing clips of condenser side seal.
5. Remove lower fixing clips of radiator side seal LH and RH.
6. Remove front bumper fascia upper side fixing clips (A). F

JMKIA8028ZZ I

7. Move the front bumper upper side and radiator upper seal toward vehicle front.
8. Remove radiator upper seal fixing clips. J
9. Use a belts (A) to suspend it to prevent it from falling.
CAUTION:
Never damage radiator and condenser. DLK

M
JMKIA8030ZZ

10. Remove mounting bolts, and then remove radiator core support lower. N
Installation
Install in the reverse order of removal.
K9K O

Revision: 2012 July DLK-147 N17


RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
K9K : Exploded View INFOID:0000000007869868

JMKIA9398ZZ

1. Radiator upper seal 2. Condenser side seal 3. Radiator side seal RH


4. Radiator side seal LH 5. Radiator core support lower 6. Radiator core support upper

K9K : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007869869

RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT UPPER


Removal
1. Remove ground harness mounting bolt (A).

JMKIA9413ZZ

2. Remove horn. Refer to HRN-4, "Removal and Installation".


3. Remove radiator upper seal fixing clips.
4. Remove upper fixing clips of radiator side seal LH and RH.
5. Remove hood lock bell crank. Refer to DLK-173, "HOOD LOCK BELL CRANK : Removal and Installa-
tion".

Revision: 2012 July DLK-148 N17


RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
6. Remove hood lock assembly and hood lock control cable assembly fixing clip. Refer to DLK-170, "HOOD
LOCK : Removal and Installation" and DLK-171, "HOOD LOCK CONTROL CABLE : Removal and Instal- A
lation".
7. Remove mounting bolts (A) of radiator reservoir tank.
B

JMKIA9414ZZ

E
8. Disconnect all harness fixing clips.
9. Remove front bumper fascia upper side fixing clips (A).
F

JMKIA9415ZZ

I
10. Remove radiator core support upper mounting bolts.
11. Pull back upper part of front bumper fascia (1).
12. Remove radiator core support upper (2) by pulling it out toward J
the vehicle upper side.

DLK

JMKIA9416ZZ

M
Installation
Note the following item, and then install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Tighten the following bolts or nuts to the specified torque. N
• Radiator reservoir tank mounting bolt: Refer to EM-405, "Exploded View".
RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT LOWER
O
Removal
1. Remove apron bracket assembly. Refer to EXT-14, "APRON BRACKET ASSEMBLY : Removal and
Installation". P
2. Remove fender protector LH and RH. Refer to EXT-22, "FENDER PROTECTOR : Removal and Installa-
tion".
3. Remove lower fixing clips of condenser side seal.
4. Remove lower fixing clips of radiator side seal LH and RH.

Revision: 2012 July DLK-149 N17


RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
5. Remove front bumper fascia upper side fixing clips (A).

JMKIA9415ZZ

6. Move the front bumper upper side and radiator upper seal toward vehicle front.
7. Remove radiator upper seal fixing clips.
8. Use a belts (A) to suspend it to prevent it from falling.
CAUTION:
Never damage radiator and condenser.

JMKIA8030ZZ

9. Remove lower mounting nut (A) of charge air cooler bracket


(lower).

: Vehicle front

JMKIA6473ZZ

10. Remove mounting bolts, and then remove radiator core support lower.
Installation
Note the following item, and then install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Tighten the following bolts or nuts to the specified torque.
• Lower mounting nut of charge air cooler bracket (lower): Refer to EM-405, "Exploded View".

Revision: 2012 July DLK-150 N17


FRONT FENDER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
FRONT FENDER
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000006655165

G
JMKIA9321ZZ

1. Front fender cover 2. Front fender seal 3. Front fender upper insulator
(If equipped) (If equipped) H
4. Front fender assembly 5. Front fender stiffener
: Pawl
I
: Vehicle front

FRONT FENDER
J
FRONT FENDER : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000006655166

CAUTION: DLK
Use a shop cloth to protect the body from being damaged during removal and installation.
REMOVAL
1. Remove fender protector. Refer to EXT-22, "FENDER PROTECTOR : Removal and Installation". L
2. Remove front bumper fascia and bumper side bracket. Refer to EXT-13, "FRONT BUMPER : Removal
and Installation".
3. Remove front combination lamp. Refer toEXL-86, "Removal and Installation". M
4. Remove side turn signal lamp. Refer to EXL-91, "Removal and Installation".
5. Remove front door corner finisher. Refer to MIR-22, "FRONT DOOR CORNER FINISHER : Removal and
Installation". N
6. Remove front fender cover. DLK-152, "FENDER COVER : Removal and Installation".
7. Remove mounting bolts of front fender assembly.
O
8. Remove front fender stiffener (2) from the vehicle body while
carefully pulling upper portion of front fender (1) toward vehicle
outside.
P
: Vehicle front

JMKIA5633ZZ

Revision: 2012 July DLK-151 N17


FRONT FENDER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
9. Remove front fender assembly.
CAUTION:
An viscous urethane foam is installed on the back surface of front fender. When removing the
front fender, be careful to not deform the front fender while performing the procedure and remov-
ing the viscous urethane foam a little at a time.
INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• After installation, apply the touch-up paint (the body color) onto the head of front fender mounting
bolts.
• After installation, adjust the following part.
- Hood assembly: Refer to DLK-138, "HOOD ASSEMBLY : Adjustment".
- Front door: Refer to DLK-155, "DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment".
FENDER COVER
FENDER COVER : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000006922645

REMOVAL
1. Fully open hood assembly.
2. Disengage fixing pawls, and then remove front fender cover.
CAUTION:
When performing the procedure after removing fender
cover, protect the lower of windshield glass with urethane
etc.

: Pawl

JMKIA8031ZZ

INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and then install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• For installation, engage pawls to front fender and cowl top
cover in numerical order as shown in the figure.
• Install so that there is no clearance between windshield and
cowl top cover.

JMKIA8032ZZ

Revision: 2012 July DLK-152 N17


FRONT DOOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
FRONT DOOR
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000006655167

I
JMKIA9322GB

1. Front door panel 2. Grommet 3. TORX bolt J


4. Door striker 5. Bumper rubber 6. Sealing screen
(If equipped)
7. Door check link 8. Door hinge (lower) 9. Door hinge (upper)
DLK
10. Grommet (driver side only)
: Always replace after every disassembly.

: N·m (kg-m, in-lb) L

: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

: Body grease M

DOOR ASSEMBLY
N
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000006655168

CAUTION:
• Perform work with 2 workers, because of its heavy weight. O
• When removing and installing front door assembly, support door with a jack and shop cloth to pro-
tect door and body.
REMOVAL P

Revision: 2012 July DLK-153 N17


FRONT DOOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
1. Remove front door harness grommet (1), and then pull out the
harness from the vehicle (2).

JMKIA8070ZZ

2. Disconnect front door harness connectors (A).

JMKIA8071ZZ

3. Remove mounting bolts of door check link on the vehicle.


4. Remove door hinge mounting nuts (door side), and then remove door assembly.
INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Apply anticorrosive agent onto the mounting surface.
• Check front door open/close, lock/unlock operation after installation.
• Check door hinge rotating part for poor lubrication. If necessary, apply body grease.
• After installation, perform the fitting adjustment. Refer to DLK-155, "DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjust-
ment".
• After installation, apply touch-up paint (the body color) onto the head of door hinge mounting nuts.

Revision: 2012 July DLK-154 N17


FRONT DOOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment INFOID:0000000006655169

DLK

JMKIA8146GB

L
1. Front fender 2. Front door 3. Rear door
4. Body side outer 5. Door striker 6. TORX bolt
7. Front door hinge 8. Rear door hinge (upper) 9. Rear door hinge (lower) M
: Always replace after every disassembly.

: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)


N
: Body grease

Check the clearance and surface height between front door and each part by visually and touching.
If the clearance and the surface height are out of specification, adjust them according to the procedures O
shown below.
Unit: mm [in]
Portion Clearance Surface height P
Front fender – Front door A–A 3.6 – 5.6 [0.142 – 0.220] (−1.0) – (+1.0) [(−0.039) – (+0.039)]
Front door – Rear door B–B 3.6 – 5.6 [0.142 – 0.220] (−1.0) – (+1.0) [(−0.039) – (+0.039)]

FITTING ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE


1. Remove fender protector. Refer to EXT-22, "FENDER PROTECTOR : Removal and Installation".

Revision: 2012 July DLK-155 N17


FRONT DOOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
2. Remove front fender (Diesel engine models only). Refer to DLK-151, "FRONT FENDER : Removal and
Installation".
3. Loosen door hinge mounting nuts on door side.
4. Adjust the surface height of front door according to the fitting standard dimension.
5. Temporarily tighten door hinge mounting nuts on door side.
6. Loosen door hinge mounting bolts on body side.
7. Raise front door at rear end to adjust clearance of the front door according to the fitting standard dimen-
sion.
8. After adjustment tighten bolts and nuts to the specified torque.
CAUTION:
• After installation, apply touch-up paint (the body color) onto the head of hinge mounting bolts
and nuts.
• Check door hinge rotating part for poor lubrication. If necessary, apply body grease.
9. Install front fender (Diesel engine models only). Refer to refer to DLK-151, "FRONT FENDER : Removal
and Installation".
10. Install fender protector. Refer to refer to EXT-22, "FENDER PROTECTOR : Removal and Installation".
DOOR STRIKER ADJUSTMENT
Adjust door striker so that it becomes parallel with door lock insertion direction.
DOOR STRIKER
DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000006655170

REMOVAL
Remove TORX bolts, and then remove door striker.
INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Check front door open/close, lock/unlock operation after installation.
• After installation, be sure to perform the fitting adjustment. Refer to DLK-155, "DOOR ASSEMBLY :
Adjustment".
DOOR HINGE
DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000006655171

REMOVAL
CAUTION:
• Perform work with 2 workers, because of its heavy weight.
• When removing and installing front door assembly, support door with a jack and shop cloth to pro-
tect door and body.
1. Remove fender protector. Refer to EXT-22, "FENDER PROTECTOR : Removal and Installation".
2. Remove front fender (Diesel engine models only). Refer to DLK-151, "FRONT FENDER : Removal and
Installation".
3. Remove front door assembly. Refer to DLK-153, "DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation".
4. Remove front door hinge mounting bolts (body side), and then remove front door hinge.
INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Apply anticorrosive agent onto the mounting surface.
• Check door hinge rotating part for poor lubrication. If necessary, apply body grease.
• After installation, perform the fitting adjustment. Refer to DLK-155, "DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjust-
ment".
• After installation, apply touch-up paint (the body color) onto the head of door hinge mounting nuts.

Revision: 2012 July DLK-156 N17


FRONT DOOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
• Check door hinge rotating part for poor lubrication. If neces-
sary, apply body grease. A

: Body grease
B

JMKIA8072ZZ

D
DOOR CHECK LINK
DOOR CHECK LINK : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000006655172

E
REMOVAL
1. Fully close the front door window.
F
2. Remove front door finisher. Refer to INT-13, "POWER WINDOW MODELS : Removal and Installation".
3. Disconnect harness connector of front door speaker.
4. Remove mounting bolts of front door speaker, and then remove front door speaker. G
5. Remove mounting bolt of door check link on door panel.
6. Remove mounting bolts of door check link on the vehicle.
7. Take door check link (1) out from the hole of door panel (2). H

JMKIA8073ZZ DLK
INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: L
• Check rear door open/close operation after installation.
• Check door check link rotating part for poor lubrication. If
necessary, apply grease. M

: Body grease

JMKIA8074ZZ

Revision: 2012 July DLK-157 N17


REAR DOOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
REAR DOOR
Exploded View INFOID:0000000006655173

JMKIA8153GB

1. Rear door panel 2. Grommet 3. TORX bolt


4. Door striker 5. Bumper rubber 6. Sealing screen
(If equipped)
7. Door check link 8. Door hinge (lower) 9. Door hinge (upper)
: Always replace after every disassembly.

: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)

: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

: Body grease

DOOR ASSEMBLY
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000006655174

CAUTION:
• Perform work with 2 workers, because of it’s heavy weight.
• When removing and installing rear door assembly, support door with a jack and shop cloth to pro-
tect door and body.
REMOVAL

Revision: 2012 July DLK-158 N17


REAR DOOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
1. Remove rear door harness grommet (1) from body side outer
(2), and then pull out rear door harness. A

JMKIA8083ZZ

D
2. Disconnect rear door harness connector (A).

G
JMKIA8084ZZ

3. Remove mounting bolts of door check link on the vehicle.


H
4. Remove door hinge mounting nuts (door side), and then remove rear door assembly.
INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal. I
CAUTION:
• Apply anticorrosive agent onto the mounting surface.
• Check rear door open/close, lock/unlock operation after installation. J
• Check door hinge rotating part for poor lubrication. If necessary, apply body grease.
• After installation, perform the fitting adjustment. Refer to DLK-160, "DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjust-
ment".
• After installation, apply touch-up paint (the body color) onto the head of door hinge mounting nuts. DLK

Revision: 2012 July DLK-159 N17


REAR DOOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment INFOID:0000000006655175

JMKIA8146GB

1. Front fender 2. Front door 3. Rear door


4. Body side outer 5. Door striker 6. TORX bolt
7. Front door hinge 8. Rear door hinge (upper) 9. Rear door hinge (lower)
: Always replace after every disassembly.

: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

: Body grease

Check the clearance and surface height between rear door and each part by visually and touching.
If the clearance and the surface height are out of specification, adjust them according to the procedures
shown below.
Unit: mm [in]
Portion Clearance Surface height
Front door – Rear door B–B 3.6 – 5.6 [0.142 – 0.220] (−1.0) – (+1.0) [(−0.039) – (+0.039)]
Rear door – Body side outer C – C 3.6 – 5.6 [0.142 – 0.220] (−1.0) – (+1.0) [(−0.039) – (+0.039)]

FITTING ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE


1. Remove center pillar lower garnish. Refer to INT-27, "CENTER PILLAR LOWER GARNISH : Removal
and Installation".

Revision: 2012 July DLK-160 N17


REAR DOOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
2. Loosen door hinge mounting nuts on door side.
3. Adjust the surface height of rear door according to the fitting standard dimension. A
4. Temporarily tighten door hinge mounting nuts on door side.
5. Loosen door hinge mounting nuts and bolts on body side.
B
6. Raise rear door at rear end to adjust clearance of rear door according to the fitting standard dimension.
7. After adjustment tighten bolts and nuts to the specified torque.
CAUTION:
• After installation, apply touch-up paint (the body color) onto the head of hinge mounting bolts C
and nuts.
• Check door hinge rotating part for poor lubrication. If necessary, apply body grease.
8. Install center pillar lower garnish. Refer to INT-27, "CENTER PILLAR LOWER GARNISH : Removal and D
Installation".
DOOR STRIKER ADJUSTMENT
Adjust door striker so that it becomes parallel with door lock insertion direction. E
DOOR STRIKER
DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000006655176 F

REMOVAL
Remove TORX bolts, and then remove door striker. G
INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: H
• Check rear door open/close, lock/unlock operation after installation.
• After installation, be sure to perform the fitting adjustment. Refer to DLK-160, "DOOR ASSEMBLY :
Adjustment". I
DOOR HINGE
DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000006655177
J
CAUTION:
• Perform work with 2 workers, because of it’s heavy weight.
• When removing and installing rear door assembly, support door with a jack and shop cloth to pro- DLK
tect door and body.
REMOVAL
L
1. Remove rear door assembly. Refer to DLK-158, "DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation".
2. Remove center pillar lower garnish. Refer to INT-27, "CENTER PILLAR LOWER GARNISH : Removal
and Installation".
M
3. Remove rear door hinge mounting bolts and nuts (body side), and then remove door hinge.
INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal. N
CAUTION:
• Apply anticorrosive agent onto the mounting surface.
• Check rear door open/close operation after installation.
• When removing and installing rear door assembly, perform the fitting adjustment. Refer to DLK-160, O
"DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment".
• After installing, apply the touch-up paint (the body color) onto the head of door hinge mounting nuts.
P

Revision: 2012 July DLK-161 N17


REAR DOOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
• Check door hinge rotating part for poor lubrication. If neces-
sary, apply body grease.

: Body grease

JMKIA8072ZZ

DOOR CHECK LINK


DOOR CHECK LINK : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000006655178

REMOVAL
1. Fully close the rear door window.
2. Remove rear door finisher. Refer to INT-18, "POWER WINDOW MODELS : Removal and Installation".
3. Disconnect harness connector of rear door speaker.
4. Remove mounting bolts of rear door speaker, and then remove rear door speaker.
5. Remove mounting bolts of check link on door panel.
6. Remove mounting bolt of check link on the vehicle.
7. Take door check link (1) out from the hole of door panel (2).

JMKIA8085ZZ

INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Check rear door open/close operation after installation.
• Check door check link rotating part for poor lubrication. If
necessary, apply grease.

: Body grease

JMKIA8074ZZ

Revision: 2012 July DLK-162 N17


TRUNK LID
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
TRUNK LID
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000006892099

J
JMKIA8154ZZ

1. Trunk lid weather-strip 2. Torsion bar clip 3. Torsion bar RH DLK


4. Torsion bar LH 5. Trunk lid hinge 6. Bumper rubber
7. Trunk lid striker 8. Trunk lid assembly
A : Center mark L
B : Seam
: Body grease
M
TRUNK LID ASSEMBLY
TRUNK LID ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000006892100
N
CAUTION:
Operate with two workers, because of its heavy weight.
O
REMOVAL
1. Remove trunk lid finisher inner (if equipped). Refer to INT-42, "Removal and Installation".
2. Disconnect license plate lamp harness connector. Refer to EXL-99, "Removal and Installation". P
3. Disconnect trunk lid opener switch harness connector. Refer to DLK-196, "Removal and Installation".
4. Remove harness fixing clips from trunk lid assembly, and then pull out harness from trunk lid assembly.
NOTE:
Write a short note to describe the fixing clips positions.
5. Remove the trunk lid hinge mounting bolts on trunk lid side and remove the trunk lid assembly.
INSTALLATION

Revision: 2012 July DLK-163 N17


TRUNK LID
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• After installing, apply touch-up paint (the body color) onto the head of the hinge mounting bolts.
• Check trunk lid open/close, lock/unlock operation after installation.
• After installation, perform fitting adjustment. Refer to DLK-164, "TRUNK LID ASSEMBLY : Adjust-
ment".
TRUNK LID ASSEMBLY : Adjustment INFOID:0000000006892101

JMKIA8147GB

1. Trunk lid assembly 2. Trunk lid hinge 3. Trunk lid striker


4. Body side outer 5. Rear combination lamp 6. Rear bumper fascia
: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)

: Body grease

Check the clearance and surface height between trunk lid and each part by visually and touching.
If the clearance and surface height are out of specification, adjust them according to the procedures shown
below.

Revision: 2012 July DLK-164 N17


TRUNK LID
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
Unit: mm [in]
Difference A
Portion Standard (RH/LH,
MAX)
E Clearance 2.5 – 4.5 [0.098 – 0.177] < 1.5 [0.059] B
A–A
Trunk lid – Body F Surface height (−1.0) – (+1.0) [(−0.039) – (+0.039)] < 1.5 [0.059]
side outer G Clearance 2.5 – 4.5 [0.098 – 0.177] < 1.5 [0.059] C
B–B
H Surface height (−1.5) – (+0.5) [(−0.059) – (+0.020)] < 1.5 [0.059]
Trunk lid – Rear I Clearance 2.6 – 6.4 [0.102 – 0.252] < 2.9 [0.114]
C–C D
combination lamp J Surface height (−1.35) – (+2.85) [(−0.053) – (+0.112)] < 3.0 [0.118]
Trunk lid – Rear
D–D K Clearance 5.0 – 9.0 [0.197 – 0.354] — E
bumper fascia
1. Loosen trunk lid hinge mounting bolts (trunk lid side).
2. Remove trunk rear plate. Refer to INT-39, "TRUNK REAR PLATE : Removal and Installation". F
3. Loosen trunk lid striker mounting bolts.
4. Lift up trunk lid approximately 100 – 150 mm (3.937 – 5.906 in) height then close it lightly and check that it
is engaged firmly with trunk lid closed. G
5. Check the clearance and surface height.
6. Finally tighten trunk lid hinge and trunk lid striker.
7. Install trunk rear plate. Refer to INT-39, "TRUNK REAR PLATE : Removal and Installation". H
TRUNK LID STRIKER ADJUSTMENT
Adjust trunk lid striker so that it becomes parallel with trunk lid lock insertion direction.
I
TRUNK LID STRIKER
TRUNK LID STRIKER : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000006892102

J
REMOVAL
1. Remove trunk rear plate. Refer to INT-39, "TRUNK REAR PLATE : Removal and Installation".
DLK
2. Remove trunk lid opener cable mounting bolt (A) and trunk lid
striker mounting bolts (B).

N
JMKIA8124ZZ

3. Pull out trunk lid striker (1), and then disconnect trunk lid opener
cable (2) from trunk lid striker. O

JMKIA8125ZZ

INSTALLATION

Revision: 2012 July DLK-165 N17


TRUNK LID
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Check trunk lid open/close, lock/unlock operation after installation.
• Check that trunk lid opener cables are normally engaged with trunk lid striker.
• When removing and installing trunk lid striker, perform the fitting adjustment. Refer to DLK-164,
"TRUNK LID ASSEMBLY : Adjustment".
TRUNK LID HINGE
TRUNK LID HINGE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000006892103

REMOVAL
1. Remove harness fixing clips (A) from trunk lid hinge RH (1).

JMKIA8126ZZ

2. Remove trunk lid assembly. Refer to DLK-163, "TRUNK LID ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation".
3. Remove torsion bar. Refer to DLK-166, "TORSION BAR : Removal and Installation".
4. Remove rear parcel shelf finisher. Refer to INT-30, "REAR PARCEL SHELF FINISHER : Removal and
Installation".
5. Remove trunk lid hinge mounting bolts (body side), and then remove trunk lid hinge.
INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Check trunk lid open/close, lock/unlock operation after installation.
• When removing and installing trunk lid assembly, perform the fitting adjustment. Refer to DLK-164,
"TRUNK LID ASSEMBLY : Adjustment".
• After installation, apply touch-up paint (the body color) onto the head of trunk lid hinge mounting
bolts.
• Check trunk lid hinge rotating part for poor lubrication. If necessary, apply body grease.

: Body grease

JMKIA8127ZZ

TORSION BAR
TORSION BAR : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000006892104

REMOVAL
1. Remove torsion bar clamp.
2. Support trunk lid with the proper material to prevent it from falling.
WARNING:

Revision: 2012 July DLK-166 N17


TRUNK LID
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
Bodily injury may occur if no supporting rod is holding the trunk lid open when removing the trunk
lid stay. A
3. Set a torsion bar wrench (A) to torsion bar (1), and lift torsion bar
to remove it.
B

D
JMKIA8128ZZ

NOTE: E
For torsion bar wrench, refer to the figure.

H
PIIB3774J

INSTALLATION
I
Note the following item, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Check trunk lid open/close operation after installation.
TRUNK LID WEATHER-STRIP J

TRUNK LID WEATHER-STRIP : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000006892106

DLK
REMOVAL
Pull up and remove engagement with body from weather-strip joint.
CAUTION: L
Never pull strongly on weather-strip.
INSTALLATION
1. Working from the upper section, align weather-strip center mark M
(A) with vehicle center mark (B) and install weather-strip onto
the vehicle.
N
: Vehicle front

JMKIA8129ZZ
P

Revision: 2012 July DLK-167 N17


TRUNK LID
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
2. Align the connecting point (B) of weather-strip (2) to the center
(A) of striker (1), and then install as shown in the figure.

JMKIA8130ZZ

3. Pull weather-strip gently to ensure that there is no loose section.


NOTE:
Check that weather-strip fits tightly in each corner and luggage rear plate.

Revision: 2012 July DLK-168 N17


HOOD LOCK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
HOOD LOCK
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000006655189

LHD models B

I
JMKIA8159GB

1. Hood lock bell crank 2. Hood lock assembly 3. Hood lock control cable assembly J
: Clip

: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)


DLK
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

: Body grease
L

Revision: 2012 July DLK-169 N17


HOOD LOCK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
RHD models

JMKIA9312GB

1. Hood lock control cable assembly 2. Hood lock bell crank 3. Hood lock assembly
: Clip

: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)

: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

: Body grease

HOOD LOCK
HOOD LOCK : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000006655190

REMOVAL
LHD models
1. Disconnect hood lock switch harness connector (A).
(Models with hood lock switch.)

: Vehicle front

JMKIA7996ZZ

2. Remove hood lock assembly mounting bolts, and then remove hood lock assembly.

Revision: 2012 July DLK-170 N17


HOOD LOCK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
3. Disconnect hood lock control cable assembly (2) from hood lock
assembly (1). A

JMKIA7997ZZ

D
RHD models
1. Disconnect hood lock switch harness connector (A).
(Models with hood lock switch.) E

: Vehicle front
F

JMKIA7996ZZ H

2. Remove hood lock assembly mounting bolts, and then remove hood lock assembly.
3. Disconnect hood lock control cable assembly from hood lock I
assembly.

DLK

JMKIA5748ZZ L

INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal. M
CAUTION:
• Never to bend cable too much, keeping the radius 100 mm (3.937 in) or more.
• Check that hood lock control cable is properly engaged with hood lock.
• After installation, perform hood fitting adjustment. Refer to DLK-138, "HOOD ASSEMBLY : Adjust- N
ment".
• After installation, perform hood lock control inspection. Refer to DLK-174, "Inspection".
HOOD LOCK CONTROL CABLE O

HOOD LOCK CONTROL CABLE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000006922647

P
REMOVAL
LHD models
1. Disconnect hood lock control cable assembly from hood lock assembly. Refer to DLK-170, "HOOD LOCK
: Removal and Installation".
2. Remove fender protector LH. Refer to EXT-22, "FENDER PROTECTOR : Removal and Installation".
3. Remove hood lock control cable fixing clips.

Revision: 2012 July DLK-171 N17


HOOD LOCK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
4. Remove hood lock control handle mounting bolts (A) of hood
lock control cable assembly.

JMKIA7998ZZ

5. Disconnect fuel filler lid opener cable (2) from fuel filler lid
opener lever (1).

JMKIA7999ZZ

6. Remove dash side finisher LH. Refer to INT-26, "DASH SIDE FINISHER : Removal and Installation"
7. Remove grommet on the lower dash, and pull the hood lock control cable toward the passenger compart-
ment.
CAUTION:
While pulling, never to damage (peeling) the outside of hood lock control cable.
RHD models
1. Disconnect hood lock control cable assembly from hood lock assembly. Refer to DLK-170, "HOOD LOCK
: Removal and Installation".
2. Remove fender protector RH. Refer to EXT-22, "FENDER PROTECTOR : Removal and Installation".
3. Remove hood lock control cable fixing clips.
4. Remove hood lock control handle mounting bolts (A) of hood
lock control cable assembly.

JMKIA5707ZZ

5. Disconnect fuel filler lid opener cable (2) from fuel filler lid
opener lever (1).

JMKIA5708ZZ

Revision: 2012 July DLK-172 N17


HOOD LOCK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
6. Remove dash side finisher RH. Refer to INT-26, "DASH SIDE FINISHER : Removal and Installation"
7. Remove grommet on the lower dash, and pull the hood lock control cable toward the passenger compart- A
ment.
CAUTION:
While pulling, never to damage (peeling) the outside of hood lock control cable. B
INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: C
• Never to bend cable too much, keeping the radius 100 mm (3.937 in) or more.
• Check that cable is not offset from the positioning grommet,
and apply the sealant to the grommet (at * mark) properly.
D

PIIB5801E

G
• Check that hood lock control cable is properly engaged with hood lock.
• After installation, perform hood fitting adjustment. Refer to DLK-138, "HOOD ASSEMBLY : Adjust-
ment". H
• After installation, perform hood lock control inspection. Refer to DLK-174, "Inspection".
HOOD LOCK BELL CRANK
HOOD LOCK BELL CRANK : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000006922648
I

REMOVAL
J
1. Remove radiator upper seal fixing clip (A), and then remove
upper fixing clip (B) of radiator side seal RH.

: Vehicle front DLK

M
JMKIA9313ZZ

2. Remove upper fixing clip (A) of radiator side seal LH and radia-
tor upper seal fixing clip (B). N

: Vehicle front

JMKIA9331ZZ

3. Remove hood lock bell crank assembly mounting nuts, and then remove hood lock bell crank assembly.
INSTALLATION
Note the following item, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:

Revision: 2012 July DLK-173 N17


HOOD LOCK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
After installation, perform hood lock control inspection. Refer to DLK-174, "Inspection".
Inspection INFOID:0000000006655191

NOTE:
If the hood lock cable is bent or deformed, replace it.
1. Check that hood opener operating is condition 49 N (5.0 kg, 11.0 lb) or below.
2. Check that secondary latch (1) is securely engaged with sec-
ondary striker (2) from the dead load of the hood assembly.

JMKIA7993ZZ

3. Check that primary latch (1) is securely engaged with primary


striker (2) when hood assembly is closed [free-fall from approxi-
mately 200 mm (7.874 in) height].
CAUTION:
Never free-fall hood assembly from a height of 300 (11.811
in) mm or more.

JMKIA7994ZZ

4. While operating hood opener, carefully check that the front end of hood is raised by approximately 20.0
mm (0.787 in). Also check that hood opener returns to the original position.
5. Install so that static closing face of hood is 300 – 490 N (31.0 – 50.0 kg-m, 221 – 361 ft – lb).
NOTE:
• Exert vertical force on right side and left side of hood lock.
• Never press simultaneously both sides.
6. Check the hood lock lubrication condition. If necessary, apply body grease to hood lock bell crank assem-
bly (1) and hood lock assembly (2).

JMKIA8000ZZ

: Body grease

Revision: 2012 July DLK-174 N17


FRONT DOOR LOCK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
FRONT DOOR LOCK
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000006655192

I
JMKIA8160GB

1. Door key cylinder assembly (driver 2. Rear gasket 3. Outside handle bracket J
side)
Outside handle escutcheon (passen-
ger side)
4. TORX bolt 5. Key rod (driver side) 6. Door lock assembly DLK
7. Inside handle 8. Outside handle 9. Front gasket
10. Clip
L
: Pawl
: Vehicle front
: Always replace after every disassembly. M
: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)

: Body grease
N
DOOR LOCK
DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000006655193 O

REMOVAL
1. Remove inside handle. Refer to DLK-176, "INSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation". P
2. Remove outside handle and outside handle bracket. Refer to DLK-177, "OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal
and Installation".
3. Disconnect door lock actuator connector.
4. Remove front door lower sash (rear). Refer to GW-17, "Exploded View".
5. Remove door lock assembly TORX bolts, and then remove door lock assembly.

Revision: 2012 July DLK-175 N17


FRONT DOOR LOCK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Never reuse TORX bolt. Always replace it with a new one when it is removed.
• Check door open/close, lock/unlock operation after installation.
• Check door lock cable is properly engaged with outside handle bracket.
• Check door lock assembly for poor lubrication. Apply body
grease to door lock if necessary.

: Body grease

JMKIA8077ZZ

INSIDE HANDLE
INSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000006655194

REMOVAL
1. Remove front door finisher. Refer to INT-13, "POWER WINDOW MODELS : Removal and Installation".
2. Remove upper side of sealing screen.
NOTE:
Cut the butyl tape so that some parts of the butyl tape do not remain on the sealing screen, if the sealing
screen is reused.
3. Disengage lock knob cable (2) and inside handle cable (3) from
clip (1).

JMKIA8078ZZ

4. Remove inside handle mounting bolt.


5. Disengage inside handle (1) from door panel (2) while sliding
inside handle toward vehicle rear, and then separate inside han-
dle.

: Pawl
: Vehicle front

JMKIA8079ZZ

Revision: 2012 July DLK-176 N17


FRONT DOOR LOCK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
6. Disengage inside handle cable (3) and lock knob cable (2), and
then remove inside handle (1). A

JMKIA5885ZZ

D
INSTALLATION
Note the following item, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Check door open/close, lock/unlock operation after installation. E
OUTSIDE HANDLE
OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000006655195 F

REMOVAL
1. Fully close the front door glass. G
2. Remove front door finisher. Refer to INT-13, "POWER WINDOW MODELS : Removal and Installation".
3. Remove sealing screen.
NOTE: H
Cut the butyl-tape so that some parts of the butyl-tape do not remain on the sealing screen, if the sealing
screen is reused.
4. Disengage rod holder (1), and then separate key rod (3) from I
door lock assembly (2).(Driver side)

DLK

JMKIA8080ZZ L

5. Disengage outside handle cable (1) from cable clip (2).


M
: Vehicle front

JMKIA8081ZZ

Revision: 2012 July DLK-177 N17


FRONT DOOR LOCK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
6. Disconnect harness connector of door antenna (1) and door
request switch (2) and remove harness clamps (A).

: Vehicle front

JMKIA8082ZZ

7. Remove door side grommet, and loosen TORX bolt from grom-
met hole.

JMKIA5888ZZ

8. While pulling outside handle, remove door key cylinder assem-


bly (driver side) or outside handle escutcheon (passenger side).

JMKIA0560ZZ

9. While pulling outside handle (1), slide toward rear of vehicle to


remove outside handle.

JMKIA0524ZZ

10. Remove front gasket (1) and rear gasket (2).

: Vehicle front

JMKIA5889ZZ

Revision: 2012 July DLK-178 N17


FRONT DOOR LOCK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
11. Slide outside handle bracket toward rear of vehicle to remove.
A
: Vehicle front

JMKIA5890ZZ

D
12. Disconnect outside handle cable (1) from outside handle bracket
(2).
E

G
JMKIA5891ZZ

INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal. H
CAUTION:
• When installing key rod, rotate key rod holder until a click is felt.
• Check that door lock cables are normally engaged with inside handle and outside handle.
I
• After installation, check door open/close, and lock/unlock operation.

DLK

Revision: 2012 July DLK-179 N17


REAR DOOR LOCK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
REAR DOOR LOCK
Exploded View INFOID:0000000006655196

JMKIA8161GB

1. Outside handle escutcheon 2. Rear gasket 3. Outside handle bracket


4. TORX bolt 5. Door lock assembly 6. Inside handle
7. Outside handle 8. Front gasket 9. Clip
: Pawl
: Vehicle front
: Always replace after every disassembly.

: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)

: Body grease

DOOR LOCK
DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000006655197

REMOVAL
1. Remove inside handle. Refer to DLK-181, "INSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation".
2. Remove outside handle and outside handle bracket. Refer to DLK-182, "OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal
and Installation".

Revision: 2012 July DLK-180 N17


REAR DOOR LOCK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
3. Remove mounting bolt (A) of partition sash (1).
A

JMKIA8086ZZ

D
4. Disconnect door lock actuator harness connector.
5. Remove door lock assembly TORX bolts.
6. Remove door lock assembly while locating inside handle cable and door lock cable to the bottom side of E
rear partition sash.
INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal. F
CAUTION:
• Never reuse TORX bolt. Always replace it with a new one when it is removed.
• Check door open/close, lock/unlock operation after installation. G
• Check door lock cable is properly engaged with outside handle bracket.
• Check door lock assembly for poor lubrication. Apply body
grease to door lock if necessary.
H
: Body grease

JMKIA8087ZZ

INSIDE HANDLE DLK

INSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000006655198

L
REMOVAL
1. Remove rear door finisher. Refer to INT-18, "POWER WINDOW MODELS : Removal and Installation".
2. Remove upper side of sealing screen. M
NOTE:
Cut the butyl tape so that some parts of the butyl tape do not remain on the sealing screen, if the sealing
screen is reused.
N
3. Disengage lock knob cable (2) and inside handle cable (3) from
cable clip (1).
O

JMKIA8088ZZ

4. Remove inside handle mounting bolt.

Revision: 2012 July DLK-181 N17


REAR DOOR LOCK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
5. Disengage inside handle (1) from door panel (2) while sliding
inside handle toward vehicle rear, and then separate inside han-
dle.

: Pawl
: Vehicle front

JMKIA8079ZZ

6. Disengage inside handle cable (3) and lock knob cable (2), and
then remove inside handle (1).

JMKIA5885ZZ

INSTALLATION
Note the following item, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Check door open/close, lock/unlock operation after installation.
OUTSIDE HANDLE
OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000006655199

REMOVAL
1. Fully close rear door glass.
2. Remove rear door finisher. Refer to INT-18, "POWER WINDOW MODELS : Removal and Installation".
3. Remove sealing screen.
NOTE:
Cut the butyl-tape so that some parts of the butyl-tape do not remain on the sealing screen, if the sealing
screen is reused.
4. Remove door side grommet, and loosen TORX bolt from grom-
met hole.

JMKIA1467ZZ

Revision: 2012 July DLK-182 N17


REAR DOOR LOCK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
5. While pulling outside handle, remove outside handle escutch-
eon. A

JMKIA5342ZZ

D
6. While pulling outside handle (1), slide toward rear of vehicle to
remove outside handle.
E

G
JMKIA0524ZZ

7. Remove front gasket (1) and rear gasket (2).


H
: Vehicle front

JMKIA5889ZZ
DLK
8. Slide outside handle bracket toward rear of vehicle to remove.

: Vehicle front L

N
JMKIA5890ZZ

9. Disconnect outside handle cable (1) from outside handle bracket O


(2).

JMKIA5891ZZ

Revision: 2012 July DLK-183 N17


REAR DOOR LOCK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Check door open/close, lock/unlock operation after installation.
• Check door lock cable is properly engaged with outside handle bracket.

Revision: 2012 July DLK-184 N17


TRUNK LID LOCK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
TRUNK LID LOCK
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000006892146

LHD models B

I
JMKIA8173GB

1. Trunk lid opener handle 2. Trunk lid opener cable 3. Cable protector J
4. Trunk lid striker 5. Trunk lid lock assembly 6. Key rod (if equipped)
7. Trunk key cylinder (if equipped)
: Always replace after every disassembly. DLK

: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)

: Body grease L

Revision: 2012 July DLK-185 N17


TRUNK LID LOCK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
RHD models

JMKIA9323GB

1. Trunk lid opener handle 2. Trunk lid opener cable 3. Cable protector
4. Trunk lid striker 5. Trunk lid lock assembly 6. Key rod (if equipped)
7. Trunk key cylinder (if equipped)
: Always replace after every disassembly.

: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)

: Body grease

TRUNK LID LOCK


TRUNK LID LOCK : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000006892147

REMOVAL
1. Disconnect harness connector (A) from trunk lid lock assembly
(1).

JMKIA9399ZZ

2. Remove trunk lid finisher inner (if equipped). Refer to INT-42, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: 2012 July DLK-186 N17


TRUNK LID LOCK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
3. Disengage rod holder (1), and then separate trunk lid lock rod
(3) from trunk lid lock assembly (2). A

JMKIA8131ZZ

D
4. Remove trunk lid lock assembly mounting bolts, and then
remove trunk lid lock assembly (1).
E

G
JMKIA8132ZZ

INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal. H
CAUTION:
• Check trunk lid open/close, lock/unlock operation after installation.
• Check trunk lid lock assembly for poor lubrication. Apply I
body grease to trunk lid lock if necessary.

: Body grease
J

DLK

JMKIA8133ZZ L
TRUNK LID OPENER HANDLE
TRUNK LID OPENER HANDLE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000006922651 M

REMOVAL
LHD models N
1. Remove front kicking plate inner LH. INT-25, "KICKING PLATE INNER : Removal and Installation".
2. Remove dash side finisher LH. Refer to INT-26, "DASH SIDE FINISHER : Removal and Installation".
O
3. Disengage harness protector (1), and then pull up floor trim (2).

JMKIA8134ZZ

Revision: 2012 July DLK-187 N17


TRUNK LID LOCK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
4. Remove trunk lid opener handle mounting bolts.
5. Disconnect trunk lid opener cable (1) from trunk lid opener han-
dle (2).
CAUTION:
Never damage the trunk lid opener cable.

JMKIA8135ZZ

RHD models
1. Remove front kicking plate inner RH. INT-25, "KICKING PLATE INNER : Removal and Installation".
2. Remove dash side finisher RH. Refer to INT-26, "DASH SIDE FINISHER : Removal and Installation".
3. Disengage harness protector (1), and then pull up floor trim (2).

JMKIA9325ZZ

4. Remove trunk lid opener handle mounting bolts.


5. Disconnect trunk lid opener cable (1) from trunk lid opener han-
dle (2).
CAUTION:
Never damage the trunk lid opener cable.

JMKIA9326ZZ

INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Check that trunk lid opener cables are normally engaged with trunk lid opener handle.
• After installation, check trunk lid open/close, and lock/unlock operation.
TRUNK LID OPENER CABLE
TRUNK LID OPENER CABLE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000006922650

REMOVAL
LHD models
1. Remove trunk lid striker. Refer to DLK-165, "TRUNK LID STRIKER : Removal and Installation".
2. Remove trunk side finisher LH. Refer to INT-40, "TRUNK SIDE FINISHER : Removal and Installation".
3. Remove front kicking plate inner LH and rear kicking plate inner LH. Refer to INT-25, "KICKING PLATE
INNER : Removal and Installation".

Revision: 2012 July DLK-188 N17


TRUNK LID LOCK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
4. Remove center pillar lower garnish LH. Refer to INT-27, "CENTER PILLAR LOWER GARNISH : Removal
and Installation". A
5. Remove trunk lid opener handle. Refer to DLK-187, "TRUNK LID OPENER HANDLE : Removal and
Installation".
6. Remove trunk lid opener cable. B
CAUTION:
Never damage the trunk lid opener cable.
RHD models C
1. Remove trunk lid striker. Refer to DLK-165, "TRUNK LID STRIKER : Removal and Installation".
2. Remove trunk side finisher LH. Refer to INT-40, "TRUNK SIDE FINISHER : Removal and Installation".
3. Remove front kicking plate inner RH and rear kicking plate inner LH and RH. Refer to INT-25, "KICKING D
PLATE INNER : Removal and Installation".
4. Remove center pillar lower garnish RH. Refer to INT-27, "CENTER PILLAR LOWER GARNISH : Removal
and Installation". E
5. Remove trunk lid opener handle. Refer to DLK-187, "TRUNK LID OPENER HANDLE : Removal and
Installation".
6. Remove trunk lid opener cable. F
CAUTION:
Never damage the trunk lid opener cable.
INSTALLATION G
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
After installation, check trunk lid open/close, and lock/unlock operation. H
EMERGENCY LEVER
EMERGENCY LEVER : Unlock procedures INFOID:0000000006922649 I

UNLOCK PROCEDURES
NOTE: J
If trunk lid lock cannot be unlocked due to a malfunction or battery discharge, follow the procedures to unlock
back door.
DLK
From inside the vehicle, rotate emergency lever (1) toward lower
direction and unlock.
L

N
JMKIA8136ZZ

Revision: 2012 July DLK-189 N17


FUEL FILLER LID OPENER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
FUEL FILLER LID OPENER
Exploded View INFOID:0000000006655206

LHD models

JMKIA8174ZZ

1. Fuel filler lid opener cable 2. Spring 3. Fuel filler lid assembly
4. Bumper rubber 5. Fuel filler lid lock assembly 6. Cable protector
: Clip
: Always replace after every disassembly.

Revision: 2012 July DLK-190 N17


FUEL FILLER LID OPENER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
RHD models
A

H
JMKIA9329ZZ

1. Fuel filler lid opener cable 2. Spring 3. Fuel filler lid assembly
4. Bumper rubber 5. Fuel filler lid lock assembly 6. Cable protector I
: Clip
: Always replace after every disassembly.
J
FUEL FILLER LID
FUEL FILLER LID : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000006655207 DLK

REMOVAL
1. Fully open fuel filler lid. L
2. Remove fuel mounting pin (1).

O
JMKIA8137ZZ

3. Remove mounting screws, and then remove fuel filler lid. P


INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
After installation, check fuel filler lid assembly open/close, lock/unlock operation.
NOTE:
• The following table shows the specified values for checking normal installation status.
• Fitting adjustment cannot be performed.

Revision: 2012 July DLK-191 N17


FUEL FILLER LID OPENER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
Unit: mm [in]
Portion Clearance Evenness
Fuel filler lid – Body side outer 2.0 – 4.0 [0.079 – 0.157] (−1.0) – (+1.0) [(−0.039) – (+0.039)]
FUEL FILLER OPENER CABLE
FUEL FILLER OPENER CABLE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000006922653

REMOVAL
LHD models
1. Remove hood lock control handle mounting bolts (A) of hood
lock control cable assembly.

JMKIA7998ZZ

2. Disconnect fuel filler lid opener cable (2) from fuel filler lid
opener lever (1).

JMKIA7999ZZ

3. Remove front kicking plate inner LH and rear kicking plate inner LH. Refer to INT-25, "KICKING PLATE
INNER : Removal and Installation".
4. Remove dash side finisher LH. Refer to INT-26, "DASH SIDE FINISHER : Removal and Installation".
5. Remove center pillar lower garnish LH. Refer to INT-27, "CENTER PILLAR LOWER GARNISH : Removal
and Installation".
6. Remove trunk side finisher LH. Refer to INT-40, "TRUNK SIDE FINISHER : Removal and Installation".
7. Remove fuel filler lid opener cable from fuel filler lid lock assembly. Refer to DLK-193, "FUEL FILLER LID
LOCK : Removal and Installation".
8. Disengage each harness protector (1), and then remove fuel
filler lid opener cable (2).

JMKIA5720ZZ

9. Remove fuel filler lid opener cable fixing clips, and then remove fuel filler lid opener cable.
RHD models

Revision: 2012 July DLK-192 N17


FUEL FILLER LID OPENER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
1. Remove hood lock control handle mounting bolts (A) of hood
lock control cable assembly. A

JMKIA5707ZZ

D
2. Disconnect fuel filler lid opener cable (2) from fuel filler lid
opener lever (1).
E

G
JMKIA5708ZZ

3. Remove front kicking plate inner RH and rear kicking plate inner LH and RH. Refer to INT-25, "KICKING
H
PLATE INNER : Removal and Installation".
4. Remove dash side finisher RH. Refer to INT-26, "DASH SIDE FINISHER : Removal and Installation".
5. Remove center pillar lower garnish RH. Refer to INT-27, "CENTER PILLAR LOWER GARNISH : Removal I
and Installation".
6. Remove trunk side finisher LH. Refer to INT-40, "TRUNK SIDE FINISHER : Removal and Installation".
7. Remove fuel filler lid opener cable from fuel filler lid lock assembly. Refer to DLK-193, "FUEL FILLER LID J
LOCK : Removal and Installation".
8. Disengage each harness protector (1), and then remove fuel
filler lid opener cable (2).
DLK

JMKIA5720ZZ

N
9. Remove fuel filler lid opener cable fixing clips, and then remove fuel filler lid opener cable.
INSTALLATION
Note the following item, and install in the reverse order of removal. O
CAUTION:
After installation, check fuel filler lid assembly open/close, lock/unlock operation.
FUEL FILLER LID LOCK P
FUEL FILLER LID LOCK : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000006922652

REMOVAL
1. Fully open fuel filler lid.
2. Remove trunk side finisher LH. Refer to INT-40, "TRUNK SIDE FINISHER : Removal and Installation".

Revision: 2012 July DLK-193 N17


FUEL FILLER LID OPENER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
3. Disengage pawls (A) of fuel filler lid lock assembly (1) and push
out fuel filler lid lock assembly toward the vehicle outside.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage packing (2) when removing.

JMKIA8138ZZ

4. Disconnect fuel filler lid cable (1) from fuel filler lid lock assembly
(2).

JMKIA8139ZZ

INSTALLATION
Note the following item, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
After installation, check fuel filler lid assembly open/close, lock/unlock operation.

Revision: 2012 July DLK-194 N17


DOOR SWITCH
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
DOOR SWITCH
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000007080721

JMKIA2569GB
E
1. Door switch 2. TORX bolt

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007080722 F

REMOVAL
Remove the TORX bolt (A), and then remove door switch (1). G

JMKIA2173ZZ J
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
DLK

Revision: 2012 July DLK-195 N17


TRUNK LID OPENER SWITCH
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
TRUNK LID OPENER SWITCH
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000006655209

REMOVAL
Remove the trunk lid finisher. Refer to EXT-26, "Removal and Installation".
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: 2012 July DLK-196 N17


INSIDE KEY ANTENNA
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
INSIDE KEY ANTENNA
A
INSTRUMENT CENTER
INSTRUMENT CENTER : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007080724
B
REMOVAL
1. Remove the instrument lower center panel. Refer to IP-13, "Removal and Installation".
C
2. Remove the inside key antenna (instrument center) (1) mount-
ing screw (A), and then remove inside key antenna (instrument
center).
D

F
JMKIA7948ZZ

INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal. G
CONSOLE
CONSOLE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007080725
H

REMOVAL
1. Remove the center console assembly. Refer to IP-21, "WITH REAR BLOWER MOTOR ASSEMBLY : I
Removal and Installation" (With rear blower motor assembly) or IP-26, "WITHOUT REAR BLOWER
MOTOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation" (Without rear blower motor assembly).
2. Remove the inside key antenna (console) (1) mounting clip (A), J
and then remove inside key antenna (console).

DLK

JMKIA7950ZZ M
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
TRUNK ROOM N

TRUNK ROOM : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007080726

O
REMOVAL

Revision: 2012 July DLK-197 N17


INSIDE KEY ANTENNA
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
Remove the inside key antenna (trunk room) (1) mounting clip (A).

JMKIA7951ZZ

INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: 2012 July DLK-198 N17


OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
A
OUTSIDE HANDLE
OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000006994255
B
REMOVAL
1. Remove the outside handle. Refer to DLK-177, "OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation".
C
2. Remove the handle cover screw, handle cover and door antenna.

F
MIIB0136E

INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal. G
REAR BUMPER
REAR BUMPER : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007080727
H

REMOVAL
1. Remove the rear bumper fascia. Refer to EXT-15, "Removal and Installation". I
2. Remove the outside key antenna (rear bumper) (1) mounting
clip (A), then remove outside key antenna (rear bumper).
J

DLK

L
JMKIA7952ZZ

INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal. M

Revision: 2012 July DLK-199 N17


INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING BUZZER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING BUZZER
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007080728

REMOVAL
Remove the Intelligent Key warning buzzer (1) mounting bolt (A),
and then remove the Intelligent Key warning buzzer.

JMKIA7949ZZ

INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: 2012 July DLK-200 N17


REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER
A
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007080729

REMOVAL B
1. Remove the instrument finisher B. Refer to IP-13, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove the remote keyless entry receiver (1) mounting bolt (A),
and then remove remote keyless entry receiver. C

JMKIA7947ZZ
F
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
G

DLK

Revision: 2012 July DLK-201 N17


INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007080730

1. Release the lock knob at the back of the Intelligent Key and remove the mechanical key.

2. Insert remover tool (A) wrapped with a cloth into the slit of the
corner and twist it to separate the upper part from the lower part.
CAUTION:
• Never touch the circuit board or battery terminal.
• The key fob is water-resistant. However, if it does get wet,
immediately wipe it dry.

PIIB6221E

3. Replace the battery with new one.

Battery replacement :Coin-type lithium battery


(CR2025)

4. Align the tips of the upper and lower parts, and then push them
together until it is securely closed.
CAUTION:
• When replacing battery, keep dirt, grease, and other for-
eign materials off the electrode contact area.
• After replacing the battery, check that all Intelligent Key
functions work normally.

PIIB6222E

Revision: 2012 July DLK-202 N17


PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT B
PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000006655217

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along C
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and
“SEAT BELT” of this Service Manual.
WARNING: D
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by E
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
F
Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”.
• Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Ser-
vice Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness
connectors. G
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING: H
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the
ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with
a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing I
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service. J
Precautions Necessary for Steering Wheel Rotation After Battery Disconnection
INFOID:0000000006655218

DLK
CAUTION:
Comply with the following cautions to prevent any error and malfunction.
• Before removing and installing any control units, first turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position,
then disconnect both battery cables. L
• After finishing work, confirm that all control unit connectors are connected properly, then re-connect
both battery cables.
• Always use CONSULT to perform self-diagnosis as a part of each function inspection after finishing M
work. If a DTC is detected, perform trouble diagnosis according to self-diagnosis results.
For vehicle with steering lock unit, if the battery is disconnected or discharged, the steering wheel will lock and
cannot be turned.
If turning the steering wheel is required with the battery disconnected or discharged, follow the operation pro- N
cedure below before starting the repair operation.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
O
1. Connect both battery cables.
NOTE:
Supply power using jumper cables if battery is discharged.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ACC position. P
(At this time, the steering lock will be released.)
3. Disconnect both battery cables. The steering lock will remain released with both battery cables discon-
nected and the steering wheel can be turned.
4. Perform the necessary repair operation.

Revision: 2012 July DLK-203 N17


PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
5. When the repair work is completed, re-connect both battery cables. With the brake pedal released, turn
the ignition switch from ACC position to ON position, then to LOCK position. (The steering wheel will lock
when the ignition switch is turned to LOCK position.)
6. Perform self-diagnosis check of all control units using CONSULT.
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover INFOID:0000000007153887

When performing the procedure after removing cowl top cover, cover
the lower end of windshield with urethane, etc to prevent damage to
windshield.

PIIB3706J

Work INFOID:0000000006655219

• After removing and installing the opening/closing parts, be sure to carry out fitting adjustments to check their
operational.
• Check the lubrication level, damage, and wear of each part. If necessary, grease or replace it.

Revision: 2012 July DLK-204 N17


PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

PREPARATION A
PREPARATION
Commercial Service Tools INFOID:0000000006655220
B

Tool name Description


C

D
Engine ear Locating the noise

E
SIIA0995E

Remover tool Remove the clips, pawls, and metal clips

PIIB7923J

Power tool I

PIIB1407E J

DLK

Revision: 2012 July DLK-205 N17


COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
COMPONENT PARTS
Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000006655221

JMKIA9336ZZ

A. View with glove box cover removed B. Models without remote keyless entry
system for Thailand

No. Component Function


1. Combination meter Transmits vehicle speed signal to CAN communication line
2. Remote keyless entry receiver Refer to DLK-207, "Remote Keyless Entry Receiver".
Transmits shift position signal to BCM via CAN communication line
Refer to TM-352, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location (LHD)", or
3. TCM
TM-354, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location (RHD)" for detailed
installation location
Sounds horn via CAN communication between BCM
4. IPDM E/R
Refer to PCS-42, "Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location
BCM detects the vehicle status according to signals from each door switch. BCM
transmits drive signal to door lock actuator when BCM receives operation signal from
5. BCM remote keyless entry receiver
Refer to BCS-85, "BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for de-
tailed installation location
• Transmits door lock/unlock operation to BCM
6. Door lock and unlock switch
• Integrated in the power window main switch
7. Front door switch (driver side) Detects front door (driver side) open/close condition
8. Front door lock assembly (driver side) Refer to DLK-207, "Front Door Lock Assembly (Driver Side)".

Revision: 2012 July DLK-206 N17


COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
No. Component Function
A
9. Rear door switch LH Detects rear door LH open/close condition
10. Rear door lock assembly LH Inputs lock/unlock signal from BCM and locks/unlocks Rear door LH
11. Trunk lid lock assembly Refer to DLK-208, "Trunk Lid Lock Assembly". B
12. Rear door lock assembly RH Inputs lock/unlock signal from BCM and locks/unlocks Rear door RH
13. Rear door switch RH Detects rear door RH open/close condition
14. Front door switch (passenger side) Detects front door (passenger side) open/close condition C
Front door lock assembly (passenger
15. Refer to DLK-207, "Front Door Lock Assembly (Passenger Side)".
side)
D
Transmits the collision detection signal when air bag diagnosis sensor unit detects col-
16. Air bag diagnosis sensor unit lision
Refer to SRC-6, "Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location
17. Key switch Input ignition switch ON/OFF condition to BCM E
18. Door key cylinder switch Input door key cylinder lock/unlock operation condition to BCM

Front Door Lock Assembly (Driver Side) INFOID:0000000007795743 F

• Door lock actuator and unlock sensor are Integrated in driver door
lock assembly. G
• Door lock actuator receives lock/unlock signal from BCM, and then
locks/unlocks driver door.
• Only front door lock assembly (driver side) integrates unlock sen-
sor (Models with remote keyless entry system). Unlock sensor H
transmits lock/unlock status of driver door to BCM.

JMKIA9347ZZ

Front Door Lock Assembly (Passenger Side) INFOID:0000000007795744


J

• Door lock actuator is Integrated in passenger door lock assembly.


• Door lock actuator receives lock/unlock signal from BCM, and then DLK
locks/unlocks passenger door.

JMKIA9347ZZ

N
Remote Keyless Entry Receiver INFOID:0000000007795745

• Remote keyless entry receiver receives button operation signals of


keyfob, and then transmits them to BCM. O
• Remote keyless entry receiver is installed in the behind of glove
box lid. (Except for Hong Kong)
• Remote keyless entry receiver is integrated into the inside mirror. P
(For Hong Kong)

JMKIA8647ZZ

Revision: 2012 July DLK-207 N17


COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
Trunk Lid Lock Assembly INFOID:0000000007795746

• Trunk lid lock assembly integrates trunk lid opener actuator and
trunk room lamp switch.
• Trunk lid opener actuator opens the trunk lid according to the trunk
lid open signal from BCM.
• Trunk room lamp switch detects open/close status of trunk lid.

JMKIA9348ZZ

Revision: 2012 July DLK-208 N17


POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
A
System Description INFOID:0000000006655224

System Diagram B

JMKIA9338GB

*1: Models for Indonesia and Singapore G


*2: Models without remote keyless entry system
*3: Models for China, India, Indonesia and Singapore
*4: Models with A/T or CVT
H
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
Door Lock/unlock Switch
• The door lock and unlock switch is build into power window main switch. I
• BCM locks all doors or unlocks all doors, when door lock/unlock switch is operated.
Unlock Sensor (Models for Indonesia and Singapore)
• BCM locks all doors or unlocks all doors, when driver door lock knob is operated. J
• With the ignition key inserted in the door key cylinder on driver side, turning it to lock position, locks door lock
actuator of all doors.
• With the ignition key inserted in the door key cylinder on driver side, turning it to unlock position, unlocks DLK
door lock actuator of all doors.
Door key cylinder switch (Models without remote keyless entry system)
• With the ignition key inserted in the door key cylinder on driver side, turning it to lock position, locks door lock L
actuator of all doors.
• With the ignition key inserted in the door key cylinder on driver side, turning it to unlock position, unlocks
door lock actuator of all doors.
M
OPERATION CONDITION (INDIA PRODUCTION MODELS FOR GENERAL AREAS WITH RHD)
If all of the following conditions are satisfied, door lock and unlock operation is performed using the door lock/
unlock switch. N

Door lock and unlock switch operation Operation condition

• Ignition Key is removed from ignition key cylinder and closed driver side door*1 O
• Doors other than drivers door are closed*1
LOCK
• Doors are not locked by keyfob*2
• Door lock that is requested is not auto door lock*2 P
UNLOCK Door are not locked by keyfob*2

*1: While door lock and unlock switch is pressed in the lock direction during this state, combination meter buzzer sounds and warns.
*2: When this item becomes OK according to keyfob ID verification, door lock/unlock operation is allowed.

KEY REMINDER FUNCTION (EXCEPT FOR INDIA PRODUCTION MODELS FOR GENERAL AR-
EAS WITH RHD)

Revision: 2012 July DLK-209 N17


POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
Except for Indonesia and Singapore
When door lock and unlock switch is operated while key is inserted into key switch and driver side door is
open, door locks once but immediately unlocks. This operation prevents keyfob from being left in the vehicle.
For Indonesia and Singapore
When door lock and unlock switch or driver door lock knob is operated while key is inserted into key switch
and driver side door is open, door locks once but immediately unlocks. This operation prevents keyfob from
being left in the vehicle.
KEY REMINDER FUNCTION (INDIA PRODUCTION MODELS FOR GENERAL AREAS WITH RHD)
• While ignition key is inserted in ignition key cylinder and driver door is open, door is not locked when door
lock and unlock switch is pressed in the lock direction. This prevents keyfob from being left in the vehicle.
• While door lock and unlock switch is pressed in the lock direction, combination meter buzzer sounds and
warns.
OVERRIDE FUNCTION
When inside handle of driver door is operated while the driver door is in lock state, the lock state of the driver
door lock becomes invalid and the driver door opens.
UNLOCK LINK FUNCTION (INDIA PRODUCTION MODELS FOR GENERAL AREA WITH RHD)
When driver side door or passenger side door is opened, all doors are unlocked.
Unlock function operates when driver door or passenger door is open while all of the following conditions are
satisfied.

• Doors are locked by door lock/unlock switch


• Driver or passenger door switch is switched from OFF to ON
Operation condition
• Anti-hijack function is not activated
• Vehicle speed is 5 km/h (3 MPH) or less
NOTE:
When anti-hijack function is activated, only the applicable door is unlocked.
AIR BAG INTERLOCK UNLOCK FUNCTION (MODELS FOR CHINA, INDIA, INDONESIA AND SIN-
GAPORE)
When ignition switch is ON and BCM receives air bag signal, it operates automatically to unlock all doors. Air
bag diagnosis sensor unit sends the air bag signal to BCM.
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL FUNCTION
Interior room lamp is controlled according to door lock/unlock state, refer to INL-8, "INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description"
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK FUNCTION (LOCK OPERATION) (MODELS WITH REMOTE
KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM EXCEPT FOR THAILAND)
The interlock door lock function is the function that locks all doors linked with the vehicle speed or shift posi-
tion. It has 2 types as follows.
Vehicle Speed Sensing Auto Door Lock
All doors are locked when the vehicle speed reaches 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more (Except for Thailand, Indone-
sia and Singapore), 24 km/h (15 MPH) or more (For Thailand, Indonesia and Singapore).
BCM outputs the lock signal to all door lock actuators when it detects that the ignition switch is turned ON, all
doors are closed and the vehicle speed received from the combination meter via CAN communication
becomes 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more (Except for Indonesia and Singapore), 24 km/h (15 MPH) or more (For
Indonesia and Singapore).
P Range Interlock Door Lock*
All doors are locked when shifting the selector lever from the P position to any position other than P.
BCM outputs the lock signal to all door lock actuators when it detects that the ignition switch is in the ON posi-
tion and the shift signal received from the TCM via CAN communication is shifted from the P position to any
position other than P.
*: This function does not operate on M/T models.
Setting Change Of Automatic Door Lock/unlock Function
The lock operation setting of the automatic door lock/unlock function can be changed.
With CONSULT

Revision: 2012 July DLK-210 N17


POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
The ON/OFF switching of the automatic door lock function and the type selection of the automatic door lock/
unlock function can be performed at the WORK SUPPORT setting of CONSULT. A
Without CONSULT
The automatic door lock function ON/OFF can be switched by performing the following operation.
1. Close all doors (door switch OFF) B
2. Ignition switch: OFF→ON
3. Press and hold the door lock and unlock switch for 5 seconds or more in the lock direction within 20 sec-
onds after turning the ignition switch ON. C
4. The switching complete when the hazard lamp blinks.

OFF → ON : 2 blinks D
ON → OFF : 1 blink

AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK FUNCTION (UNLOCK OPERATION) (MODELS WITH RE- E


MOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM EXCEPT FOR THAILAND)
The automatic door lock/unlock function is the function that unlocks all doors linked with the key position or
shift position. It has 3 types as follows.
F
IGN OFF Interlock Door Unlock
All doors are unlocked when the ignition position is changed from ON to OFF.
BCM outputs the unlock signal to all door lock actuators when it detects that the ignition position is changed
from ignition switch ON to OFF. G

Key Out Interlock Door Unlock


When ignition key is removed from ignition knob switch, all doors unlock. H
When BCM detects that ignition key is removed from ignition knob switch, BCM transmits unlock signal to all
door lock actuators.
P Range Interlock Door Unlock* I
All doors are unlocked when shifting the selector lever from any position other than the P to P position.
BCM outputs the unlock signal to all door lock actuators when it detects that the ignition switch is in the ON
position and the shift signal received from TCM via CAN communication is shifted from any position other than
the P to P position. J
*: This function does not operate on M/T models.
Setting Change Of Automatic Door Lock/unlock Function
The unlock operation setting of the automatic door lock/unlock function can be changed. DLK
With CONSULT
The ON/OFF switching of the automatic door lock/unlock function and the type selection of the automatic door
lock/unlock function can be performed at the WORK SUPPORT setting of CONSULT. L
Without CONSULT
The automatic door lock/unlock function ON/OFF can be switched by performing the following operation.
1. Close all doors (door switch OFF) M
2. Ignition switch: OFF→ON
3. Press and hold the door lock and unlock switch for 5 seconds or more in the unlock direction within 20
seconds after turning the ignition switch ON. N
4. The switching complete when the hazard lamp blinks.

OFF → ON : 2 blinks O
ON → OFF : 1 blink

Revision: 2012 July DLK-211 N17


POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
Circuit Diagram INFOID:0000000007080750

LHD MODELS

JMKIA9459GB

RHD MODELS

Revision: 2012 July DLK-212 N17


POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
Models Without Anti-hijack Function
A

DLK

JMKIA9460GB

Revision: 2012 July DLK-213 N17


POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
Models With Anti-hijack Function

JMKIA9461GB

Revision: 2012 July DLK-214 N17


REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
A
System Description INFOID:0000000006655226

System Diagram B

JMKIA9465GB

DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK OPERATION G


• When door lock and unlock button of keyfob is pressed, door lock and unlock signal transmits from keyfob to
BCM via remote keyless entry receiver.
• When BCM receives the door lock and unlock signal, it operates door lock actuator, brinks the hazard lamp H
at the same time as a reminder.
OPERATION CONDITION
If the following conditions are satisfied, door lock/unlock operation is performed if the keyfob is operated. I

Remote controller operation Operation condition


• Key switch is off J
Lock
• All doors are closed
Unlock Key switch is off
DLK
TRUNK OPEN FUNCTION
• When trunk button of the Keyfob is pressed, the trunk open signal is transmitted from the Keyfob to BCM via
remote keyless entry receiver. L
• When BCM receives the trunk open request signal, it operates the trunk lid opener actuator and opens the
trunk.
OPERATION CONDITION M

Remote controller operation Operation condition


• Press and hold the trunk open button for 0.4 second or more* N
Trunk open • Key switch is off
• Vehicle speed is less than 5 km/h (3 MPH)
*: Pattern of trunk open button can be selected using CONSULT. Refer to DLK-223, "MULTI REMOTE ENT : O
CONSULT Function (BCM - MULTI REMOTE ENT)".
OPERATION AREA
To ensure that the keyfob works effectively, use within 1 m (3 ft) range of each door, however the operable P
range may differ according to surroundings.
ANTI-HIJACK FUNCTION (INDIA PRODUCTION MODELS FOR GENERAL AREAS WITH RHD)
• When an LOCK signal is transmitted from keyfob, all doors are locked.
• When an UNLOCK signal is transmitted from keyfob once, driver side door is unlocked.
• Then, if an UNLOCK signal is transmitted from keyfob again, all other doors are unlocked.
How to change anti-hijack mode.
With CONSULT

Revision: 2012 July DLK-215 N17


REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
Anti-hijack mode can be set to ON or OFF using CONSULT.
Refer to DLK-222, "DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM - DOOR LOCK)".
Without CONSULT
• ON/OFF can be switched when keyfob lock button and unlock button are pressed simultaneously for 5 sec-
onds or more while steering lock is locked.
• When mode is switched, hazard warning lamp blinks.

OFF → ON : 1 blinks
ON → OFF : 3 blink

HAZARD REMINDER OPERATION (MODELS WITHOUT ANTI-HIJACK FUNCTION)


When door is locked or unlocked by keyfob, then BCM blinks hazard warning lamp as a reminder.

Remote controller operation Hazard lamp


Lock Blinks 1 time
Unlock Blinks 2 times

How to Change Hazard Reminder Mode


Refer to DLK-223, "MULTI REMOTE ENT : CONSULT Function (BCM - MULTI REMOTE ENT)".
HAZARD REMINDER OPERATION (MODELS WITH ANTI-HIJACK FUNCTION)
When door is locked or unlocked by keyfob, then BCM blinks hazard warning lamp as a reminder.
NOTE:
Hazard reminder mode can be changed with CONSULT. Refer to DLK-223, "MULTI REMOTE ENT : CON-
SULT Function (BCM - MULTI REMOTE ENT)".

Hazard reminder setting Door lock operation


Hazard warning lamp blink
(With CONSULT) (with keyfob)
MODE 1 — —
Lock —
MODE 2 Unlock Twice
Unlock (anti-hijack) Twice (quick)
HAZARD LAMP SET Lock Once
MODE 3
Unlock —
Lock Once
MODE 4 Unlock Twice
Unlock (anti-hijack) Twice (quick)

AUTO DOOR LOCK FUNCTION (MODELS WITHOUT ANTI-HIJACK FUNCTION)


After door is unlocked by keyfob button operation and if 30 seconds or more passes without performing the fol-
lowing operation, all doors are automatically locked. However, operation check function does not activate.

• Door switch is ON (door is open)


• Ignition key is inserted in key cylinder
Operating condition • Door lock/unlock switch is operated
• Keyfob is operated
• Door lock knob is operated
Auto door lock mode can be changed by the “AUTO LOCK SET” mode in “WORK SUPPORT”. Refer to DLK-
223, "MULTI REMOTE ENT : CONSULT Function (BCM - MULTI REMOTE ENT)".
AUTO DOOR LOCK FUNCTION (MODELS WITH ANTI-HIJACK FUNCTION)
After door is unlocked by keyfob button operation and if 30 seconds or more passes without performing the fol-
lowing operation, all doors are automatically locked. However, operation check function does not activate.

• Door switch is ON (door is open)


Operating condition • Door is locked
• Key switch is ON

Revision: 2012 July DLK-216 N17


REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
Auto door lock mode can be changed by the “AUTO LOCK SET” mode in “WORK SUPPORT”. Refer to DLK-
222, "DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM - DOOR LOCK)". A
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL FUNCTION
Interior room lamp is controlled according to door lock/unlock state, refer to INL-8, "INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description". B

PANIC ALARM FUNCTION


When key switch in the OFF position, BCM transmits horn reminder signal to IPDM E/R. Then, IPDM E/R
turns on and off horn intermittently. C
The horn sounds intermittently.
The alarm automatically turns off.
• After 25 seconds D
• When BCM receives any signal from Keyfob
How to Change Panic Alarm Operation Mode
Refer to DLK-223, "MULTI REMOTE ENT : CONSULT Function (BCM - MULTI REMOTE ENT)". E

DLK

Revision: 2012 July DLK-217 N17


REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
Circuit Diagram INFOID:0000000007080752

LHD MODELS

JMKIA9462GB

RHD MODELS

Revision: 2012 July DLK-218 N17


REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
Models Without Anti-hijack Function
A

DLK

JMKIA9412GB

Revision: 2012 July DLK-219 N17


REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
Models With Anti-hijack Function

JMKIA9463GB

Revision: 2012 July DLK-220 N17


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
A
COMMON ITEM
COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM - COMMON ITEM) INFOID:0000000007072791
B
APPLICATION ITEM
CONSULT performs the following functions via CAN communication with BCM.
C
Diagnosis mode Function Description
Work Support Changes the setting for each system function.
D
Self Diagnostic Result Displays the diagnosis results judged by BCM.
CAN Diag Support Monitor Monitors the reception status of CAN communication viewed from BCM.
Data Monitor The BCM input/output signals are displayed. E
Active Test The signals used to activate each device are forcibly supplied from BCM.
Ecu Identification The BCM part number is displayed.
• Read and save the vehicle specification. F
Configuration
• Write the vehicle specification when replacing BCM.

SYSTEM APPLICATION
G
BCM can perform the following functions for each system.
NOTE:
It can perform the diagnosis modes except the following for all sub system selection items.
×: Applicable item H
Diagnosis mode
System Sub system selection item
Work Support Data Monitor Active Test
I
Door lock DOOR LOCK × ×
Rear window defogger REAR DEFOGGER × ×
Warning chime BUZZER × × J
Interior room lamp control INT LAMP × × ×
Remote keyless entry system MULTI REMOTE ENT × × ×
Exterior lamp HEAD LAMP × × ×
DLK

Wiper and washer WIPER × × ×


Turn signal and hazard warning lamps FLASHER × × L
• Automatic air conditioning
AIR CONDITONER ×
• Manual air conditioning
Combination switch COMB SW × M
Body control system BCM ×
NATS IMMU ×
Interior room lamp battery saver BATTERY SAVER × × N
Trunk lid open TRUNK ×
Theft warning alarm THEFT ALM*1 × × O
— RETAINED PWR*2
Signal buffer system SIGNAL BUFFER × ×
P
Panic alarm PANIC ALARM ×

*1: For models without theft warning alarm this mode is not used.
*2: This item is displayed, but is not used.
DOOR LOCK

Revision: 2012 July DLK-221 N17


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM - DOOR LOCK) INFOID:0000000006655228

WORK SUPPORT

Monitor item Description


Anti-hijack function can be changed to operate with this mode
DOOR LOCK-UNLOCK SET*1*3 • On: Operate
• Off: Non-operation
Automatic door lock function mode can be selected from the following in this mode
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK SE- • VH SPD: All doors are locked when vehicle speed more than 10 km/h (6 MPH)
LECT*3 • P RANGE*: All doors are locked when shifting the selector lever from P position to other
than the P position
Automatic door unlock function mode can be selected from the following in the mode
• MODE 1: All doors are unlocked when the power supply position is changed from ON to
OFF
AUTOMATIC DOOR UNLOCK • MODE 2*2: All doors are unlocked when shifting the selector lever from any position other
than the P to P position
SELECT*3
• MODE 3: This item is displayed, but cannot be used
• MODE 4: This item is displayed, but cannot be used
• MODE 5: This item is displayed, but cannot be used
• MODE 6: All door are unlocked when ignition key removed from ignition key cylinder
Automatic door lock/unlock function mode can be selected from the following in this mode
AUTOMATIC LOCK/UNLOCK • Off: Non-operational
• Unlock Only: Door unlock operation only
SET*3 • Lock Only: Door lock operation only
• Lock/Unlock: Lock and unlock operation

*1: This item is displayed for models with anti-hijack function


*2: P range interlock door lock can be selected for M/T models, but automatic door lock/unlock function does not operate
*3: These items are not displayed for Thailand.

DATA MONITOR
NOTE:
The following table includes information (items) inapplicable to this vehicle. For information (items) applicable
to this vehicle, refer to CONSULT display items.

Monitor Item Contents


IGN ON SW Indicated [On/Off] condition of ignition switch in ON position
KEY ON SW Indicated [On/Off] condition of key switch
CDL LOCK SW Indicated [On/Off] condition of lock signal from door lock unlock switch
CDL UNLOCK SW Indicated [On/Off] condition of unlock signal from door lock unlock switch
DOOR SW-DR Indicated [On/Off] condition of front door switch (driver side)
DOOR SW-AS Indicated [On/Off] condition of front door switch (passenger side)
DOOR SW-RR Indicated [On/Off] condition of rear door switch RH
DOOR SW-RL Indicated [On/Off] condition of rear door switch LH
NOTE:
BACK DOOR SW
This item is indicated, but cannot be used
Indicated [On/Off] condition of driver side door
LOCK STATUS NOTE:
For models without remote keyless entry system, this item is indicated, but cannot be used
ACC ON SW Indicated [On/Off] condition of ignition switch in ACC position
KEYLESS LOCK Indicated [On/Off] condition of lock signal from key fob
KEYLESS UNLOCK Indicated [On/Off] condition of unlock signal from key fob

Revision: 2012 July DLK-222 N17


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
Monitor Item Contents
A
Indicates [Normal/On/Off] condition of circuit between BCM and air bag diagnosis sensor unit
• Normal: Ignition switch ON. (BCM is receiving normal condition signal from air bag diagnosis sensor
unit.)
SHOCK SENSOR • ON: During the receiving of air bag signal from air bag diagnosis sensor unit B
• OFF: After the receiving of air bag signal from air bag diagnosis sensor unit
NOTE:
For models for Thailand, this item is indicated, but cannot be used
Indicated [On/Off] condition of door key cylinder lock operation
C
KEY CYL LK-SW NOTE:
For models with remote keyless entry system, this item is indicated, but cannot be used
Indicated [On/Off] condition of door key cylinder unlock operation D
KEY CYL UN-SW NOTE:
For models with remote keyless entry system, this item is indicated, but cannot be used
VEHICLE SPEED Display the vehicle speed signal received from combination meter by numerical value [Km/h] E
ACTIVE TEST

Test item Description


F

This test is able to check door lock/unlock operation


DOOR LOCK • The all door lock actuators are locked when “ALL LOCK” on CONSULT screen is touched
• The all door lock actuators are unlocked when “ALL UNLK” on CONSULT screen is touched G

MULTI REMOTE ENT


MULTI REMOTE ENT : CONSULT Function (BCM - MULTI REMOTE ENT) H
INFOID:0000000006655229

WORK SUPPORT I

Test item Description


REMO CONT ID REGIST Keyfob ID code can be registered J
REMO CONT ID ERASUR Keyfob ID code can be erased
REMO CONT ID CONFIR It can be checked whether Intelligent Key ID code is registered or not in this mode
DLK
Hazard reminder function (hazard operation) mode can be changed in this mode
• MODE1: Non-operation
HAZARD LAMP SET • MODE2: Unlock operation only
• MODE3: Lock operation only L
• MODE4: Lock and unlock operation
Auto door lock time can be changed in this mode
• MODE 1: Non-operation M
• MODE 2: 30 sec.
• MODE 3: 1 minute
AUTO LOCK SET
• MODE 4: 2 minute
• MODE 5: 3 minute N
• MODE 6: 4 minute
• MODE 7: 5 minute
Panic alarm button pressing time on keyfob remote control button can be selected from the O
following with this mode
PANIC ALARM SET • MODE1: 0.5 sec.
• MODE2: Non-operation
• MODE3: 1.5 sec. P
Trunk button pressing time on keyfob remote control button can be selected from the following
with this mode
TRUNK OPEN SET • MODE1: 0.5 sec.
• MODE2: Non-operation
• MODE3: 1.5 sec.

DATA MONITOR

Revision: 2012 July DLK-223 N17


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
NOTE:
The following table includes information (items) inapplicable to this vehicle. For information (items) applicable
to this vehicle, refer to CONSULT display items.

Monitor Item Condition


IGN ON SW Indicates [On/Off] condition of ignition switch in ON position
KEY ON SW Indicates [On/Off] condition of key switch
ACC ON SW Indicates [On/Off] condition of ignition switch in ACC position
KEYLESS LOCK Indicates [On/Off] condition of lock signal from keyfob
KEYLESS UNLOCK Indicates [On/Off] condition of unlock signal from keyfob
KYLS TRNK/HAT Indicates [On/Off] condition of trunk open signal from keyfob
DOOR SW-DR Indicates [On/Off] condition of front door switch (driver side)
DOOR SW-AS Indicates [On/Off] condition of front door switch (passenger side)
DOOR SW-RR Indicates [On/Off] condition of rear door switch RH
DOOR SW-RL Indicates [On/Off] condition of rear door switch LH
NOTE:
BACK DOOR SW
This item is indicated, but not monitored
TRNK/HAT MNTR Indicates [On/Off] condition of trunk room lamp switch
CDL LOCK SW Indicates [On/Off] condition of door lock and unlock switch
CDL UNLOCK SW Indicates [On/Off] condition of door lock and unlock switch
KEYLESS PANIC Indicates [On/Off] condition of PANIC button of keyfob

ACTIVE TEST

Test item Description


This test is able to check door lock/unlock operation
• The all door lock actuators are locked when “ALL LCK” on CONSULT screen is touched
• The all door lock actuators are unlocked when “ALL UNLK” on CONSULT screen is touched
• The door lock actuator (driver side) is unlocked when “DR UNLK” on CONSULT screen is
DOOR LOCK
touched
• The door lock actuator (other) is unlocked when “OTR ULK” on CONSULT screen is
touched
• BD ULK: Non-operation
This test is able to check interior room lamp operation
INT LAMP • On: Operate
• Off: Non-operation
FLASHER This test is able to check flasher operation [LH/RH/Off]

TRUNK
TRUNK : CONSULT Function (BCM - TRUNK) INFOID:0000000006655230

DATA MONITOR
NOTE:
The following table includes information (items) inapplicable to this vehicle. For information (items) applicable
to this vehicle, refer to CONSULT display items.

Monitor Item Contents


KEY ON SW Indicates [On/Off] condition of key switch.
KYLS TRNK/HAT Indicates [On/Off] condition of trunk open signal from Keyfob
NOTE:
TRNK OPNR SW
This item is indicated, but not monitored.
NOTE:
LOCK STATUS
This item is indicated, but not monitored.

Revision: 2012 July DLK-224 N17


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
Monitor Item Contents
A
IGN ON SW Indicates [On/Off] condition of ignition switch.
VEHICLE SPEED Indicates [Km/h] condition of vehicle speed signal from combination meter.

PANIC ALARM B

PANIC ALARM : CONSULT Function (BCM - PANIC ALARM) INFOID:0000000006994254

C
ACTIVE TEST

Test item Description


D
This test is able to check horn operation. Horn is activated for 0.5 seconds after “ON” on
VEHICLE SECURITY HORN
CONSULT screen touched
HEAD LAMP (HI) Transmits the high beam request signal via CAN communication to turn the head lamp (HI) E

DLK

Revision: 2012 July DLK-225 N17


BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION


BCM
List of ECU Reference INFOID:0000000006655232

ECU Reference
BCS-115, "Reference Value"
BCS-129, "Fail-safe"
BCM
BCS-130, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart"
BCS-130, "DTC Index"

Revision: 2012 July DLK-226 N17


DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

WIRING DIAGRAM A
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
LHD
B
LHD : Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000006655233

For connector terminal arrangements, harness layouts, and alphabets in a (option abbreviation; if not C
described in wiring diagram), refer to GI-12, "Connector Information".

DLK

JRKWC1603GB

Revision: 2012 July DLK-227 N17


DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

JRKWC1604GB

RHD

Revision: 2012 July DLK-228 N17


DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
RHD : Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000007800038

A
For connector terminal arrangements, harness layouts, and alphabets in a (option abbreviation; if not
described in wiring diagram), refer to GI-12, "Connector Information".
B

DLK

JRKWC1608GB

Revision: 2012 July DLK-229 N17


DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

JRKWC1609GB

Revision: 2012 July DLK-230 N17


DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

BASIC INSPECTION A
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
Work Flow INFOID:0000000006655234
B

OVERALL SEQUENCE
C

DLK

JMKIA8652GB

DETAILED FLOW

Revision: 2012 July DLK-231 N17


DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

1.GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM


1. Get detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the condition and the environment when
the incident/malfunction occurs).
2. Check operation condition of the function that is malfunctioning.

>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC
1. Check DTC.
2. Perform the following procedure if DTC is detected.
- Record DTC and freeze frame data (Print them out using CONSULT.)
- Erase DTC.
- Study the relationship between the cause detected by DTC and the symptom described by the customer.
3. Check related service bulletins for information.
Are any symptoms described and any DTC detected?
Symptom is described, DTC is detected>>GO TO 3.
Symptom is described, DTC is not detected>>GO TO 4.
Symptom is not described, DTC is detected>>GO TO 5.
3.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer.
Also study the normal operation and fail-safe related to the symptom.
Verify relation between the symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected.

>> GO TO 5.
4.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer.
Verify relation between the symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected.

>> GO TO 6.
5.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE for the detected DTC, and then check that DTC is detected
again. At this time, always connect CONSULT to the vehicle, and check self diagnostic results in real time.
If two or more DTCs are detected, refer to BCS-130, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart" and determine trouble
diagnosis order.
NOTE:
• Freeze frame data is useful if the DTC is not detected.
• Perform Component Function Check if DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE is not included on Service
Manual. This simplified check procedure is an effective alternative though DTC cannot be detected during
this check.
If the result of Component Function Check is NG, it is the same as the detection of DTC by DTC CONFIR-
MATION PROCEDURE.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Check according to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
6.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM BY SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
Detect malfunctioning system according to SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS based on the confirmed symptom in step
4, and determine the trouble diagnosis order based on possible causes and symptom.
Is the symptom described?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Monitor input data from related sensors or check voltage of related module terminals using CON-
SULT.
7.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE
Revision: 2012 July DLK-232 N17
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
Inspect according to Diagnosis Procedure of the system.
Is malfunctioning part detected? A
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> Check according to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
8.REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PART B

1. Repair or replace the malfunctioning part.


2. Reconnect parts or connectors disconnected during Diagnosis Procedure again after repair and replace-
C
ment.
3. Check DTC. If DTC is detected, erase it.

D
>> GO TO 9.
9.FINAL CHECK
When DTC is detected in step 2, perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE again, and then check that the E
malfunction is repaired securely.
When symptom is described by the customer, refer to confirmed symptom in step 3 or 4, and check that the
symptom is not detected. F
Is DTC detected and does symptom remain?
YES-1 >> DTC is detected: GO TO 7.
YES-2 >> Symptom remains: GO TO 4. G
NO >> Before returning the vehicle to the customer, always erase DTC.

DLK

Revision: 2012 July DLK-233 N17


KEYFOB ID REGISTRATION
< BASIC INSPECTION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
KEYFOB ID REGISTRATION
Description INFOID:0000000006655237

Perform the following procedure after BCM is replaced or when new keyfob ID is registered
NOTE:
When registering the keyfob ID, perform only one procedure to simultaneously register both ID (IMMOBI-
LIZER ID and keyfob ID).
Work Procedure INFOID:0000000006655238

EXCEPT FOR INDIA PRODUCTION MODELS FOR GENERAL AREAS WITH RHD
1.STEP 1
Close all doors.

>> GO TO 2.
2.STEP 2
Perform lock operation by door lock/unlock switch or driver door lock knob.

>> GO TO 3.
3.STEP 3
1. Remove and insert the key into the ignition key 6 times within 10seconds (turning
the key switch from OFF to ON counts as 1 time).
2. All doors unlock automatically.
NOTE:
On the sixth key insertion, keep the key in the cylinder with the key switch ON.
Do all doors unlock automatically?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 1.
4.STEP 4
Turn ignition switch to ACC within 3 seconds after all doors unlock and perform lock operation by door lock/
unlock switch or driver door lock knob.

>> GO TO 5.
5.STEP 5
1. Press the lock or unlock button of the keyfob to be added.
2. All doors unlock simultaneously.
3. Key ID is registered.
Is key ID registered?
YES-1 >> When adding a keyfob: GO TO 6.
YES-2 >> When ending registration: GO TO 8.
NO >> GO TO 1.
6.STEP 6
Perform lock operation by door lock/unlock switch or driver door lock knob.

>> GO TO 7.
7.STEP 7
1. Press the lock or unlock button of the keyfob to be added.
2. All doors unlock simultaneously.
3. Key ID is registered.
Is key ID registered?

Revision: 2012 July DLK-234 N17


KEYFOB ID REGISTRATION
< BASIC INSPECTION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
YES-1 >> When adding a keyfob: GO TO 6.
YES-2 >> When ending registration: GO TO 8. A
NO >> GO TO 6.
8.STEP 8
B
Open any door.

>> REGISTRATION END


C
FOR INDIA PRODUCTION MODELS FOR GENERAL AREAS WITH RHD
1.STEP 1
D
Close all doors.

>> GO TO 2. E
2.STEP 2
Operate lock using the driver side door lock and unlock switch.
F

>> GO TO 3.
3.STEP 3 G
1. Remove and insert the key into the ignition key 6 times within 10seconds (turning the key switch from OFF
to ON counts as 1 time).
2. Hazard warning lamp blinks(2 times). H
NOTE:
On the sixth key insertion, keep the key in the cylinder with the key switch ON.
Does the hazard lamp blink? I
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 1.
4.STEP 4 J
Within 3 seconds after the hazard lamp blinks, turn ignition switch to the ACC position and operate lock using
the driver side door lock and unlock switch.
DLK
>> GO TO 5.
5.STEP 5 L
1. Press the lock or unlock button of the keyfob to be added.
2. All doors unlock simultaneously.
3. Hazard warning lamp blinks(2 times). M
4. Key ID is registered.
Is key ID registered?
YES-1 >> When adding a keyfob: GO TO 6. N
YES-2 >> When ending registration: GO TO 8.
NO >> GO TO 1.
6.STEP 6 O
Operate lock using the driver side door lock and unlock switch.

>> GO TO 7. P

7.STEP 7
1. Press the lock or unlock button of the keyfob to be added.
2. All doors unlock simultaneously.
3. Hazard warning lamp blinks(2 times).
4. Key ID is registered.
Is key ID registered?

Revision: 2012 July DLK-235 N17


KEYFOB ID REGISTRATION
< BASIC INSPECTION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
YES-1 >> When adding a keyfob: GO TO 6.
YES-2 >> When ending registration: GO TO 8.
NO >> GO TO 6.
8.STEP 8
Open the front door driver side.

>> REGISTRATION END

Revision: 2012 July DLK-236 N17


DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS A
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
DRIVER SIDE
B
DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007081877

1.CHECK FUNCTION C
1. Select “DOOR LOCK” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “DOOR LOCK” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
3. Touch “ALL LOCK” or “ALL UNLK” to check that it works normally. D
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Door lock actuator is OK.
NO >> Refer to DLK-237, "DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure". E

DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007081878

1.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR INPUT SIGNAL F

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.


2. Disconnect front door lock assembly (driver side) connector.
G
3. Check voltage between front door lock assembly (driver side) harness connector and ground.
LHD models
(+)
H
Front door lock assembly Voltage
(–) Condition
(driver side) (Approx.)
Connector Terminal I
1 Lock
D5 Ground Door lock and unlock switch 12 V
2 Unlock
J
RHD models
(+)
Front door lock assembly Voltage
(–) Condition DLK
(driver side) (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
5 Lock
D48 Ground Door lock and unlock switch 12 V L
6 Unlock
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace front door lock assembly (driver side). M
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR CIRCUIT
N
1. Disconnect BCM connector and all door lock actuator connector.
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and front door lock assembly (driver side) harness
connector.
O
LHD models
BCM Front door lock assembly (driver side)
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
P
65 1
M60 D5 Existed
66 2

Revision: 2012 July DLK-237 N17


DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
RHD models without anti-hijack function
BCM Front door lock assembly (driver side)
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
65 5
M60 D48 Existed
66 6

RHD models with anti-hijack function


BCM Front door lock assembly (driver side)
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
65 5
M60 D48 Existed
59 6
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.

BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
65
M60 Not existed
66
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
3.CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL
1. Connect BCM connector.
2. Check voltage between front door lock assembly (driver side) harness connector and ground.
Models without anti-hijack function
(+)
Voltage
BCM (–) Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
65 Lock
M60 Ground Door lock and unlock switch 12 V
66 Unlock

Models with anti-hijack function


(+)
Voltage
BCM (–) Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
65 Lock
M60 Ground Door lock and unlock switch 12 V
59 Unlock
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check for internal short of each door lock actuator.
NO >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
PASSENGER SIDE
PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007081879

1.CHECK FUNCTION
1. Select “DOOR LOCK” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “DOOR LOCK” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
3. Touch “ALL LOCK” or “ALL UNLK” to check that it works normally.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Door lock actuator is OK.
NO >> Refer to DLK-239, "PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".

Revision: 2012 July DLK-238 N17


DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007081880

A
1.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR INPUT SIGNAL
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect front door lock assembly (passenger side) connector. B
3. Check voltage between front door lock assembly (passenger side) harness connector and ground.
LHD models
(+) C
Front door lock assembly Voltage
(–) Condition
(passenger side) (Approx.)
D
Connector Terminal
5 Lock
D20 Ground Door lock and unlock switch 12 V
6 Unlock E
RHD models
(+)
Front door lock assembly Voltage F
(–) Condition
(passenger side) (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
1 Lock G
D43 Ground Door lock and unlock switch 12 V
2 Unlock
Is the inspection result normal? H
YES >> Replace front door lock assembly (passenger side).
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR CIRCUIT I
1. Disconnect BCM connector and all door lock actuator.
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and front door lock assembly (passenger side) har-
ness connector. J
LHD models
BCM Front door lock assembly (passenger side)
Continuity DLK
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
65 5
M60 D20 Existed
66 6 L
RHD models
BCM Front door lock assembly (passenger side)
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal M
65 1
M60 D43 Existed
66 2
N
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.

BCM
Continuity O
Connector Terminal
Ground
65
M60 Not existed
66 P
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
3.CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL
1. Connect BCM connector.
2. Check voltage between front door lock assembly (driver side) harness connector and ground.

Revision: 2012 July DLK-239 N17


DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

(+)
Voltage
BCM (–) Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
65 Lock
M60 Ground Door lock and unlock switch 12 V
66 Unlock
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check for internal short of each door lock actuator.
NO >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
REAR LH
REAR LH : Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007081881

1.CHECK FUNCTION
1. Select “DOOR LOCK” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “DOOR LOCK” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
3. Touch “ALL LOCK” or “ALL UNLK” to check that it works normally.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Door lock actuator is OK.
NO >> Refer to DLK-241, "REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure".
REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007081882

1.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR INPUT SIGNAL


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect rear door lock assembly LH connector.
3. Check voltage between rear door lock assembly LH harness connector and ground.

(+)
Voltage
Rear door lock assembly LH (–) Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
1 Lock
D38 Ground Door lock and unlock switch 12 V
2 Unlock
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace rear door lock assembly LH.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect BCM connector and all door lock actuator connector.
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and rear door lock assembly LH harness connector.

BCM Rear door lock assembly LH


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
65 1
M60 D38 Existed
66 2
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.

BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
65
M60 Not existed
66
Is the inspection result normal?

Revision: 2012 July DLK-240 N17


DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness. A
3.CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL
1. Connect BCM connector.
B
2. Check voltage between front door lock assembly (driver side) harness connector and ground.

(+)
BCM (–) Condition
Voltage C
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
65 Lock D
M60 Ground Door lock and unlock switch 12 V
66 Unlock
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check for internal short of each door lock actuator. E
NO >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
REAR RH
F
REAR RH : Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007081883

1.CHECK FUNCTION G
1. Select “DOOR LOCK” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “DOOR LOCK” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
3. Touch “ALL LOCK” or “ALL UNLK” to check that it works normally. H
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Door lock actuator is OK.
NO >> Refer to DLK-241, "REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure". I
REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007081884

1.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR INPUT SIGNAL J

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.


2. Disconnect rear door lock assembly RH connector.
3. Check voltage between rear door lock assembly RH harness connector and ground. DLK

(+)
Rear door lock assembly RH (–) Condition
Voltage L
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
5 Lock
D33 Ground Door lock and unlock switch 12 V M
6 Unlock
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace rear door lock assembly RH. N
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR CIRCUIT
O
1. Disconnect BCM connector and all door lock actuator connector.
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and rear door lock assembly RH harness connector.

BCM Rear door lock assembly RH P


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
65 5
M60 D33 Existed
66 6
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.

Revision: 2012 July DLK-241 N17


DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
65
M60 Not existed
66
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
3.CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL
1. Connect BCM connector.
2. Check voltage between front door lock assembly (driver side) harness connector and ground.

(+)
Voltage
BCM (–) Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
65 Lock
M60 Ground Door lock and unlock switch 12 V
66 Unlock
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check for internal short of each door lock actuator.
NO >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: 2012 July DLK-242 N17


DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH
A
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007081885

1.CHECK FUNCTION B
1. Select “DOOR LOCK” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “CDL LOCK SW”, “CDL UNLOCK SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
3. Check that the function operates normally according to the following conditions. C

Monitor item Condition Status


LOCK ON D
CDL LOCK SW
UNLOCK OFF
Door lock and unlock switch
LOCK OFF
CDL UNLOCK SW E
UNLOCK ON
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Door lock and unlock switch is OK. F
NO >> Refer to DLK-243, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007081886

G
1.CHECK DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect power window main switch connector. H
3. Check signal between power window main switch harness connector and ground using oscilloscope.
LHD models with rear power window
(+) I
Signal
Power window main switch (–)
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal
J
D3 6

DLK
Ground
D4 18
L
JPMIA0012GB

1.0 - 1.5 V

LHD models without rear power window M


(+)
Signal
Power window main switch (–)
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal N
6

D3 Ground
7
P
JPMIA0012GB

1.0 - 1.5 V

Revision: 2012 July DLK-243 N17


DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
RHD models with rear power window
(+)
Signal
Power window main switch (–)
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal
D17 6

Ground
D18 18

JPMIA0012GB

1.0 - 1.5 V

RHD models without rear power window


(+)
Signal
Power window main switch (–)
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal
6

D17 Ground
7

JPMIA0012GB

1.0 - 1.5 V
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect BCM connector.
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and power window main switch harness connector.
LHD models with rear power window
BCM Power window main switch
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
45 D4 18
M64 Existed
46 D3 6

LHD models without rear power window


BCM Power window main switch
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
45 7
M64 D3 Existed
46 6

RHD models with rear power window


BCM Power window main switch
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
45 D18 18
M64 Existed
46 D17 6

Revision: 2012 July DLK-244 N17


DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
RHD models without rear power window
BCM Power window main switch A
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
45 7
M64 D17 Existed B
46 6
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.
C
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
45 D
M64 Not existed
46
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation". E
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
3.CHECK DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH GROUND F
Check continuity between power window main switch harness connector and ground.
LHD models with rear power window
Power window main switch G
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
D4 17 Existed
H
LHD models without rear power window
Power window main switch
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
I
D3 15 Existed

RHD models with rear power window


Power window main switch J
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
D18 17 Existed
DLK
RHD models without rear power window
Power window main switch
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground L
D17 15 Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4. M
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
4.CHECK DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH N
Refer to DLK-245, "Component Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5. O
NO >> Replace power window main switch. Refer to PWC-57, "Removal and Installation".
5.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
P
Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".

>> INSPECTION END


Component Inspection INFOID:0000000007081887

1.CHECK DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH


Revision: 2012 July DLK-245 N17
DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect power window main switch (door lock and unlock switch) connector.
3. Check continuity between power window main switch (door lock and unlock switch) terminals.
Models with rear power window
Power window main switch
Condition Continuity
Terminal
LOCK Not existed
6
Door lock and unlock UNLOCK Existed
17
switch LOCK Existed
18
UNLOCK Not existed

Models without rear power window


Power window main switch
Condition Continuity
Terminal
LOCK Not existed
6
Door lock and unlock UNLOCK Existed
15
switch LOCK Existed
7
UNLOCK Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace power window main switch. Refer to PWC-57, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: 2012 July DLK-246 N17


DOOR SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
DOOR SWITCH
A
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007081888

1.CHECK FUNCTION B
1. Select “DOOR LOCK” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “DOOR SW-DR”, “DOOR SW-AS”, “DOOR SW-RL” and “DOOR SW-RR” in “DATA MONITOR”
mode. C
3. Check that the function operates normally according to the following conditions.

Monitor item Condition Status


D
Open ON
DOOR SW-DR Driver side door
Closed OFF
Open ON E
DOOR SW-AS Passenger side door
Closed OFF
Open ON
DOOR SW-RL Rear door LH F
Closed OFF
Open ON
DOOR SW-RR Rear door RH
Closed OFF G
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Door switch is OK.
NO >> Refer to DLK-247, "Diagnosis Procedure". H

Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007081889

I
1.CHECK DOOR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect malfunctioning door switch connector. J
3. Check signal between malfunctioning door switch harness connector and ground using oscilloscope.

(+)
Signal DLK
Door switch (–)
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal
Driver side B27 3 L
Passenger side B28 3
Rear LH B30 3
Ground M

Rear RH B29 3
PKIB4960J N
7.0 - 8.0 V
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Other doors: GO TO 3. O
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DOOR SWITCH CIRCUIT
P
1. Disconnect BCM connector.
2. Check continuity between door switch harness connector and BCM harness connector.

Revision: 2012 July DLK-247 N17


DOOR SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

Door switch BCM


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
Driver side B27 M64 47
Passenger side B28 M62 12
3 Existed
Rear LH B30 M64 48
Rear RH B29 M62 13
3. Check continuity between door switch harness connector and ground.

Door switch
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Driver side B27
Ground
Passenger side B28
3 Not existed
Rear LH B30
Rear RH B29
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
3.CHECK DOOR SWITCH
Refer to DLK-248, "Component Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace malfunctioning door switch.
4.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".

>> INSPECTION END


Component Inspection INFOID:0000000007081890

1.CHECK DOOR SWITCH


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect malfunctioning door switch connector.
3. Check continuity between door switch terminals.

Door switch
Condition Continuity
Terminal
Pressed Not existed
Driver side
Released Existed
Pressed Not existed
Passenger side
Ground part of door Released Existed
3 Door switch
switch Pressed Not existed
Rear LH
Released Existed
Pressed Not existed
Rear RH
Released Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace malfunction door switch.

Revision: 2012 July DLK-248 N17


DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH
A
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007795808

B
1.CHECK FUNCTION
1. Select “DOOR LOCK” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “KEY CYL LK-SW”, “KEY CYL UN-SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode. C
3. Check that the function operates normally according to the following conditions.

Monitor item Condition Status D


Lock ON
KEY CYL LK-SW
Neutral / Unlock OFF
Driver side door key cylinder E
Unlock ON
KEY CYL UN-SW
Neutral / Lock OFF
Is the inspection result normal? F
YES >> Door key cylinder switch is OK.
NO >> Refer to DLK-249, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007795809
G

1.CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL


H
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect door key cylinder switch connector.
3. Check voltage between door key cylinder switch harness connector and ground.
I
(+)
Voltage
Door key cylinder switch (–)
(Approx.)
J
Connector Terminal
1
D23 Ground 5V
3 DLK
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2. L
2.CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect BCM connector.
M
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and door key cylinder switch harness connector.

BCM Door key cylinder switch


Continuity N
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
8 1
M62 D23 Existed
31 3 O
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.

BCM P
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
8
M62 Not existed
31
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-147, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair or replace harness.

Revision: 2012 July DLK-249 N17


DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

3.CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT


Check continuity between door key cylinder switch harness connector and ground.

Door key cylinder switch


Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
D23 2 Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
4.CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH
Refer to DLK-250, "Component Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace door key cylinder switch.
5.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".

>> INSPECTION END


Component Inspection INFOID:0000000007795810

1.CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect door key cylinder switch connector.
3. Check continuity between door key cylinder switch terminals.

Door key cylinder switch


Condition Continuity
Terminal
Lock Existed
1
Neutral / Unlock Not existed
2 Driver side door key cylinder
Unlock Existed
3
Neutral / Lock Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace door key cylinder switch.

Revision: 2012 July DLK-250 N17


HAZARD FUNCTION
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
HAZARD FUNCTION
A
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000006655266

1.CHECK FUNCTION B
1. Select “MULTI REMOTE ENT” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “FLASHER” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
3. Touch “LH” or “RH” to check that it works normally. C
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Hazard warning lamp circuit is OK.
NO >> Refer to DLK-251, "Diagnosis Procedure". D
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000006655267

1.CHECK HAZARD SWITCH CIRCUIT E

Refer to EXL-70, "Component Function Check".


Is the inspection result normal? F
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace hazard warning switch circuit. Refer to EXL-93, "Removal and Installation".
2.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT G
Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".

H
>> INSPECTION END

DLK

Revision: 2012 July DLK-251 N17


KEY SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
KEY SWITCH
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000006655263

1.CHECK FUNCTION
1. Select “MULTI REMOTE ENT” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “KEY ON SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
3. Check that the function operates normally according to the following conditions.

Monitor item Condition Status


Inserted in key cylinder On
KEY ON SW Keyfob
Removed from key cylinder Off
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Key switch is OK.
NO >> Refer to DLK-252, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000006655264

1.CHECK FUSE
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check 10 A fuse (No.11).
Is fuse fusing?
YES >> Replace the blown fuse after repairing the affected circuit if a fuse is blown.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK KEY SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect key switch connector.
2. Check voltage between key switch harness connector and ground.

Key switch Voltage


Connector Terminal Ground (Approx.)

M88 2 Battery voltage


Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
3.CHECK KEY SWITCH CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect BCM connector.
2. Check continuity between key switch harness connector and BCM harness connector.

Key switch BCM


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M88 1 M62 37 Existed
3. Check continuity between key switch connector and ground.

Key switch
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M88 1 Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4
NO >> Repair or replace harness.

Revision: 2012 July DLK-252 N17


KEY SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

4.CHECK KEY SWITCH A


Refer to DLK-253, "Component Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5. B
NO >> Replace key switch.
5.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
C
Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".

>> INSPECTION END D


Component Inspection INFOID:0000000006655265

COMPONENT INSPECTION E
1.CHECK KEY SWITCH
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. F
2. Disconnect key switch connector.
3. Check continuity between key switch terminals.

Key switch G
Condition Continuity
Terminal
Inserted in key cylinder Existed H
1 2 Keyfob
Removed from key cylinder Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END I
NO >> Replace key switch.

DLK

Revision: 2012 July DLK-253 N17


KEYFOB BATTERY
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
KEYFOB BATTERY
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000006655268

1.CHECK FUNCTION
Check door lock and unlock operation with keyfob button.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Keyfob is OK.
NO >> Refer to DLK-254, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000006655269

1.CHECK KEYFOB BATTERY


Check by connecting a resistance (approximately 300 Ω) so that the
current value becomes about 10 mA.

Standard : Approx. 2.5 - 3.0 V


Is the measurement value within the specification?
YES >> Replace keyfob.
NO >> Replace keyfob battery. Refer to DLK-349, "Removal
and Installation".

OCC0607D

Revision: 2012 July DLK-254 N17


REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER
A
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007081891

1.CHECK FUNCTION B
1. Select “DOOR LOCK” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “KEYLESS ” or “KEYLESS UNLOCK” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
3. Check that the function operates normally according to the following conditions. C

Monitor item Condition Status


LOCK On D
KEYLESS LOCK
UNLOCK Off
Keyfob button
LOCK Off
KEYLESS UNLOCK E
UNLOCK On
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Remote keyless entry receiver is OK. F
NO >> Refer to DLK-255, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007081892

G
1.CHECK BCM SIGNAL 1
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect remote keyless entry receiver connector. H
3. Check voltage between remote keyless entry receiver harness connector and ground.
Except for Hong Kong
(+) I
Voltage (V)
Remote keyless entry receiver (–)
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
J
M67 4 Ground 5

For Hong Kong


(+) DLK
Voltage (V)
Remote keyless entry receiver (–)
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
L
R14 4 Ground 5
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3. M
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect BCM connector. N
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and remote keyless entry receiver harness connector.
Except for Hong Kong
BCM Remote keyless entry receiver O
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M59 19 M67 4 Existed
P
For Hong Kong
BCM Remote keyless entry receiver
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M59 19 R14 4 Existed
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.

Revision: 2012 July DLK-255 N17


REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M59 19 Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-147, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
3.CHECK REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER POWER SUPPLY
1. Reconnect remote keyless entry receiver connector.
2. Check signal between remote keyless entry receiver harness connector and ground using oscilloscope.
Except for Hong Kong
(+)
Signal
Remote keyless entry receiver (–)
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal

M67 4 Ground

JMKIA3838GB

For Hong Kong


(+)
Signal
Remote keyless entry receiver (–)
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal

R14 4 Ground

JMKIA3838GB

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> GO TO 4.
NO-1 (Except for Hong Kong)>>Replace remote keyless entry receiver. Refer to DLK-348, "Removal and
Installation".
NO-2 (For Hong Kong)>>Replace inside mirror. Refer to MIR-15, "Removal and Installation".
4.CHECK REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect BCM connector.
2. Disconnect remote keyless entry receiver connector.
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and remote keyless entry receiver harness connector.
Except for Hong Kong
BCM Remote keyless entry receiver
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M59 18 M67 1 Existed

For Hong Kong


BCM Remote keyless entry receiver
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M59 18 R14 1 Existed

Revision: 2012 July DLK-256 N17


REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
4. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.
A
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M59 18 Not existed B
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
C
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
5.CHECK BCM SIGNAL 2
1. Reconnect BCM connector. D
2. Check voltage between remote keyless entry receiver harness connector and ground.
Except for Hong Kong
(+) E
Voltage (V)
Remote keyless entry receiver (–)
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
F
M67 2 Ground 5

For Hong Kong


(+) G
Voltage (V)
Remote keyless entry receiver (–)
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
R14 2 Ground 5
H

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> GO TO 7. I
NO >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect BCM connector. J
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and remote keyless entry receiver harness connector.
Except for Hong Kong
BCM Remote keyless entry receiver DLK
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M59 20 M67 2 Existed
L
For Hong Kong
BCM Remote keyless entry receiver
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal M
M59 20 R14 2 Existed
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.
N
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
O
M59 20 Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-147, "Removal and Installation". P
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
7.CHECK REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER SIGNAL
1. Reconnect remote keyless entry receiver connector.
2. Check signal between remote keyless entry receiver harness connector and ground using oscilloscope.

Revision: 2012 July DLK-257 N17


REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
Except for Hong Kong
(+)
Signal
Remote keyless entry receiver (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal

During waiting

JMKIA0064GB
M67 2 Ground

When operating
either button on
the Intelligent Key

JMKIA0065GB

For Hong Kong


(+)
Signal
Remote keyless entry receiver (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal

During waiting

JMKIA0064GB
R14 2 Ground

When operating
either button on
the Intelligent Key

JMKIA0065GB

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> GO TO 8.
NO-1 (Except for Hong Kong)>>Replace remote keyless entry receiver. Refer to DLK-348, "Removal and
Installation".
NO-2 (For Hong Kong)>>Replace inside mirror. Refer to MIR-15, "Removal and Installation".
8.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".

>> INSPECTION END

Revision: 2012 July DLK-258 N17


TRUNK ROOM LAMP SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
TRUNK ROOM LAMP SWITCH
A
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007080699

1.CHECK FUNCTION B
1. Select “TRUNK” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “TRNK/HAT MNTR” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
3. Check that the function operates normally according to the following conditions. C

Monitor item Condition Status


Open On D
TRNK/HAT MNTR Trunk lid
Closed Off
Is the inspection result normal?
E
YES >> Trunk room lamp switch is OK.
NO >> Refer to DLK-260, "Component Inspection".
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007080700
F

1.CHECK TRUNK ROOM LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL


1. Turn ignition switch OFF. G
2. Disconnect trunk lid lock assembly connector.
3. Check signal between trunk lid lock assembly harness connector and ground using oscilloscope.
H
(+)
Signal
Trunk lid lock assembly (–)
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal I

J
B24 1 Ground

DLK
PKIB4960J

Is the inspection result normal?


L
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK TRUNK ROOM LAMP SWITCH CIRCUIT M
1. Disconnect BCM connector.
2. Check continuity between BCM connector and trunk lid lock assembly connector.
N
BCM Trunk lid lock assembly
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M64 42 B24 1 Existed O
3. Check continuity between BCM connector and ground.

BCM P
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M64 42 Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-147, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair or replace harness.

Revision: 2012 July DLK-259 N17


TRUNK ROOM LAMP SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

3.CHECK TRUNK ROOM LAMP SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT


Check continuity between trunk lid lock assembly connector and ground.

Trunk lid lock assembly


Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
B24 2 Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
4.CHECK TRUNK ROOM LAMP SWITCH
Refer to DLK-260, "Component Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace trunk lid lock assembly.
5.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".

>> INSPECTION END


Component Inspection INFOID:0000000007080701

1.CHECK TRUNK ROOM LAMP SWITCH


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect trunk lid lock assembly connector.
3. Check continuing between trunk room lamp switch terminal.

Trunk lid lock assembly


Condition Continuity
Terminal
Lock Existed
1 2 Trunk lid lock assembly
Unlock Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace trunk lid lock assembly.

Revision: 2012 July DLK-260 N17


TRUNK LID OPENER ACTUATOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
TRUNK LID OPENER ACTUATOR
A
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007080695

1.CHECK TRUNK LID OPENER INPUT SIGNAL B


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect trunk lid lock assembly connector.
3. Check voltage between trunk lid lock assembly harness connector and ground. C

(+)
Voltage
Trunk lid lock assembly (–) Condition
(Approx.)
D
Connector Terminal
B24 3 Ground Trunk lid opener switch is ON 12 V
E
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
F
2.CHECK TRUNK LID OPENER ACTUATOR CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect BCM connector.
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and trunk lid lock assembly harness connector. G

BCM Trunk lid lock assembly


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal H
M64 53 B24 3 Existed
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.
I
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
J
M64 53 Not existed

Is the inspection result normal? DLK


YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-147, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
3.CHECK TRUNK LID OPENER ACTUATOR GROUND CIRCUIT L
Check continuity between trunk lid lock assembly harness connector and ground.

Trunk lid lock assembly M


Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
B24 2 Existed
N
Is the inspection normal?
YES >> Replace trunk lid lock assembly.
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
O

Revision: 2012 July DLK-261 N17


UNLOCK SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
UNLOCK SENSOR
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007094956

1.CHECK FUNCTION
1. Select “DOOR LOCK” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “LOCK STATUS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
3. Check that the function operates normally according to the following conditions.

Monitor item Condition Status


Lock OFF
LOCK STATUS Driver side door
Unlock ON
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Unlock sensor is OK.
NO >> Refer to DLK-262, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007081894

1.CHECK UNLOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect front door lock assembly (driver side) connector.
3. Check signal between front door lock assembly (driver side) harness connector and ground with oscillo-
scope.
LHD models
(+)
Signal
Front door lock assembly (driver side) (–)
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal

D5 3 Ground

PKIB4960J

RHD models
(+)
Signal
Front door lock assembly (driver side) (–)
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal

D48 4 Ground

PKIB4960J

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK UNLOCK SENSOR CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect BCM connector.
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and front door lock assembly (driver side) harness
connector.

Revision: 2012 July DLK-262 N17


UNLOCK SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
LHD models
BCM Front door lock assembly (driver side) A
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M62 7 D5 3 Existed
B
RHD models
BCM Front door lock assembly (driver side)
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
C
M62 7 D48 4 Existed
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.
D
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M62 7 Not existed E
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
F
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
3.CHECK UNLOCK SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between front door lock assembly (driver side) harness connector and ground. G
LHD models
Front door lock assembly (driver side)
Continuity H
Connector Terminal Ground
D5 4 Existed

RHD models I
Front door lock assembly (driver side)
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
D48 3 Existed J
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace harness. DLK

4.CHECK UNLOCK SENSOR


Refer to DLK-263, "Component Inspection". L
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace front door lock assembly (driver side). M
5.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
N

>> INSPECTION END


Component Inspection INFOID:0000000007081895
O

1.CHECK UNLOCK SENSOR


P
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect front door lock assembly (driver side) connector.
3. Check continuity between front door lock assembly (driver side) terminals.

Revision: 2012 July DLK-263 N17


UNLOCK SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

Front door lock assembly (driver side)


Condition Continuity
Terminal
Unlock Existed
3 4 Driver side door
Lock Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace front door lock assembly (driver side).

Revision: 2012 July DLK-264 N17


DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS A
DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK
SWITCH
B
ALL DOOR
ALL DOOR : Description INFOID:0000000006655270
C
All doors do not lock/unlock using door lock and unlock switch.
ALL DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000006655271
D

Other than India production models for General area with RHD
1.CHECK DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH E
Check door lock and unlock switch.
Refer to DLK-243, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal? F
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
2.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR G

Check front door lock assembly (driver side).


Refer to DLK-237, "DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check". H
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. I
3.REPLACE BCM
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-147, "Removal and Installation".
2. Confirm the operation after replacement. J
Is the result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". DLK

India production models for General area with RHD


1.CHECK DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH L
Check door lock and unlock switch.
Refer to DLK-243, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal? M
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
N
2.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
Check front door lock assembly (driver side).
Refer to DLK-237, "DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check". O
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. P
3.CHECK DOOR SWITCH
Check door switch.
Refer to DLK-247, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

Revision: 2012 July DLK-265 N17


DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

4.CHECK KEY SWITCH


Check key switch.
Refer to DLK-252, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
5.REPLACE BCM
1. Replace BCM.
Refer to BCS-147, "Removal and Installation".
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
DRIVER SIDE
DRIVER SIDE : Description INFOID:0000000006655272

Driver side door does not lock/unlock using door lock and unlock switch.
DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000006655273

1.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR


Check front door lock assembly (driver side).
Refer to DLK-237, "DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
2.REPLACE BCM
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-147, "Removal and Installation".
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
PASSENGER SIDE
PASSENGER SIDE : Description INFOID:0000000006655274

Passenger side door does not lock/unlock using door lock and unlock switch.
PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000006655275

1.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR


Check front door lock assembly (passenger side).
Refer to DLK-238, "PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
2.REPLACE BCM
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-147, "Removal and Installation".
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".

Revision: 2012 July DLK-266 N17


DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
REAR LH
A
REAR LH : Description INFOID:0000000006655276

Rear LH side door does not lock/unlock using door lock and unlock switch. B
REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000006655277

1.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR C


Check rear door lock assembly LH.
Refer to DLK-240, "REAR LH : Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal? D
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
E
2.REPLACE BCM
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-147, "Removal and Installation".
2. Confirm the operation after replacement. F
Is the result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". G
REAR RH
REAR RH : Description INFOID:0000000006655278
H
Rear RH side door does not lock/unlock using door lock and unlock switch.
REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000006655279
I

1.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR


Check rear door lock assembly RH J
Refer to DLK-241, "REAR RH : Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2. DLK
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
2.REPLACE BCM
L
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-147, "Removal and Installation".
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
M
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".

Revision: 2012 July DLK-267 N17


DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH DRIVER SIDE DOOR LOCK KNOB OR
DOOR KEY CYLINDER
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH DRIVER SIDE DOOR LOCK
KNOB OR DOOR KEY CYLINDER
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000006655283

1.CHECK POWER DOOR LOCK OPERATION


Check power door lock operation.
Does door lock/unlock with door lock and unlock switch?
YES-1 >> Except RHD models without remote keyless entry system: GO TO 2.
YES-2 >> RHD models without remote keyless entry system: GO TO 3.
NO >> Refer to DLK-265, "ALL DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure".
2.CHECK UNLOCK SENSOR
Check unlock sensor.
Refer to DLK-262, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
3.CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH
Check door key cylinder switch.
Refer to DLK-249, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
4.REPLACE BCM
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-147, "Removal and Installation".
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".

Revision: 2012 July DLK-268 N17


DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH KEYFOB
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH KEYFOB
A
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000006655286

1.CHECK POWER DOOR LOCK OPERATION B


Check power door lock operation.
Does door lock/unlock with door lock and unlock switch?
C
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Go to DLK-265, "ALL DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure".
2.CHECK REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER D
Check remote keyless entry receiver.
Refer to DLK-255, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal? E
YES-1 (Other than India production models for General area with RHD)>>GO TO 3.
YES-2 (India production models for General area with RHD)>>GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. F
3.CHECK DOOR SWITCH
Check door switch.
Refer to DLK-247, "Component Function Check". G
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. H
4.CHECK KEYFOB BATTERY
Check keyfob battery. I
Refer to DLK-254, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5. J
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
5.REPLACE BCM
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-147, "Removal and Installation". DLK
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
L
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".

Revision: 2012 July DLK-269 N17


TRUNK LID DOES NOT OPEN
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
TRUNK LID DOES NOT OPEN
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY : Description INFOID:0000000007081702

Trunk lid does not open by remote keyless entry remote operation.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007081703

1.CHECK REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION


Check remote keyless entry function.
Does door lock/unlock with remote keyless button?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Refer to DLK-255, "Diagnosis Procedure".
2.CHECK KEYFOB
Check Keyfob.
Refer to DLK-254, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
3.REPLACE BCM
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-147, "Removal and Installation".
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".

Revision: 2012 July DLK-270 N17


AUTO DOOR LOCK OPERATION DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
AUTO DOOR LOCK OPERATION DOES NOT OPERATE
A
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000006655287

1.CHECK “AUTO LOCK SET” SETTING WITH CONSULT B


1. Select “MULTI REMOTE ENT” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “AUTO LOCK SET” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
3. Check “AUTO LOCK SET” setting in “WORK SUPPORT”. C
Refer to DLK-223, "MULTI REMOTE ENT : CONSULT Function (BCM - MULTI REMOTE ENT)".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2. D
NO >> Set “MODE 2”, “MODE 3”, “MODE 4”, “MODE 5”, “MODE 6” or “MODE 7” in “AUTO LOCK SET”.
2.REPLACE BCM
E
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
F
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".

DLK

Revision: 2012 July DLK-271 N17


ANTI-HIJACK FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
ANTI-HIJACK FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000008035212

1.CHECK “DOOR LOCK–UNLOCK SET” SETTING IN “WORK SUPPORT”


1. Select “DOOR LOCK” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “DOOR LOCK-UNLOCK SET” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
3. Check “DOOR LOCK-UNLOCK SET” in “WORK SUPPORT”
Refer to DLK-222, "DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM - DOOR LOCK)".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2
NO >> Set “DOOR LOCK-UNLOCK SET” in “WORK SUPPORT”
2.REPLACE BCM
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-147, "Removal and Installation".
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".

Revision: 2012 July DLK-272 N17


UNLOCK LINK FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
UNLOCK LINK FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
A
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000008035214

1.REPLACE BCM B
• Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-147, "Removal and Installation".
• Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal? C
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
D

DLK

Revision: 2012 July DLK-273 N17


VEHICLE SPEED SENSING AUTO LOCK OPERATION DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
VEHICLE SPEED SENSING AUTO LOCK OPERATION DOES NOT OPER-
ATE
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000006655288

1.CHECK “AUTOMATIC LOCK/UNLOCK SELECT” SETTING IN “WORK SUPPORT”


1. Select “DOOR LOCK” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “AUTOMATIC LOCK/UNLOCK SELECT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
3. Check “AUTOMATIC LOCK/UNLOCK SELECT” setting in “WORK SUPPORT”.
Refer to DLK-222, "DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM - DOOR LOCK)".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Set “Lock Only” or “Lock/Unlock” in “WORK SUPPORT”.
2.CHECK “AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK SELECT” SETTING IN “WORK SUPPORT”
1. Select “DOOR LOCK” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK SELECT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
3. Check “AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK SELECT” setting in “WORK SUPPORT”.
Refer to DLK-222, "DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM - DOOR LOCK)".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Set “VH SPD” in “AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK SELECT”.
3.REPLACE BCM
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".

Revision: 2012 July DLK-274 N17


IGN OFF INTERLOCK DOOR UNLOCK FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
IGN OFF INTERLOCK DOOR UNLOCK FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
A
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000006655289

1.CHECK “AUTOMATIC LOCK/UNLOCK SELECT” SETTING IN “WORK SUPPORT” B


1. Select “DOOR LOCK” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “AUTOMATIC LOCK/UNLOCK SELECT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
3. Check “AUTOMATIC LOCK/UNLOCK SELECT” setting in “WORK SUPPORT”. C
Refer to DLK-222, "DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM - DOOR LOCK)".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2. D
NO >> Set “Unlock Only” or “Lock/Unlock” in “AUTOMATIC LOCK/UNLOCK SELECT”.
2.CHECK “AUTOMATIC DOOR UNLOCK SELECT” SETTING IN “WORK SUPPORT”
E
1. Select “DOOR LOCK” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “AUTOMATIC DOOR UNLOCK SELECT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
3. Check “AUTOMATIC DOOR UNLOCK SELECT” setting in “WORK SUPPORT”.
Refer to DLK-222, "DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM - DOOR LOCK)". F
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Set “MODE 1” or “MODE 3” in “AUTOMATIC DOOR UNLOCK SELECT”. G
3.REPLACE BCM
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation". H
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END I
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".

DLK

Revision: 2012 July DLK-275 N17


P RANGE INTERLOCK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK FUNCTION DOES NOT OPER-
ATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
P RANGE INTERLOCK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK FUNCTION DOES NOT OP-
ERATE
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000008035213

1.CHECK “AUTOMATIC LOCK/UNLOCK SELECT” SETTING IN “WORK SUPPORT”


1. Select “DOOR LOCK” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “AUTOMATIC LOCK/UNLOCK SELECT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
3. Check “AUTOMATIC LOCK/UNLOCK SELECT” setting in “WORK SUPPORT”.
Refer to DLK-222, "DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM - DOOR LOCK)".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Set “Unlock Only”, “Lock Only” or “Lock/Unlock” in “AUTOMATIC LOCK/UNLOCK SELECT”.
2.CHECK “AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK SELECT” SETTING IN “WORK SUPPORT”
1. Select “DOOR LOCK” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK SELECT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
3. Check “AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK SELECT” setting in “WORK SUPPORT”.
Refer to DLK-222, "DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM - DOOR LOCK)".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Set “P RANGE” in “AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK SELECT”.
3.CHECK “AUTOMATIC DOOR UNLOCK SELECT” SETTING IN “WORK SUPPORT”
1. Select “DOOR LOCK” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “AUTOMATIC DOOR UNLOCK SELECT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
3. Check “AUTOMATIC DOOR UNLOCK SELECT” setting in “WORK SUPPORT”.
Refer to DLK-222, "DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM - DOOR LOCK)".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Set “MODE 2” or “MODE 4” in “AUTOMATIC DOOR UNLOCK SELECT”.
4.REPLACE BCM
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-147, "Removal and Installation".
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".

Revision: 2012 July DLK-276 N17


KEY OUT INTERLOCK DOOR UNLOCK FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
KEY OUT INTERLOCK DOOR UNLOCK FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
A
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000006655290

1.CHECK “AUTOMATIC LOCK/UNLOCK SELECT” SETTING IN “WORK SUPPORT” B


1. Select “DOOR LOCK” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “AUTOMATIC LOCK/UNLOCK SELECT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
3. Check “AUTOMATIC LOCK/UNLOCK SELECT” setting in “WORK SUPPORT”. C
Refer to DLK-222, "DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM - DOOR LOCK)".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2. D
NO >> Set “Unlock Only” or “Lock/Unlock” in “AUTOMATIC LOCK/UNLOCK SELECT”.
2.CHECK “AUTOMATIC DOOR UNLOCK SELECT” SETTING IN “WORK SUPPORT”
E
1. Select “DOOR LOCK” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “AUTOMATIC DOOR UNLOCK SELECT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
3. Check “AUTOMATIC DOOR UNLOCK SELECT” setting in “WORK SUPPORT”.
Refer to DLK-222, "DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM - DOOR LOCK)". F
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Set “MODE 5” or “MODE 6” in “AUTOMATIC DOOR UNLOCK SELECT”. G
3.CHECK KEY SWITCH
Check key switch. H
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. I
4.REPLACE BCM
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
2. Confirm the operation after replacement. J
Is the result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". DLK

Revision: 2012 July DLK-277 N17


KEY REMINDER FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
KEY REMINDER FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000006655291

1.CHECK KEY SWITCH


Check key switch.
Refer to DLK-252, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
2.CHECK DRIVER SIDE DOOR SWITCH
Check driver side door switch.
Refer to DLK-247, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
3.REPLACE BCM
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-147, "Removal and Installation".
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".

Revision: 2012 July DLK-278 N17


HAZARD REMINDER OPERATION DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
HAZARD REMINDER OPERATION DOES NOT OPERATE
A
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000006655292

1.CHECK “HAZARD LAMP SET” SETTING IN “WORK SUPPORT” B


1. Select “MULTI REMOTE ENT” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “HAZARD LAMP SET” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
3. Check “HAZARD LAMP SET” setting in “WORK SUPPORT”. C
Refer to DLK-223, "MULTI REMOTE ENT : CONSULT Function (BCM - MULTI REMOTE ENT)".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2. D
NO >> Set “MODE 2”, “MODE 3” or “MODE 4” in “HAZARD LAMP SET”.
2.CHECK HAZARD WARNING LAMP
E
Check hazard warning lamp.
Refer to DLK-251, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
F
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
3.REPLACE BCM G
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal? H
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
I

DLK

Revision: 2012 July DLK-279 N17


PANIC ALARM FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
PANIC ALARM FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000006655293

1.CHECK REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION


Check remote keyless entry function.
Does door lock/unlock with keyfob button?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Refer to DLK-269, "Diagnosis Procedure".
2.CHECK HORN OPERATION
1. Select “IPDM E/R” using CONSULT.
2. Select “HORN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
3. Touch “On” to check that it works normally.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
3.CHECK “PANIC ALARM SET” SETTING IN “WORK SUPPORT”
1. Select “MULTI REMOTE ENT” of “BCM”.
2. Select “PANIC ALARM SET” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
3. Check “PANIC ALARM SET” setting in “WORK SUPPORT”.
Refer to DLK-223, "MULTI REMOTE ENT : CONSULT Function (BCM - MULTI REMOTE ENT)".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Set “MODE 1” or “MODE 3” in “PANIC ALARM SET”
4.REPLACE BCM
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".

Revision: 2012 July DLK-280 N17


SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
A
Work Flow INFOID:0000000006655294

SBT842

G
CUSTOMER INTERVIEW
Interview the customer if possible, to determine the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. Use the Diag-
nostic Worksheet during the interview to document the facts and conditions when the noise occurs and any of H
the customer's comments; refer to DLK-285, "Diagnostic Worksheet". This information is necessary to dupli-
cate the conditions that exist when the noise occurs.
• The customer may not be able to provide a detailed description or the location of the noise. Attempt to obtain
all the facts and conditions that exist when the noise occurs (or does not occur). I
• If there is more than one noise in the vehicle, be sure to diagnose and repair the noise that the customer is
concerned about. This can be accomplished by a test drive with the customer.
• After identifying the type of noise, isolate the noise in terms of its characteristics. The noise characteristics J
are provided so the customer, service adviser and technician are all speaking the same language when
defining the noise.
• Squeak – (Like tennis shoes on a clean floor)
DLK
Squeak characteristics include the light contact/fast movement/brought on by road conditions/hard surfaces
= higher pitch noise/softer surfaces = lower pitch noises/edge to surface = chirping
• Creak – (Like walking on an old wooden floor)
Creak characteristics include firm contact/slow movement/twisting with a rotational movement/pitch depen- L
dent on materials/often brought on by activity.
• Rattle – (Like shaking a baby rattle)
Rattle characteristics include the fast repeated contact/vibration or similar movement/loose parts/missing M
clip or fastener/incorrect clearance.
• Knock – (Like a knock on a door)
Knock characteristics include hollow sounding/sometimes repeating/often brought on by driver action.
• Tick – (Like a clock second hand) N
Tick characteristics include gentle contacting of light materials/loose components/can be caused by driver
action or road conditions.
• Thump – (Heavy, muffled knock noise) O
Thump characteristics include softer knock/dead sound often brought on by activity.
• Buzz – (Like a bumble bee)
Buzz characteristics include high frequency rattle/firm contact.
• Often the degree of acceptable noise level will vary depending upon the person. A noise that you may judge P
as acceptable may be very irritating to the customer.
• Weather conditions, especially humidity and temperature, may have a great effect on noise level.
DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE
If possible, drive the vehicle with the customer until the noise is duplicated. Note any additional information on
the Diagnostic Worksheet regarding the conditions or location of the noise. This information can be used to
duplicate the same conditions when you confirm the repair.

Revision: 2012 July DLK-281 N17


SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
If the noise can be duplicated easily during the test drive, to help identify the source of the noise, try to dupli-
cate the noise with the vehicle stopped by doing one or all of the following:
1) Close a door.
2) Tap or push/pull around the area where the noise appears to be coming from.
3) Rev the engine.
4) Use a floor jack to recreate vehicle “twist”.
5) At idle, apply engine load (electrical load, half-clutch on M/T model, drive position on A/T model).
6) Raise the vehicle on a hoist and hit a tire with a rubber hammer.
• Drive the vehicle and attempt to duplicate the conditions the customer states exist when the noise occurs.
• If it is difficult to duplicate the noise, drive the vehicle slowly on an undulating or rough road to stress the
vehicle body.
LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE
1. Narrow down the noise to a general area. To help pinpoint the source of the noise, use a listening tool
(Engine Ear or mechanics stethoscope).
2. Narrow down the noise to a more specific area and identify the cause of the noise by:
• removing the components in the area that you suspect the noise is coming from.
Do not use too much force when removing clips and fasteners, otherwise clips and fastener can be broken
or lost during the repair, resulting in the creation of new noise.
• tapping or pushing/pulling the component that you suspect is causing the noise.
Do not tap or push/pull the component with excessive force, otherwise the noise will be eliminated only tem-
porarily.
• feeling for a vibration with your hand by touching the component(s) that you suspect is (are) causing the
noise.
• placing a piece of paper between components that you suspect are causing the noise.
• looking for loose components and contact marks.
Refer to DLK-283, "Inspection Procedure".
REPAIR THE CAUSE
• If the cause is a loose component, tighten the component securely.
• If the cause is insufficient clearance between components:
- separate components by repositioning or loosening and retightening the component, if possible.
- insulate components with a suitable insulator such as urethane pads, foam blocks, felt cloth tape or urethane
tape are available through your authorized Nissan Parts Department.
CAUTION:
Do not use excessive force as many components are constructed of plastic and may be damaged.
NOTE:
• URETHANE PADS
Insulates connectors, harness, etc.
• INSULATOR (Foam blocks)
Insulates components from contact. Can be used to fill space behind a panel.
• INSULATOR (Light foam block)
• FELT CLOTHTAPE
Used to insulate where movement does not occur. Ideal for instrument panel applications.
The following materials, not available through NISSAN Parts Department, can also be used to repair
squeaks and rattles.
• UHMW(TEFLON) TAPE
Insulates where slight movement is present. Ideal for instrument panel applications.
• SILICONE GREASE
Used in place of UHMW tape that will be visible or not fit.
Note: Will only last a few months.
• SILICONE SPRAY
Use when grease cannot be applied.
• DUCT TAPE
Use to eliminate movement.
CONFIRM THE REPAIR
Confirm that the cause of a noise is repaired by test driving the vehicle. Operate the vehicle under the same
conditions as when the noise originally occurred. Refer to the notes on the Diagnostic Worksheet.

Revision: 2012 July DLK-282 N17


SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
Inspection Procedure INFOID:0000000006655295

A
Refer to Table of Contents for specific component removal and installation information.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Most incidents are caused by contact and movement between: B
1. Cluster lid A and instrument panel
2. Acrylic lens and combination meter housing
C
3. Instrument panel to front pillar garnish
4. Instrument panel to windshield
5. Instrument panel mounting pins D
6. Wiring harnesses behind the combination meter
7. A/C defroster duct and duct joint
These incidents can usually be located by tapping or moving the components to duplicate the noise or by E
pressing on the components while driving to stop the noise. Most of these incidents can be repaired by apply-
ing felt cloth tape or silicon spray (in hard to reach areas). Urethane pads can be used to insulate wiring har-
ness.
F
CAUTION:
Do not use silicone spray to isolate a squeak or rattle. If you saturate the area with silicone, you will
not be able to recheck the repair.
G
CENTER CONSOLE
Components to pay attention to include:
1. Shifter assembly cover to finisher H
2. A/C control unit and cluster lid C
3. Wiring harnesses behind audio and A/C control unit
The instrument panel repair and isolation procedures also apply to the center console. I
DOORS
Pay attention to the:
J
1. Finisher and inner panel making a slapping noise
2. Inside handle escutcheon to door finisher
3. Wiring harnesses tapping
DLK
4. Door striker out of alignment causing a popping noise on starts and stops
Tapping or moving the components or pressing on them while driving to duplicate the conditions can isolate
many of these incidents. You can usually insulate the areas with felt cloth tape or insulator foam blocks to L
repair the noise.
TRUNK
Trunk noises are often caused by a loose jack or loose items put into the trunk by the owner. M
In addition look for:
1. Trunk lid dumpers out of adjustment
2. Trunk lid striker out of adjustment N
3. Trunk lid torsion bars knocking together
4. A loose license plate or bracket
Most of these incidents can be repaired by adjusting, securing or insulating the item(s) or component(s) caus- O
ing the noise.
SUNROOF/HEADLINING
Noises in the sunroof/headlining area can often be traced to one of the following: P
1. Sunroof lid, rail, linkage or seals making a rattle or light knocking noise
2. Sunvisor shaft shaking in the holder
3. Front or rear windshield touching headlining and squeaking
Again, pressing on the components to stop the noise while duplicating the conditions can isolate most of these
incidents. Repairs usually consist of insulating with felt cloth tape.

Revision: 2012 July DLK-283 N17


SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
SEATS
When isolating seat noise it is important to note the position the seat is in and the load placed on the seat
when the noise is present. These conditions should be duplicated when verifying and isolating the cause of
the noise.
Cause of seat noise include:
1. Headrest rods and holder
2. A squeak between the seat pad cushion and frame
3. Rear seatback lock and bracket
These noises can be isolated by moving or pressing on the suspected components while duplicating the con-
ditions under which the noise occurs. Most of these incidents can be repaired by repositioning the component
or applying urethane tape to the contact area.
UNDERHOOD
Some interior noise may be caused by components under the hood or on the engine wall. The noise is then
transmitted into the passenger compartment.
Causes of transmitted underhood noise include:
1. Any component mounted to the engine wall
2. Components that pass through the engine wall
3. Engine wall mounts and connectors
4. Loose radiator mounting pins
5. Hood bumpers out of adjustment
6. Hood striker out of adjustment
These noises can be difficult to isolate since they cannot be reached from the interior of the vehicle. The best
method is to secure, move or insulate one component at a time and test drive the vehicle. Also, engine RPM
or load can be changed to isolate the noise. Repairs can usually be made by moving, adjusting, securing, or
insulating the component causing the noise.

Revision: 2012 July DLK-284 N17


SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
Diagnostic Worksheet INFOID:0000000006655296

DLK

PIIB8740E
P

Revision: 2012 July DLK-285 N17


SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

PIIB8742E

Revision: 2012 July DLK-286 N17


HOOD
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION A


HOOD
Exploded View INFOID:0000000007079516
B

JMKIA8148ZZ J

1. Hood assembly 2. Hood bumper rubber 3. Hood bumper rubber


4. Hood hinge LH 5. Grommet 6. Hood hinge RH
DLK
7. Hood support rod 8. Clamp
: Body grease
L
HOOD ASSEMBLY
HOOD ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007079517

M
CAUTION:
• Operate with two workers, because of its heavy weight.
• Use protective tape or shop cloth to protect from damage during removal and installation.
N
REMOVAL
1. Support hood assembly with the proper material to prevent it from falling.
WARNING: O
Injury may occur if hood assembly is not supported with appropriate material when removing
hood assembly.
2. Remove hood hinge mounting nuts on the hood to remove the hood assembly. P
INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and then install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• After installation, apply touch-up paint (the body color) onto the heads of hood hinge mounting bolts
and nuts.
• After installing, perform hood fitting adjustment. Refer to DLK-288, "HOOD ASSEMBLY : Adjust-
ment".

Revision: 2012 July DLK-287 N17


HOOD
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
HOOD ASSEMBLY : Adjustment INFOID:0000000007079518

JMKIA8145GB

1. Hood assembly 2. Hood bumper rubber 3. Hood hinge


4. Hood lock assembly 5. Front bumper fascia 6. Front combination lamp
7. Front fender
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

: Body grease

Check the clearance and the surface height between hood and each part by visually and touching.
If the clearance and the surface height are out of specification, adjust them according to the procedures
shown below.
Unit: mm [in]
Difference
Portion Standard (RH/LH,
MAX)
Hood – Front bumper D Clearance 1.9 – 6.9 [0.075 – 0.272] —
A–A
fascia E Surface height (−2.5) – (+1.5) [(−0.098) – (+0.059)] < 3.0 [0.118]
Front combination F Clearance 1.9 – 6.1 [0.075 – 0.240] < 2.5 [0.098]
B–B
lamp – Hood G Surface height (−1.3) – (+2.7) [(−0.051) – (+0.106)] < 2.0 [0.079]

Revision: 2012 July DLK-288 N17


HOOD
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

Difference
Portion Standard (RH/LH, A
MAX)
H Clearance 2.5 – 4.5 [0.098 – 0.177] < 1.5 [0.059]
Hood – Front fender C–C B
I Surface height (−1.0) – (+1.0) [(−0.039) – (+0.039)] < 1.5 [0.059]

FITTING ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE


C
1. Remove hood lock assembly, and then adjust the surface height of hood assembly, front fender assembly,
and front combination lamp according to the specified value, by rotating hood bumper rubber (body side).
2. Position hood lock assembly (1) and engage primary striker (2). D
Check hood lock assembly and primary striker for looseness.

JMKIA7992ZZ
G
3. Move hood lock assembly laterally until the center of primary striker and hood lock assembly are vertical
when viewed from the front.
H
4. After adjustment, tighten lock bolts to the specified torque.
5. Rotate bumper rubber (body side) 2/8 of a rotation counterclockwise in upward direction.
CAUTION:
If any looseness is felt in hood striker or hood lock assembly, rotate bumper rubber (body side) I
more than 1/8 of a rotation.
6. Check that secondary latch (1) is securely engaged with sec-
ondary striker (2) from the dead load of the hood assembly. J

DLK

JMKIA7993ZZ
M
7. Check that primary latch (1) is securely engaged with primary
striker (2) when hood assembly is closed [free-fall from approxi-
mately 200 mm (7.874 in) height]. N
CAUTION:
Never free-fall hood assembly from a height of 300 mm
(11.811 in) or more.
O

P
JMKIA7994ZZ

8. Close hood assembly with a static closing force of 300 – 490 N (30.6 – 50.0 kg, 67.4 – 110 lb).
HOOD HINGE

Revision: 2012 July DLK-289 N17


HOOD
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
HOOD HINGE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007079519

REMOVAL
1. Remove hood assembly. Refer to DLK-287, "HOOD ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation".
2. Remove hood support rod, and then remove grommet. Refer to DLK-290, "HOOD SUPPORT ROD :
Removal and Installation".
3. Remove front fender. Refer to DLK-301, "FRONT FENDER : Removal and Installation".
4. Remove hood hinge mounting bolts, and then remove hood hinge.
INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and then install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• After installation, apply touch-up paint (the body color) onto the head of the hinge mounting bolts
and nuts.
• After installation, perform hood fitting adjustment. Refer to DLK-288, "HOOD ASSEMBLY : Adjust-
ment".
• Check hood hinge rotating part for poor lubrication. If neces-
sary, apply grease.

: Body grease

JMKIA7995ZZ

HOOD SUPPORT ROD


HOOD SUPPORT ROD : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007079520

REMOVAL
1. Support hood assembly with a suitable material to prevent it from falling.
WARNING:
Injury may occur if hood assembly is not supported with appropriate material when removing
hood assembly.
2. Pull hood support rod from grommet and remove.
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: 2012 July DLK-290 N17


RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT
A
HR12DE
HR12DE : Exploded View INFOID:0000000007793119
B
Except for Hong Kong Models

JMKIA9320ZZ DLK

1. Radiator upper seal 2. Condenser side seal 3. Radiator side seal RH


4. Radiator side seal LH 5. Radiator core support lower 6. Radiator core support upper
L

Revision: 2012 July DLK-291 N17


RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
For Hong Kong Models

JMKIA9576ZZ

1. Radiator upper seal 2. Condenser side seal 3. Radiator side seal RH


4. Radiator side seal LH 5. Radiator core support lower 6. Radiator core support upper

HR12DE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007793121

RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT UPPER


Removal
1. Remove ground harness mounting bolt (A).

JMKIA9332ZZ

2. Remove washer tank inlet. Refer to WW-51, "Removal and Installation".


3. Remove horn. Refer to HRN-4, "Removal and Installation".
4. Remove radiator upper seal fixing clips.
5. Remove upper fixing clips of radiator side seal LH and RH.
6. Remove hood lock bell crank. Refer to DLK-323, "HOOD LOCK BELL CRANK : Removal and Installa-
tion".

Revision: 2012 July DLK-292 N17


RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
7. Remove hood lock assembly and hood lock control cable assembly fixing clip. Refer to DLK-320, "HOOD
LOCK : Removal and Installation" and DLK-321, "HOOD LOCK CONTROL CABLE : Removal and Instal- A
lation".
8. Remove crash zone sensor. Refer to SR-25, "Removal and Installation".
9. Remove radiator reservoir tank mounting bolt (A). B

JMKIA9333ZZ E

10. Disconnect all harness fixing clips.


11. Remove front bumper fascia upper side fixing clips (A). F

JMKIA9334ZZ I

12. Remove radiator core support upper mounting bolts.


13. Pull back upper part of front bumper fascia (1). J
14. Remove radiator core support upper (2) by pulling it out toward
the vehicle upper side.
DLK

JMKIA9335ZZ M

Installation
Note the following item, and then install in the reverse order of removal.
N
CAUTION:
Tighten the following bolts or nuts to the specified torque.
• Radiator reservoir tank mounting bolt: Refer to CO-16, "Exploded View".
O
RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT LOWER
Removal
1. Remove apron bracket assembly. Refer to EXT-14, "APRON BRACKET ASSEMBLY : Removal and P
Installation".
2. Remove fender protector LH and RH. Refer to EXT-22, "FENDER PROTECTOR : Removal and Installa-
tion".
3. Remove lower fixing clips of condenser side seal.
4. Remove lower fixing clips of radiator side seal LH and RH.

Revision: 2012 July DLK-293 N17


RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
5. Remove front bumper fascia upper side fixing clips (A).

JMKIA9334ZZ

6. Remove radiator upper seal fixing clips.


7. Move the front bumper upper side and radiator upper seal toward vehicle front.
8. Use a belts (A) to suspend it to prevent it from falling.
CAUTION:
Never damage radiator and condenser.

JMKIA8030ZZ

9. Remove mounting bolts, and then remove radiator core support lower.
Installation
Install in the reverse order of removal.
HR15DE

Revision: 2012 July DLK-294 N17


RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
HR15DE : Exploded View INFOID:0000000007079521

DLK

JMKIA9397ZZ

L
1. Radiator upper seal 2. Condenser side seal 3. Radiator side seal RH
(Models with bumper reinforcement
lower)
M
4. Radiator side seal LH 5. Radiator core support lower 6. Radiator core support upper
(Models with bumper reinforcement
lower)
7. Radiator side seal RH 8. Radiator side seal LH N
(Models without bumper reinforce- (Models without bumper reinforce-
ment lower) ment lower)
A. China production models * B. India production models *
O
NOTE:
*: For production models, refer to GI-34, "Information About Identification or Model Code".
P
HR15DE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007079522

RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT UPPER


Removal

Revision: 2012 July DLK-295 N17


RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
1. Remove ground harness mounting bolt (A).
CAUTION:
Location of ground harness mounting bolt differs depend-
ing on production country.
Write a short note describe location before starting opera-
tion.

JMKIA8026ZZ

2. Remove horn. Refer to HRN-4, "Removal and Installation".


3. Remove radiator upper seal fixing clips.
4. Remove upper fixing clips of radiator side seal LH and RH.
5. Remove hood lock bell crank. Refer to DLK-323, "HOOD LOCK BELL CRANK : Removal and Installa-
tion".
6. Remove hood lock assembly and hood lock control cable assembly fixing clip. Refer to DLK-320, "HOOD
LOCK : Removal and Installation" and DLK-321, "HOOD LOCK CONTROL CABLE : Removal and Instal-
lation".
7. Remove crash zone sensor (if equipped). Refer to SR-25, "Removal and Installation".
8. Remove radiator cap adapter bracket mounting bolt (A) and
radiator reservoir tank mounting bolt (B).

JMKIA8027ZZ

9. Disconnect all harness fixing clips.


10. Remove front bumper fascia upper side fixing clips (A).

JMKIA8028ZZ

11. Remove radiator core support upper mounting bolts.


12. Pull back upper part of front bumper fascia (1).
13. Remove radiator core support upper (2) by pulling it out toward
the vehicle upper side.

JMKIA8029ZZ

Revision: 2012 July DLK-296 N17


RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

Installation
A
Note the following item, and then install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Tighten the following bolts or nuts to the specified torque.
• Radiator cap adapter bracket mounting bolt and radiator reservoir tank mounting bolt: Refer to CO- B
43, "Exploded View".
RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT LOWER
C
Removal
1. Remove apron bracket assembly. Refer to EXT-14, "APRON BRACKET ASSEMBLY : Removal and
Installation". D
2. Remove fender protector LH and RH. Refer to EXT-22, "FENDER PROTECTOR : Removal and Installa-
tion".
3. Remove bumper reinforcement lower (if equipped). Refer to EXT-11, "Exploded View". E
4. Remove lower fixing clips of condenser side seal.
5. Remove lower fixing clips of radiator side seal LH and RH.
6. Remove front bumper fascia upper side fixing clips (A). F

JMKIA8028ZZ I

7. Move the front bumper upper side and radiator upper seal toward vehicle front.
8. Remove radiator upper seal fixing clips. J
9. Use a belts (A) to suspend it to prevent it from falling.
CAUTION:
Never damage radiator and condenser. DLK

M
JMKIA8030ZZ

10. Remove mounting bolts, and then remove radiator core support lower. N
Installation
Install in the reverse order of removal.
K9K O

Revision: 2012 July DLK-297 N17


RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
K9K : Exploded View INFOID:0000000007869870

JMKIA9398ZZ

1. Radiator upper seal 2. Condenser side seal 3. Radiator side seal RH


4. Radiator side seal LH 5. Radiator core support lower 6. Radiator core support upper

K9K : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007869871

RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT UPPER


Removal
1. Remove ground harness mounting bolt (A).

JMKIA9413ZZ

2. Remove horn. Refer to HRN-4, "Removal and Installation".


3. Remove radiator upper seal fixing clips.
4. Remove upper fixing clips of radiator side seal LH and RH.
5. Remove hood lock bell crank. Refer to DLK-323, "HOOD LOCK BELL CRANK : Removal and Installa-
tion".

Revision: 2012 July DLK-298 N17


RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
6. Remove hood lock assembly and hood lock control cable assembly fixing clip. Refer to DLK-320, "HOOD
LOCK : Removal and Installation" and DLK-321, "HOOD LOCK CONTROL CABLE : Removal and Instal- A
lation".
7. Remove mounting bolts (A) of radiator reservoir tank.
B

JMKIA9414ZZ

E
8. Disconnect all harness fixing clips.
9. Remove front bumper fascia upper side fixing clips (A).
F

JMKIA9415ZZ

I
10. Remove radiator core support upper mounting bolts.
11. Pull back upper part of front bumper fascia (1).
12. Remove radiator core support upper (2) by pulling it out toward J
the vehicle upper side.

DLK

JMKIA9416ZZ

M
Installation
Note the following item, and then install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Tighten the following bolts or nuts to the specified torque. N
• Radiator reservoir tank mounting bolt: Refer to EM-405, "Exploded View".
RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT LOWER
O
Removal
1. Remove apron bracket assembly. Refer to EXT-14, "APRON BRACKET ASSEMBLY : Removal and
Installation". P
2. Remove fender protector LH and RH. Refer to EXT-22, "FENDER PROTECTOR : Removal and Installa-
tion".
3. Remove lower fixing clips of condenser side seal.
4. Remove lower fixing clips of radiator side seal LH and RH.

Revision: 2012 July DLK-299 N17


RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
5. Remove front bumper fascia upper side fixing clips (A).

JMKIA9415ZZ

6. Move the front bumper upper side and radiator upper seal toward vehicle front.
7. Remove radiator upper seal fixing clips.
8. Use a belts (A) to suspend it to prevent it from falling.
CAUTION:
Never damage radiator and condenser.

JMKIA8030ZZ

9. Remove lower mounting nut (A) of charge air cooler bracket


(lower).

: Vehicle front

JMKIA6473ZZ

10. Remove mounting bolts, and then remove radiator core support lower.
Installation
Note the following item, and then install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Tighten the following bolts or nuts to the specified torque.
• Lower mounting nut of charge air cooler bracket (lower): Refer to EM-405, "Exploded View".

Revision: 2012 July DLK-300 N17


FRONT FENDER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
FRONT FENDER
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000007079524

G
JMKIA9321ZZ

1. Front fender cover 2. Front fender seal 3. Front fender upper insulator
(If equipped) (If equipped) H
4. Front fender assembly 5. Front fender stiffener
: Pawl
I
: Vehicle front

FRONT FENDER
J
FRONT FENDER : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007079525

CAUTION: DLK
Use a shop cloth to protect the body from being damaged during removal and installation.
REMOVAL
1. Remove fender protector. Refer to EXT-22, "FENDER PROTECTOR : Removal and Installation". L
2. Remove front bumper fascia and bumper side bracket. Refer to EXT-13, "FRONT BUMPER : Removal
and Installation".
3. Remove front combination lamp. Refer toEXL-86, "Removal and Installation". M
4. Remove side turn signal lamp. Refer to EXL-91, "Removal and Installation".
5. Remove front door corner finisher. Refer to MIR-22, "FRONT DOOR CORNER FINISHER : Removal and
Installation". N
6. Remove front fender cover. DLK-302, "FENDER COVER : Removal and Installation".
7. Remove mounting bolts of front fender assembly.
O
8. Remove front fender stiffener (2) from the vehicle body while
carefully pulling upper portion of front fender (1) toward vehicle
outside.
P
: Vehicle front

JMKIA5633ZZ

Revision: 2012 July DLK-301 N17


FRONT FENDER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
9. Remove front fender assembly.
CAUTION:
An viscous urethane foam is installed on the back surface of front fender. When removing the
front fender, be careful to not deform the front fender while performing the procedure and remov-
ing the viscous urethane foam a little at a time.
INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• After installation, apply the touch-up paint (the body color) onto the head of front fender mounting
bolts.
• After installation, adjust the following part.
- Hood assembly: Refer to DLK-288, "HOOD ASSEMBLY : Adjustment".
- Front door: Refer to DLK-305, "DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment".
FENDER COVER
FENDER COVER : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007079526

REMOVAL
1. Fully open hood assembly.
2. Disengage fixing pawls, and then remove front fender cover.
CAUTION:
When performing the procedure after removing fender
cover, protect the lower of windshield glass with urethane
etc.

: Pawl

JMKIA8031ZZ

INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and then install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• For installation, engage pawls to front fender and cowl top
cover in numerical order as shown in the figure.
• Install so that there is no clearance between windshield and
cowl top cover.

JMKIA8032ZZ

Revision: 2012 July DLK-302 N17


FRONT DOOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
FRONT DOOR
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000007079527

I
JMKIA9322GB

1. Front door panel 2. Grommet 3. TORX bolt J


4. Door striker 5. Bumper rubber 6. Sealing screen
(If equipped)
7. Door check link 8. Door hinge (lower) 9. Door hinge (upper)
DLK
10. Grommet (driver side only)
: Always replace after every disassembly.

: N·m (kg-m, in-lb) L

: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

: Body grease M

DOOR ASSEMBLY
N
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007079528

CAUTION:
• Perform work with 2 workers, because of its heavy weight. O
• When removing and installing front door assembly, support door with a jack and shop cloth to pro-
tect door and body.
REMOVAL P

Revision: 2012 July DLK-303 N17


FRONT DOOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
1. Remove front door harness grommet (1), and then pull out the
harness from the vehicle (2).

JMKIA8070ZZ

2. Disconnect front door harness connectors (A).

JMKIA8071ZZ

3. Remove mounting bolts of door check link on the vehicle.


4. Remove door hinge mounting nuts (door side), and then remove door assembly.
INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Apply anticorrosive agent onto the mounting surface.
• Check front door open/close, lock/unlock operation after installation.
• Check door hinge rotating part for poor lubrication. If necessary, apply body grease.
• After installation, perform the fitting adjustment. Refer to DLK-305, "DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjust-
ment".
• After installation, apply touch-up paint (the body color) onto the head of door hinge mounting nuts.

Revision: 2012 July DLK-304 N17


FRONT DOOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment INFOID:0000000007079529

DLK

JMKIA8146GB

L
1. Front fender 2. Front door 3. Rear door
4. Body side outer 5. Door striker 6. TORX bolt
7. Front door hinge 8. Rear door hinge (upper) 9. Rear door hinge (lower) M
: Always replace after every disassembly.

: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)


N
: Body grease

Check the clearance and surface height between front door and each part by visually and touching.
If the clearance and the surface height are out of specification, adjust them according to the procedures O
shown below.
Unit: mm [in]
Portion Clearance Surface height P
Front fender – Front door A–A 3.6 – 5.6 [0.142 – 0.220] (−1.0) – (+1.0) [(−0.039) – (+0.039)]
Front door – Rear door B–B 3.6 – 5.6 [0.142 – 0.220] (−1.0) – (+1.0) [(−0.039) – (+0.039)]

FITTING ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE


1. Remove fender protector. Refer to EXT-22, "FENDER PROTECTOR : Removal and Installation".

Revision: 2012 July DLK-305 N17


FRONT DOOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
2. Remove front fender (Diesel engine models only). Refer to EXT-22, "FENDER PROTECTOR : Removal
and Installation".
3. Loosen door hinge mounting nuts on door side.
4. Adjust the surface height of front door according to the fitting standard dimension.
5. Temporarily tighten door hinge mounting nuts on door side.
6. Loosen door hinge mounting bolts on body side.
7. Raise front door at rear end to adjust clearance of the front door according to the fitting standard dimen-
sion.
8. After adjustment tighten bolts and nuts to the specified torque.
CAUTION:
• After installation, apply touch-up paint (the body color) onto the head of hinge mounting bolts
and nuts.
• Check door hinge rotating part for poor lubrication. If necessary, apply body grease.
9. Install front fender (Diesel engine models only). Refer to refer to EXT-22, "FENDER PROTECTOR :
Removal and Installation".
10. Install fender protector. Refer to refer to EXT-22, "FENDER PROTECTOR : Removal and Installation".
DOOR STRIKER ADJUSTMENT
Adjust door striker so that it becomes parallel with door lock insertion direction.
DOOR STRIKER
DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007079530

REMOVAL
Remove TORX bolts, and then remove door striker.
INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Check front door open/close, lock/unlock operation after installation.
• After installation, be sure to perform the fitting adjustment. Refer to DLK-305, "DOOR ASSEMBLY :
Adjustment".
DOOR HINGE
DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007079531

REMOVAL
CAUTION:
• Perform work with 2 workers, because of its heavy weight.
• When removing and installing front door assembly, support door with a jack and shop cloth to pro-
tect door and body.
1. Remove fender protector. Refer to EXT-22, "FENDER PROTECTOR : Removal and Installation".
2. Remove front fender (Diesel engine models only). Refer to DLK-301, "FRONT FENDER : Removal and
Installation".
3. Remove front door assembly. Refer to DLK-303, "DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation".
4. Remove front door hinge mounting bolts (body side), and then remove front door hinge.
INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Apply anticorrosive agent onto the mounting surface.
• Check door hinge rotating part for poor lubrication. If necessary, apply body grease.
• After installation, perform the fitting adjustment. Refer to DLK-305, "DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjust-
ment".
• After installation, apply touch-up paint (the body color) onto the head of door hinge mounting nuts.

Revision: 2012 July DLK-306 N17


FRONT DOOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
• Check door hinge rotating part for poor lubrication. If neces-
sary, apply body grease. A

: Body grease
B

JMKIA8072ZZ

D
DOOR CHECK LINK
DOOR CHECK LINK : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007850011

E
REMOVAL
1. Fully close the front door window.
F
2. Remove front door finisher. Refer to INT-13, "POWER WINDOW MODELS : Removal and Installation"
(power window models) or INT-15, "MANUAL WINDOW MODELS : Removal and Installation" (manual
window models).
3. Disconnect harness connector of front door speaker. G
4. Remove mounting bolts of front door speaker, and then remove front door speaker.
5. Remove mounting bolt of door check link on door panel.
H
6. Remove mounting bolts of door check link on the vehicle.
7. Take door check link (1) out from the hole of door panel (2).
I

DLK

JMKIA8073ZZ

INSTALLATION L
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Check rear door open/close operation after installation. M
• Check door check link rotating part for poor lubrication. If
necessary, apply grease.
N
: Body grease

P
JMKIA8074ZZ

Revision: 2012 July DLK-307 N17


REAR DOOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
REAR DOOR
Exploded View INFOID:0000000007079533

JMKIA8153GB

1. Rear door panel 2. Grommet 3. TORX bolt


4. Door striker 5. Bumper rubber 6. Sealing screen
(If equipped)
7. Door check link 8. Door hinge (lower) 9. Door hinge (upper)
: Always replace after every disassembly.

: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)

: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

: Body grease

DOOR ASSEMBLY
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007079534

CAUTION:
• Perform work with 2 workers, because of it’s heavy weight.
• When removing and installing rear door assembly, support door with a jack and shop cloth to pro-
tect door and body.
REMOVAL

Revision: 2012 July DLK-308 N17


REAR DOOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
1. Remove rear door harness grommet (1) from body side outer
(2), and then pull out rear door harness. A

JMKIA8083ZZ

D
2. Disconnect rear door harness connector (A).

G
JMKIA8084ZZ

3. Remove mounting bolts of door check link on the vehicle.


H
4. Remove door hinge mounting nuts (door side), and then remove rear door assembly.
INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal. I
CAUTION:
• Apply anticorrosive agent onto the mounting surface.
• Check rear door open/close, lock/unlock operation after installation. J
• Check door hinge rotating part for poor lubrication. If necessary, apply body grease.
• After installation, perform the fitting adjustment. Refer to DLK-310, "DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjust-
ment".
• After installation, apply touch-up paint (the body color) onto the head of door hinge mounting nuts. DLK

Revision: 2012 July DLK-309 N17


REAR DOOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment INFOID:0000000007079535

JMKIA8146GB

1. Front fender 2. Front door 3. Rear door


4. Body side outer 5. Door striker 6. TORX bolt
7. Front door hinge 8. Rear door hinge (upper) 9. Rear door hinge (lower)
: Always replace after every disassembly.

: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

: Body grease

Check the clearance and surface height between rear door and each part by visually and touching.
If the clearance and the surface height are out of specification, adjust them according to the procedures
shown below.
Unit: mm [in]
Portion Clearance Surface height
Front door – Rear door B–B 3.6 – 5.6 [0.142 – 0.220] (−1.0) – (+1.0) [(−0.039) – (+0.039)]
Rear door – Body side outer C – C 3.6 – 5.6 [0.142 – 0.220] (−1.0) – (+1.0) [(−0.039) – (+0.039)]

FITTING ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE


1. Remove center pillar lower garnish. Refer to INT-27, "CENTER PILLAR LOWER GARNISH : Removal
and Installation".

Revision: 2012 July DLK-310 N17


REAR DOOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
2. Loosen door hinge mounting nuts on door side.
3. Adjust the surface height of rear door according to the fitting standard dimension. A
4. Temporarily tighten door hinge mounting nuts on door side.
5. Loosen door hinge mounting nuts and bolts on body side.
B
6. Raise rear door at rear end to adjust clearance of rear door according to the fitting standard dimension.
7. After adjustment tighten bolts and nuts to the specified torque.
CAUTION:
• After installation, apply touch-up paint (the body color) onto the head of hinge mounting bolts C
and nuts.
• Check door hinge rotating part for poor lubrication. If necessary, apply body grease.
8. Install center pillar lower garnish. Refer to INT-27, "CENTER PILLAR LOWER GARNISH : Removal and D
Installation".
DOOR STRIKER ADJUSTMENT
Adjust door striker so that it becomes parallel with door lock insertion direction. E
DOOR STRIKER
DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007079536 F

REMOVAL
Remove TORX bolts, and then remove door striker. G
INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: H
• Check rear door open/close, lock/unlock operation after installation.
• After installation, be sure to perform the fitting adjustment. Refer to DLK-310, "DOOR ASSEMBLY :
Adjustment". I
DOOR HINGE
DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007079537
J
CAUTION:
• Perform work with 2 workers, because of it’s heavy weight.
• When removing and installing rear door assembly, support door with a jack and shop cloth to pro- DLK
tect door and body.
REMOVAL
L
1. Remove rear door assembly. Refer to DLK-308, "DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation".
2. Remove center pillar lower garnish. Refer to INT-27, "CENTER PILLAR LOWER GARNISH : Removal
and Installation".
M
3. Remove rear door hinge mounting bolts and nuts (body side), and then remove door hinge.
INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal. N
CAUTION:
• Apply anticorrosive agent onto the mounting surface.
• Check rear door open/close operation after installation.
• When removing and installing rear door assembly, perform the fitting adjustment. Refer to DLK-310, O
"DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment".
• After installing, apply the touch-up paint (the body color) onto the head of door hinge mounting nuts.
P

Revision: 2012 July DLK-311 N17


REAR DOOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
• Check door hinge rotating part for poor lubrication. If neces-
sary, apply body grease.

: Body grease

JMKIA8072ZZ

DOOR CHECK LINK


DOOR CHECK LINK : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007850047

REMOVAL
1. Fully close the rear door window.
2. Remove rear door finisher. Refer to INT-18, "POWER WINDOW MODELS : Removal and Installation"
(power window models) or INT-21, "MANUAL WINDOW MODELS : Removal and Installation" (manual
window models).
3. Disconnect harness connector of rear door speaker.
4. Remove mounting bolts of rear door speaker, and then remove rear door speaker.
5. Remove mounting bolts of check link on door panel.
6. Remove mounting bolt of check link on the vehicle.
7. Take door check link (1) out from the hole of door panel (2).

JMKIA8085ZZ

INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Check rear door open/close operation after installation.
• Check door check link rotating part for poor lubrication. If
necessary, apply grease.

: Body grease

JMKIA8074ZZ

Revision: 2012 July DLK-312 N17


TRUNK LID
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
TRUNK LID
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000007079539

J
JMKIA8154ZZ

1. Trunk lid weather-strip 2. Torsion bar clip 3. Torsion bar RH DLK


4. Torsion bar LH 5. Trunk lid hinge 6. Bumper rubber
7. Trunk lid striker 8. Trunk lid assembly
A : Center mark L
B : Seam
: Body grease
M
TRUNK LID ASSEMBLY
TRUNK LID ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007079540
N
CAUTION:
Operate with two workers, because of its heavy weight.
O
REMOVAL
1. Remove trunk lid finisher inner (if equipped). Refer to INT-42, "Removal and Installation".
2. Disconnect license plate lamp harness connector. Refer to EXL-99, "Removal and Installation". P
3. Remove harness fixing clips from trunk lid assembly, and then pull out harness from trunk lid assembly.
NOTE:
Write a short note to describe the fixing clips positions.
4. Remove the trunk lid hinge mounting bolts on trunk lid side and remove the trunk lid assembly.
INSTALLATION
Note the following item, and install in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: 2012 July DLK-313 N17


TRUNK LID
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
CAUTION:
• After installing, apply touch-up paint (the body color) onto the head of the hinge mounting bolts.
• Check trunk lid open/close, lock/unlock operation after installation.
• After installation, perform fitting adjustment. Refer to DLK-314, "TRUNK LID ASSEMBLY : Adjust-
ment".
TRUNK LID ASSEMBLY : Adjustment INFOID:0000000007079541

JMKIA8147GB

1. Trunk lid assembly 2. Trunk lid hinge 3. Trunk lid striker


4. Body side outer 5. Rear combination lamp 6. Rear bumper fascia
: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)

: Body grease

Check the clearance and surface height between trunk lid and each part by visually and touching.
If the clearance and surface height are out of specification, adjust them according to the procedures shown
below.

Revision: 2012 July DLK-314 N17


TRUNK LID
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
Unit: mm [in]
Difference A
Portion Standard (RH/LH,
MAX)
E Clearance 2.5 – 4.5 [0.098 – 0.177] < 1.5 [0.059] B
A–A
Trunk lid – Body F Surface height (−1.0) – (+1.0) [(−0.039) – (+0.039)] < 1.5 [0.059]
side outer G Clearance 2.5 – 4.5 [0.098 – 0.177] < 1.5 [0.059] C
B–B
H Surface height (−1.5) – (+0.5) [(−0.059) – (+0.020)] < 1.5 [0.059]
Trunk lid – Rear I Clearance 2.6 – 6.4 [0.102 – 0.252] < 2.9 [0.114]
C–C D
combination lamp J Surface height (−1.35) – (+2.85) [(−0.053) – (+0.112)] < 3.0 [0.118]
Trunk lid – Rear
D–D K Clearance 5.0 – 9.0 [0.197 – 0.354] — E
bumper fascia
1. Loosen trunk lid hinge mounting bolts (trunk lid side).
2. Remove trunk rear plate. Refer to INT-39, "TRUNK REAR PLATE : Removal and Installation". F
3. Loosen trunk lid striker mounting bolts.
4. Lift up trunk lid approximately 100 – 150 mm (3.937 – 5.906 in) height then close it lightly and check that it
is engaged firmly with trunk lid closed. G
5. Check the clearance and surface height.
6. Finally tighten trunk lid hinge and trunk lid striker.
7. Install trunk rear plate. Refer to INT-39, "TRUNK REAR PLATE : Removal and Installation". H
TRUNK LID STRIKER ADJUSTMENT
Adjust trunk lid striker so that it becomes parallel with trunk lid lock insertion direction.
I
TRUNK LID STRIKER
TRUNK LID STRIKER : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007079542

J
REMOVAL
1. Remove trunk rear plate. Refer to INT-39, "TRUNK REAR PLATE : Removal and Installation".
DLK
2. Remove trunk lid opener cable mounting bolt (A) and trunk lid
striker mounting bolts (B).

N
JMKIA8124ZZ

3. Pull out trunk lid striker (1), and then disconnect trunk lid opener
cable (2) from trunk lid striker. O

JMKIA8125ZZ

INSTALLATION

Revision: 2012 July DLK-315 N17


TRUNK LID
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Check trunk lid open/close, lock/unlock operation after installation.
• Check that trunk lid opener cables are normally engaged with trunk lid striker.
• When removing and installing trunk lid striker, perform the fitting adjustment. Refer to DLK-314,
"TRUNK LID ASSEMBLY : Adjustment".
TRUNK LID HINGE
TRUNK LID HINGE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007079543

REMOVAL
1. Remove harness fixing clips (A) from trunk lid hinge RH (1).

JMKIA8126ZZ

2. Remove trunk lid assembly. Refer to DLK-313, "TRUNK LID ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation".
3. Remove torsion bar. Refer to DLK-316, "TORSION BAR : Removal and Installation".
4. Remove rear parcel shelf finisher. Refer to INT-30, "REAR PARCEL SHELF FINISHER : Removal and
Installation".
5. Remove trunk lid hinge mounting bolts (body side), and then remove trunk lid hinge.
INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Check trunk lid open/close, lock/unlock operation after installation.
• When removing and installing trunk lid assembly, perform the fitting adjustment. Refer to DLK-314,
"TRUNK LID ASSEMBLY : Adjustment".
• After installation, apply touch-up paint (the body color) onto the head of trunk lid hinge mounting
bolts.
• Check trunk lid hinge rotating part for poor lubrication. If necessary, apply body grease.

: Body grease

JMKIA8127ZZ

TORSION BAR
TORSION BAR : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007079544

REMOVAL
1. Remove torsion bar clamp.
2. Support trunk lid with the proper material to prevent it from falling.
WARNING:

Revision: 2012 July DLK-316 N17


TRUNK LID
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
Bodily injury may occur if no supporting rod is holding the trunk lid open when removing the trunk
lid stay. A
3. Set a torsion bar wrench (A) to torsion bar (1), and lift torsion bar
to remove it.
B

D
JMKIA8128ZZ

NOTE: E
For torsion bar wrench, refer to the figure.

H
PIIB3774J

INSTALLATION
I
Note the following item, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Check trunk lid open/close operation after installation.
TRUNK LID WEATHER-STRIP J

TRUNK LID WEATHER-STRIP : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007079545

DLK
REMOVAL
Pull up and remove engagement with body from weather-strip joint.
CAUTION: L
Never pull strongly on weather-strip.
INSTALLATION
1. Working from the upper section, align weather-strip center mark M
(A) with vehicle center mark (B) and install weather-strip onto
the vehicle.
N
: Vehicle front

JMKIA8129ZZ
P

Revision: 2012 July DLK-317 N17


TRUNK LID
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
2. Align the connecting point (B) of weather-strip (2) to the center
(A) of striker (1), and then install as shown in the figure.

JMKIA8130ZZ

3. Pull weather-strip gently to ensure that there is no loose section.


NOTE:
Check that weather-strip fits tightly in each corner and luggage rear plate.

Revision: 2012 July DLK-318 N17


HOOD LOCK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
HOOD LOCK
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000007079546

LHD models B

I
JMKIA8159GB

1. Hood lock bell crank 2. Hood lock assembly 3. Hood lock control cable assembly J
: Clip

: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)


DLK
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

: Body grease
L

Revision: 2012 July DLK-319 N17


HOOD LOCK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
RHD models

JMKIA9312GB

1. Hood lock control cable assembly 2. Hood lock bell crank 3. Hood lock assembly
: Clip

: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)

: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

: Body grease

HOOD LOCK
HOOD LOCK : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007079547

REMOVAL
LHD models
1. Disconnect hood lock switch harness connector (A).
(Models with hood lock switch.)

: Vehicle front

JMKIA7996ZZ

2. Remove hood lock assembly mounting bolts, and then remove hood lock assembly.

Revision: 2012 July DLK-320 N17


HOOD LOCK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
3. Disconnect hood lock control cable assembly (2) from hood lock
assembly (1). A

JMKIA7997ZZ

D
RHD models
1. Disconnect hood lock switch harness connector (A).
(Models with hood lock switch.) E

: Vehicle front
F

JMKIA7996ZZ H

2. Remove hood lock assembly mounting bolts, and then remove hood lock assembly.
3. Disconnect hood lock control cable assembly from hood lock I
assembly.

DLK

JMKIA5748ZZ L

INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal. M
CAUTION:
• Never to bend cable too much, keeping the radius 100 mm (3.937 in) or more.
• Check that hood lock control cable is properly engaged with hood lock.
• After installation, perform hood fitting adjustment. Refer to DLK-288, "HOOD ASSEMBLY : Adjust- N
ment".
• After installation, perform hood lock control inspection. Refer to DLK-324, "Inspection".
HOOD LOCK CONTROL CABLE O

HOOD LOCK CONTROL CABLE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007079549

P
REMOVAL
LHD models
1. Disconnect hood lock control cable assembly from hood lock assembly. Refer to DLK-320, "HOOD LOCK
: Removal and Installation".
2. Remove fender protector LH. Refer to EXT-22, "FENDER PROTECTOR : Removal and Installation".
3. Remove hood lock control cable fixing clips.

Revision: 2012 July DLK-321 N17


HOOD LOCK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
4. Remove hood lock control handle mounting bolts (A) of hood
lock control cable assembly.

JMKIA7998ZZ

5. Disconnect fuel filler lid opener cable (2) from fuel filler lid
opener lever (1).

JMKIA7999ZZ

6. Remove dash side finisher LH. Refer to INT-26, "DASH SIDE FINISHER : Removal and Installation"
7. Remove grommet on the lower dash, and pull the hood lock control cable toward the passenger compart-
ment.
CAUTION:
While pulling, never to damage (peeling) the outside of hood lock control cable.
RHD models
1. Disconnect hood lock control cable assembly from hood lock assembly. Refer to DLK-320, "HOOD LOCK
: Removal and Installation".
2. Remove fender protector RH. Refer to EXT-22, "FENDER PROTECTOR : Removal and Installation".
3. Remove hood lock control cable fixing clips.
4. Remove hood lock control handle mounting bolts (A) of hood
lock control cable assembly.

JMKIA5707ZZ

5. Disconnect fuel filler lid opener cable (2) from fuel filler lid
opener lever (1).

JMKIA5708ZZ

Revision: 2012 July DLK-322 N17


HOOD LOCK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
6. Remove dash side finisher RH. Refer to INT-26, "DASH SIDE FINISHER : Removal and Installation"
7. Remove grommet on the lower dash, and pull the hood lock control cable toward the passenger compart- A
ment.
CAUTION:
While pulling, never to damage (peeling) the outside of hood lock control cable. B
INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: C
• Never to bend cable too much, keeping the radius 100 mm (3.937 in) or more.
• Check that cable is not offset from the positioning grommet,
and apply the sealant to the grommet (at * mark) properly.
D

PIIB5801E

G
• Check that hood lock control cable is properly engaged with hood lock.
• After installation, perform hood fitting adjustment. Refer to DLK-288, "HOOD ASSEMBLY : Adjust-
ment". H
• After installation, perform hood lock control inspection. Refer to DLK-324, "Inspection".
HOOD LOCK BELL CRANK
HOOD LOCK BELL CRANK : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007079550
I

REMOVAL
J
1. Remove radiator upper seal fixing clip (A), and then remove
upper fixing clip (B) of radiator side seal RH.

: Vehicle front DLK

M
JMKIA9313ZZ

2. Remove upper fixing clip (A) of radiator side seal LH and radia-
tor upper seal fixing clip (B). N

: Vehicle front

JMKIA9331ZZ

3. Remove hood lock bell crank assembly mounting nuts, and then remove hood lock bell crank assembly.
INSTALLATION
Note the following item, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:

Revision: 2012 July DLK-323 N17


HOOD LOCK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
After installation, perform hood lock control inspection. Refer to DLK-324, "Inspection".
Inspection INFOID:0000000007079551

NOTE:
If the hood lock cable is bent or deformed, replace it.
1. Check that hood opener operating is condition 49 N (5.0 kg, 11.0 lb) or below.
2. Check that secondary latch (1) is securely engaged with sec-
ondary striker (2) from the dead load of the hood assembly.

JMKIA7993ZZ

3. Check that primary latch (1) is securely engaged with primary


striker (2) when hood assembly is closed [free-fall from approxi-
mately 200 mm (7.874 in) height].
CAUTION:
Never free-fall hood assembly from a height of 300 (11.811
in) mm or more.

JMKIA7994ZZ

4. While operating hood opener, carefully check that the front end of hood is raised by approximately 20.0
mm (0.787 in). Also check that hood opener returns to the original position.
5. Install so that static closing face of hood is 300 – 490 N (31.0 – 50.0 kg-m, 221 – 361 ft – lb).
NOTE:
• Exert vertical force on right side and left side of hood lock.
• Never press simultaneously both sides.
6. Check the hood lock lubrication condition. If necessary, apply body grease to hood lock bell crank assem-
bly (1) and hood lock assembly (2).

JMKIA8000ZZ

: Body grease

Revision: 2012 July DLK-324 N17


FRONT DOOR LOCK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
FRONT DOOR LOCK
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000007079552

I
JMKIA8160GB

1. Door key cylinder assembly (driver 2. Rear gasket 3. Outside handle bracket J
side)
Outside handle escutcheon (passen-
ger side)
4. TORX bolt 5. Key rod (driver side) 6. Door lock assembly DLK
7. Inside handle 8. Outside handle 9. Front gasket
10. Clip
L
: Pawl
: Vehicle front
: Always replace after every disassembly. M
: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)

: Body grease
N
DOOR LOCK
DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007079553 O

REMOVAL
1. Remove inside handle. Refer to DLK-326, "INSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation". P
2. Remove outside handle and outside handle bracket. Refer to DLK-327, "OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal
and Installation".
3. Disconnect door lock actuator connector.
4. Remove front door lower sash (rear). Refer to GW-17, "Exploded View".
5. Remove door lock assembly TORX bolts, and then remove door lock assembly.

Revision: 2012 July DLK-325 N17


FRONT DOOR LOCK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Never reuse TORX bolt. Always replace it with a new one when it is removed.
• Check door open/close, lock/unlock operation after installation.
• Check door lock cable is properly engaged with outside handle bracket.
• Check door lock assembly for poor lubrication. Apply body
grease to door lock if necessary.

: Body grease

JMKIA8077ZZ

INSIDE HANDLE
INSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007850103

REMOVAL
1. Remove front door finisher. Refer to INT-13, "POWER WINDOW MODELS : Removal and Installation"
(power window models) or INT-15, "MANUAL WINDOW MODELS : Removal and Installation" (manual
window models).
2. Remove upper side of sealing screen.
NOTE:
Cut the butyl tape so that some parts of the butyl tape do not remain on the sealing screen, if the sealing
screen is reused.
3. Disengage lock knob cable (2) and inside handle cable (3) from
clip (1).

JMKIA8078ZZ

4. Remove inside handle mounting bolt.


5. Disengage inside handle (1) from door panel (2) while sliding
inside handle toward vehicle rear, and then separate inside han-
dle.

: Pawl
: Vehicle front

JMKIA8079ZZ

Revision: 2012 July DLK-326 N17


FRONT DOOR LOCK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
6. Disengage inside handle cable (3) and lock knob cable (2), and
then remove inside handle (1). A

JMKIA5885ZZ

D
INSTALLATION
Note the following item, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Check door open/close, lock/unlock operation after installation. E
OUTSIDE HANDLE
OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007079555 F

REMOVAL
1. Fully close the front door glass. G
2. Remove front door finisher. Refer to INT-13, "POWER WINDOW MODELS : Removal and Installation"
(power window models) or INT-15, "MANUAL WINDOW MODELS : Removal and Installation" (manual
window models). H
3. Remove sealing screen.
NOTE:
Cut the butyl-tape so that some parts of the butyl-tape do not remain on the sealing screen, if the sealing I
screen is reused.
4. Disengage rod holder (1), and then separate key rod (3) from
door lock assembly (2).(Driver side) J

DLK

JMKIA8080ZZ

M
5. Disengage outside handle cable (1) from cable clip (2).

: Vehicle front
N

P
JMKIA8081ZZ

Revision: 2012 July DLK-327 N17


FRONT DOOR LOCK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
6. Remove door side grommet, and loosen TORX bolt from grom-
met hole.

JMKIA5888ZZ

7. While pulling outside handle, remove door key cylinder assem-


bly (driver side) or outside handle escutcheon (passenger side).

JMKIA0560ZZ

8. While pulling outside handle (1), slide toward rear of vehicle to


remove outside handle.

JMKIA0524ZZ

9. Remove front gasket (1) and rear gasket (2).

: Vehicle front

JMKIA5889ZZ

10. Slide outside handle bracket toward rear of vehicle to remove.

: Vehicle front

JMKIA5890ZZ

Revision: 2012 July DLK-328 N17


FRONT DOOR LOCK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
11. Disconnect outside handle cable (1) from outside handle bracket
(2). A

JMKIA5891ZZ

D
INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• When installing key rod, rotate key rod holder until a click is felt. E
• Check that door lock cables are normally engaged with inside handle and outside handle.
• After installation, check door open/close, and lock/unlock operation.
F

DLK

Revision: 2012 July DLK-329 N17


REAR DOOR LOCK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
REAR DOOR LOCK
Exploded View INFOID:0000000007079556

JMKIA8161GB

1. Outside handle escutcheon 2. Rear gasket 3. Outside handle bracket


4. TORX bolt 5. Door lock assembly 6. Inside handle
7. Outside handle 8. Front gasket 9. Clip
: Pawl
: Vehicle front
: Always replace after every disassembly.

: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)

: Body grease

DOOR LOCK
DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007079557

REMOVAL
1. Remove inside handle. Refer to DLK-331, "INSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation".
2. Remove outside handle and outside handle bracket. Refer to DLK-332, "OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal
and Installation".

Revision: 2012 July DLK-330 N17


REAR DOOR LOCK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
3. Remove mounting bolt (A) of partition sash (1).
A

JMKIA8086ZZ

D
4. Disconnect door lock actuator harness connector.
5. Remove door lock assembly TORX bolts.
6. Remove door lock assembly while locating inside handle cable and door lock cable to the bottom side of E
rear partition sash.
INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal. F
CAUTION:
• Never reuse TORX bolt. Always replace it with a new one when it is removed.
• Check door open/close, lock/unlock operation after installation. G
• Check door lock cable is properly engaged with outside handle bracket.
• Check door lock assembly for poor lubrication. Apply body
grease to door lock if necessary.
H
: Body grease

JMKIA8087ZZ

INSIDE HANDLE DLK

INSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007850150

L
REMOVAL
1. Remove rear door finisher. Refer to INT-18, "POWER WINDOW MODELS : Removal and Installation"
(power window models) or INT-21, "MANUAL WINDOW MODELS : Removal and Installation" (manual M
window models).
2. Remove upper side of sealing screen.
NOTE:
N
Cut the butyl tape so that some parts of the butyl tape do not remain on the sealing screen, if the sealing
screen is reused.
3. Disengage lock knob cable (2) and inside handle cable (3) from
cable clip (1). O

JMKIA8088ZZ

Revision: 2012 July DLK-331 N17


REAR DOOR LOCK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
4. Remove inside handle mounting bolt.
5. Disengage inside handle (1) from door panel (2) while sliding
inside handle toward vehicle rear, and then separate inside han-
dle.

: Pawl
: Vehicle front

JMKIA8079ZZ

6. Disengage inside handle cable (3) and lock knob cable (2), and
then remove inside handle (1).

JMKIA5885ZZ

INSTALLATION
Note the following item, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Check door open/close, lock/unlock operation after installation.
OUTSIDE HANDLE
OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007850151

REMOVAL
1. Fully close rear door glass.
2. Remove rear door finisher. Refer to INT-18, "POWER WINDOW MODELS : Removal and Installation"
(power window models) or INT-21, "MANUAL WINDOW MODELS : Removal and Installation" (manual
window models).
3. Remove sealing screen.
NOTE:
Cut the butyl-tape so that some parts of the butyl-tape do not remain on the sealing screen, if the sealing
screen is reused.
4. Remove door side grommet, and loosen TORX bolt from grom-
met hole.

JMKIA1467ZZ

Revision: 2012 July DLK-332 N17


REAR DOOR LOCK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
5. While pulling outside handle, remove outside handle escutch-
eon. A

JMKIA5342ZZ

D
6. While pulling outside handle (1), slide toward rear of vehicle to
remove outside handle.
E

G
JMKIA0524ZZ

7. Remove front gasket (1) and rear gasket (2).


H
: Vehicle front

JMKIA5889ZZ
DLK
8. Slide outside handle bracket toward rear of vehicle to remove.

: Vehicle front L

N
JMKIA5890ZZ

9. Disconnect outside handle cable (1) from outside handle bracket O


(2).

JMKIA5891ZZ

Revision: 2012 July DLK-333 N17


REAR DOOR LOCK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Check door open/close, lock/unlock operation after installation.
• Check door lock cable is properly engaged with outside handle bracket.

Revision: 2012 July DLK-334 N17


TRUNK LID LOCK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
TRUNK LID LOCK
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000007079560

LHD models B

I
JMKIA8173GB

1. Trunk lid opener handle 2. Trunk lid opener cable 3. Cable protector J
4. Trunk lid striker 5. Trunk lid lock assembly 6. Key rod (if equipped)
7. Trunk key cylinder (if equipped)
: Always replace after every disassembly. DLK

: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)

: Body grease L

Revision: 2012 July DLK-335 N17


TRUNK LID LOCK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
RHD models

JMKIA9323GB

1. Trunk lid opener handle 2. Trunk lid opener cable 3. Cable protector
4. Trunk lid striker 5. Trunk lid lock assembly 6. Key rod (if equipped)
7. Trunk key cylinder (if equipped)
: Always replace after every disassembly.

: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)

: Body grease

Models without trunk opener

JMKIA9324GB

1. Trunk lid strike 2. Trunk lid lock assembly 3. Key rod


4. Trunk key cylinder

Revision: 2012 July DLK-336 N17


TRUNK LID LOCK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)


A
: Body grease

TRUNK LID LOCK


B
TRUNK LID LOCK : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007851566

REMOVAL C
1. Disconnect harness connector (A) from trunk lid lock assembly
(1).
D

F
JMKIA9399ZZ

2. Remove trunk lid finisher inner (if equipped). Refer to INT-42, "Removal and Installation". G
3. Disengage rod holder (1), and then separate trunk lid lock rod
(3) from trunk lid lock assembly (2).
H

J
JMKIA8131ZZ

4. Remove trunk lid lock assembly mounting bolts, and then DLK
remove trunk lid lock assembly (1).

JMKIA8132ZZ N
INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: O
• Check trunk lid open/close, lock/unlock operation after installation.

Revision: 2012 July DLK-337 N17


TRUNK LID LOCK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
• Check trunk lid lock assembly for poor lubrication. Apply
body grease to trunk lid lock if necessary.

: Body grease

JMKIA8133ZZ

TRUNK LID OPENER HANDLE


TRUNK LID OPENER HANDLE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007793129

REMOVAL
LHD models
1. Remove front kicking plate inner LH. INT-25, "KICKING PLATE INNER : Removal and Installation".
2. Remove dash side finisher LH. Refer to INT-26, "DASH SIDE FINISHER : Removal and Installation".
3. Disengage harness protector (1), and then pull up floor trim (2).

JMKIA8134ZZ

4. Remove trunk lid opener handle mounting bolts.


5. Disconnect trunk lid opener cable (1) from trunk lid opener han-
dle (2).
CAUTION:
Never damage the trunk lid opener cable.

JMKIA8135ZZ

RHD models
1. Remove front kicking plate inner RH. INT-25, "KICKING PLATE INNER : Removal and Installation".
2. Remove dash side finisher RH. Refer to INT-26, "DASH SIDE FINISHER : Removal and Installation".

Revision: 2012 July DLK-338 N17


TRUNK LID LOCK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
3. Disengage harness protector (1), and then pull up floor trim (2).
A

JMKIA9325ZZ

D
4. Remove trunk lid opener handle mounting bolts.
5. Disconnect trunk lid opener cable (1) from trunk lid opener han-
dle (2). E
CAUTION:
Never damage the trunk lid opener cable.
F

JMKIA9326ZZ

INSTALLATION H
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Check that trunk lid opener cables are normally engaged with trunk lid opener handle. I
• After installation, check trunk lid open/close, and lock/unlock operation.
TRUNK LID OPENER CABLE
J
TRUNK LID OPENER CABLE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007079563

REMOVAL DLK
LHD models
1. Remove trunk lid striker. Refer to DLK-315, "TRUNK LID STRIKER : Removal and Installation".
2. Remove trunk side finisher LH. Refer to INT-40, "TRUNK SIDE FINISHER : Removal and Installation". L
3. Remove front kicking plate inner LH and rear kicking plate inner LH. Refer to INT-25, "KICKING PLATE
INNER : Removal and Installation".
M
4. Remove center pillar lower garnish LH. Refer to INT-27, "CENTER PILLAR LOWER GARNISH : Removal
and Installation".
5. Remove trunk lid opener handle. Refer to DLK-338, "TRUNK LID OPENER HANDLE : Removal and
Installation". N
6. Remove trunk lid opener cable.
CAUTION:
Never damage the trunk lid opener cable. O
RHD models
1. Remove trunk lid striker. Refer to DLK-315, "TRUNK LID STRIKER : Removal and Installation".
P
2. Remove trunk side finisher LH. Refer to INT-40, "TRUNK SIDE FINISHER : Removal and Installation".
3. Remove front kicking plate inner RH and rear kicking plate inner LH and RH. Refer to INT-25, "KICKING
PLATE INNER : Removal and Installation".
4. Remove center pillar lower garnish RH. Refer to INT-27, "CENTER PILLAR LOWER GARNISH : Removal
and Installation".
5. Remove trunk lid opener handle. Refer to DLK-338, "TRUNK LID OPENER HANDLE : Removal and
Installation".

Revision: 2012 July DLK-339 N17


TRUNK LID LOCK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
6. Remove trunk lid opener cable.
CAUTION:
Never damage the trunk lid opener cable.
INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
After installation, check trunk lid open/close, and lock/unlock operation.
EMERGENCY LEVER
EMERGENCY LEVER : Unlock procedures INFOID:0000000007079564

UNLOCK PROCEDURES
NOTE:
If trunk lid lock cannot be unlocked due to a malfunction or battery discharge, follow the procedures to unlock
back door.

From inside the vehicle, rotate emergency lever (1) toward lower
direction and unlock.

JMKIA8136ZZ

Revision: 2012 July DLK-340 N17


FUEL FILLER LID OPENER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
FUEL FILLER LID OPENER
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000007079565

LHD models B

I
JMKIA8174ZZ

1. Fuel filler lid opener cable 2. Spring 3. Fuel filler lid assembly J
4. Bumper rubber 5. Fuel filler lid lock assembly 6. Cable protector
: Clip
DLK
: Always replace after every disassembly.

Revision: 2012 July DLK-341 N17


FUEL FILLER LID OPENER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
RHD models

JMKIA9329ZZ

1. Fuel filler lid opener cable 2. Spring 3. Fuel filler lid assembly
4. Bumper rubber 5. Fuel filler lid lock assembly 6. Cable protector
: Clip
: Always replace after every disassembly.

FUEL FILLER LID


FUEL FILLER LID : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007079566

REMOVAL
1. Fully open fuel filler lid.
2. Remove fuel mounting pin (1).

JMKIA8137ZZ

3. Remove mounting screws, and then remove fuel filler lid.


INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
After installation, check fuel filler lid assembly open/close, lock/unlock operation.
NOTE:
• The following table shows the specified values for checking normal installation status.
• Fitting adjustment cannot be performed.

Revision: 2012 July DLK-342 N17


FUEL FILLER LID OPENER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
Unit: mm [in]
Portion Clearance Evenness A
Fuel filler lid – Body side outer 2.0 – 4.0 [0.079 – 0.157] (−1.0) – (+1.0) [(−0.039) – (+0.039)]
FUEL FILLER OPENER CABLE B

FUEL FILLER OPENER CABLE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007079567

C
REMOVAL
LHD models
1. Remove hood lock control handle mounting bolts (A) of hood D
lock control cable assembly.

JMKIA7998ZZ
G

2. Disconnect fuel filler lid opener cable (2) from fuel filler lid
opener lever (1). H

JMKIA7999ZZ

DLK
3. Remove front kicking plate inner LH and rear kicking plate inner LH. Refer to INT-25, "KICKING PLATE
INNER : Removal and Installation".
4. Remove dash side finisher LH. Refer to INT-26, "DASH SIDE FINISHER : Removal and Installation". L
5. Remove center pillar lower garnish LH. Refer to INT-27, "CENTER PILLAR LOWER GARNISH : Removal
and Installation".
6. Remove trunk side finisher LH. Refer to INT-40, "TRUNK SIDE FINISHER : Removal and Installation". M
7. Remove fuel filler lid opener cable from fuel filler lid lock assembly. Refer to DLK-344, "FUEL FILLER LID
LOCK : Removal and Installation".
8. Disengage each harness protector (1), and then remove fuel N
filler lid opener cable (2).

JMKIA5720ZZ

9. Remove fuel filler lid opener cable fixing clips, and then remove fuel filler lid opener cable.
RHD models

Revision: 2012 July DLK-343 N17


FUEL FILLER LID OPENER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
1. Remove hood lock control handle mounting bolts (A) of hood
lock control cable assembly.

JMKIA5707ZZ

2. Disconnect fuel filler lid opener cable (2) from fuel filler lid
opener lever (1).

JMKIA5708ZZ

3. Remove front kicking plate inner RH and rear kicking plate inner LH and RH. Refer to INT-25, "KICKING
PLATE INNER : Removal and Installation".
4. Remove dash side finisher RH. Refer to INT-26, "DASH SIDE FINISHER : Removal and Installation".
5. Remove center pillar lower garnish RH. Refer to INT-27, "CENTER PILLAR LOWER GARNISH : Removal
and Installation".
6. Remove trunk side finisher LH. Refer to INT-40, "TRUNK SIDE FINISHER : Removal and Installation".
7. Remove fuel filler lid opener cable from fuel filler lid lock assembly. Refer to DLK-344, "FUEL FILLER LID
LOCK : Removal and Installation".
8. Disengage each harness protector (1), and then remove fuel
filler lid opener cable (2).

JMKIA5720ZZ

9. Remove fuel filler lid opener cable fixing clips, and then remove fuel filler lid opener cable.
INSTALLATION
Note the following item, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
After installation, check fuel filler lid assembly open/close, lock/unlock operation.
FUEL FILLER LID LOCK
FUEL FILLER LID LOCK : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007079568

REMOVAL
1. Fully open fuel filler lid.
2. Remove trunk side finisher LH. Refer to INT-40, "TRUNK SIDE FINISHER : Removal and Installation".

Revision: 2012 July DLK-344 N17


FUEL FILLER LID OPENER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
3. Disengage pawls (A) of fuel filler lid lock assembly (1) and push
out fuel filler lid lock assembly toward the vehicle outside. A
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage packing (2) when removing.
B

JMKIA8138ZZ

D
4. Disconnect fuel filler lid cable (1) from fuel filler lid lock assembly
(2).
E

G
JMKIA8139ZZ

INSTALLATION
Note the following item, and install in the reverse order of removal. H
CAUTION:
After installation, check fuel filler lid assembly open/close, lock/unlock operation.
I

DLK

Revision: 2012 July DLK-345 N17


DOOR SWITCH
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
DOOR SWITCH
Exploded View INFOID:0000000007081697

JMKIA2569GB

1. Door switch 2. TORX bolt

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007081698

REMOVAL
Remove the TORX bolt (A), and then remove door switch (1).

JMKIA2173ZZ

INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: 2012 July DLK-346 N17


DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH
A
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007797643

REMOVAL B
1. Remove the door key cylinder assembly (driver side). Refer to DLK-327, "OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal
and Installation".
2. Remove door key cylinder switch. C
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
D

DLK

Revision: 2012 July DLK-347 N17


REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007081699

REMOVAL
1. Remove the instrument finisher B. Refer to IP-13, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove the remote keyless entry receiver (1) mounting bolt (A),
and then remove remote keyless entry receiver.

JMKIA7947ZZ

INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: 2012 July DLK-348 N17


KEYFOB BATTERY
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
KEYFOB BATTERY
A
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000006655354

REMOVAL B
1. Remove screw on the rear of keyfob.
2. Place the key with the lower case facing up. Set remover tool wrapped with tape between upper case and
lower case and then separate the lower case from the upper case. C
CAUTION:
• Do not touch the circuit board or battery terminal.
• The keyfob is water-resistant. However, if it does get wet, immediately wipe it dry.
3. When replacing the circuit board assembly, remove circuit board assembly from the upper case. D
[Circuit board assembly: Switch rubber + Board surface]
CAUTION:
Do not touch the printed circuits directly. E
4. Remove the battery from the lower case and replace it.

Battery replacement : Coin-type lithium battery (CR1620)


F
CAUTION:
When replacing battery, keep dirt, grease, and other foreign materials off the electrode contact
area.
G
5. After replacement, fit the lower and upper cases together, and then tighten with the screw.
CAUTION:
After replacing the battery, Be sure to check that door locking operates normally using the keyfob.
Refer to DLK-254, "Component Function Check". H

INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal. I

DLK

Revision: 2012 July DLK-349 N17

You might also like